Today's Hours: 8:00am - 10:00pm

Books

all 391 "L" titles
  • Digital
    Vinood B. Patel, Victor R. Preedy, Rajkumar Rajendram, editors.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Basic Processes at the Cellular Levels
    Arginine uptake by cells
    L-arginine and the expression of HSP70 and p-53 proteins
    AMP-activated protein kinase and L-arginine
    Amidine-based compounds affecting arginine metabolism
    Oxy- and sulfoanalogues of L-arginine
    Regulation of expression and activity of L-arginine transporters by nutrients and hormones: A focus in transcriptional mechanisms regulated by glucose and insulin
    Arginine, pancreatic beta cell function and diabetes: mechanisms of stimulated insulin release and pathways of metabolism
    Erythrocytes by-products of arginine catabolism
    Section 2: Arginine Metabolism and Functions
    Arginine synthesis from enteral proline
    Arginine and macrophages: role in classical and alternative activation
    Arginine and TNF alpha production in macrophages: a focus on metabolism, ageing, metabolic syndrome and type 2 diabetes
    Arginine metabolism impairment during sepsis and diseases: causes and consequences
    Use of arginine with Growth Hormone Releasing Hormone (GHRH) and the endocrine response
    Serum arginase in healthy subjects and nitric oxide
    Section 3: Arginine Status in Cells Related to Organ Damage and Disease
    Protein Arginine Methylation of RNA-binding Proteins and Their Impact on Human Diseases
    DNA-arginine adducts and implications in disease
    Homoarginine and L-arginine: Glycine amidinotransferase in stroke
    The L-arginine/asymmetric dimethylarginine (ADMA) ratio in health and disease: an overview
    Arginine and its transporters in colorectal cancer
    Arginine Uptake and Its Role in the Survival of Breast Cancer Cells
    Section 4: Arginine Status and Use in Healthy Individuals
    Arginine production during pregnancy
    L-arginine in the uterus and placenta and during gestation in mammals
    Oral L-arginine supplementation in young males: endocrinology, metabolic, and physiological responses at rest and during exercise
    Metabolic precursors of L-Arginine supplementation in sport: a focus on L-Citrulline and L-Ornithine
    Section 5: Arginine and Diseases of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Arginine and its use in ameliorating Cryptosporidium parvum infection in undernourished children
    Arginine and Inflammatory Bowel Disease (IBD)
    Dietary L-arginine and intestinal recovery
    Enteral and parenteral arginine supplementation in intestinal ischemia and reperfusion injury
    Mucosal Protection by Arginine in the Upper Gastrointestinal Tract
    Enteral L-arginine and necrotizing enterocolitis
    Section 6: Therapeutic uses of Arginine: Diabetes, Obesity and Cardiovascular Diseases
    L-arginine usage in Type I diabetes: From the autoimmune event to human dietary supplementation
    Oral l-arginine supplementation and glucose metabolism and vascular function
    Arginine enriched apples and diabetic control
    Beneficial impact of cod protein, arginine and other amino acids on insulin sensitivity
    Obese subjects and supplemental L-arginine
    Mitochondrial cardiomyopathy and usage of L-arginine
    Arginine Measurement and Concentrations in Hypertension and other Cardiovascular Disease
    L-Arginine and cardiovascular disease
    Arginine therapy in sickle cell disease
    Section 7: Therapeutic Uses of Arginine: Cancer, Wound Healing and Infectious Disease
    Role of arginine in surgical patients with head and neck cancer
    Arginine-Incorporated Albumin Mesospheres: A Drug Delivery System for Cancer Therapy
    Use of L-arginine and glycine supplementation to reduce radiotherapy damage
    Arginine in Cancer Therapy
    Mechanisms of Arginine-Auxotrophic Response and Their Cancer Therapeutic Implications
    The role of arginine in wound healing
    L-arginine and bacterial translocation: implications for health
    L-arginine in Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    Arginine in Health and Disease: Recommended Resources and Further Reading.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Hope Jahren.
    Summary: Jahren has built three laboratories in which she's studied trees, flowers, seeds, and soil. She tells about her childhood in rural Minnesota with an uncompromising mother and a father who encouraged hours of play in his classroom's labs; about how she found a sanctuary in science, and the disappointments, triumphs and exhilarating discoveries of scientific work. Yet at the core of this book is the story of a relationship Jahren forged with Bill, who becomes her lab partner and best friend. Their sometimes rogue adventures in science take them over the Atlantic to the ever-light skies of the North Pole and to tropical Hawaii, where she and her lab currently make their home.

    Contents:
    Prologue
    Roots and leaves
    Wood and knots
    Flowers and fruit
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    QH31.J344 A3 2016
    1
  • Print
    Hope Jahren.
    Summary: An illuminating debut memoir of a woman in science; a moving portrait of a longtime friendship; and a stunningly fresh look at plants that will forever change how you see the natural world. Acclaimed scientist Hope Jahren has built three laboratories in which she's studied trees, flowers, seeds, and soil. Her first book is a revelatory treatise on plant life but it is also so much more. "Lab Girl" is a book about work, love, and the mountains that can be moved when those two things come together. It is told through Jahren's remarkable stories: about her childhood in rural Minnesota with an uncompromising mother and a father who encouraged hours of play in his classroom's labs; about how she found a sanctuary in science, and learned to perform lab work done with both the heart and the hands; and about the inevitable disappointments, but also the triumphs and exhilarating discoveries, of scientific work. Yet at the core of this book is the story of a relationship Jahren forged with a brilliant, wounded man named Bill, who becomes her lab partner and best friend. Their sometimes rogue adventures in science take them from the Midwest across the United States and back again, over the Atlantic to the ever-light skies of the North Pole and to tropical Hawaii, where she and her lab currently make their home. Jahren's probing look at plants, her astonishing tenacity of spirit, and her acute insights on nature enliven every page of this extraordinary book. "Lab Girl" opens your eyes to the beautiful, sophisticated mechanisms within every leaf, blade of grass, and flower petal. Here is an eloquent demonstration of what can happen when you find the stamina, passion, and sense of sacrifice needed to make a life out of what you truly love, as you discover along the way the person you were meant to be. -- Publisher description.

    Contents:
    Prologue
    Roots and leaves
    Wood and knots
    Flowers and fruit
    Epilogue.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Prof Dev 119
    1
  • Digital
    edited by James G. Fox, editor-in-chief, Lynn C. Anderson, Glen M. Otto, Kathleen R. Pritchett-Corning, Mark T. Whary.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Kathryn Bayne, Patricia V. Turner.
    Summary: Laboratory Animal Welfare provides a comprehensive, up-to-date look into the new science of animal welfare within laboratory research. Animals specifically considered include rodents, cats and dogs, nonhuman primates, agricultural animals, avian animals and aquatic animals. The book examines the impact of experiment design and environment on animal welfare, as well as emergency situations and euthanasia practices. Readers will benefit from a review of regulations and policy guidelines concerning lab animal use, as well as information on assessing animal welfare. With discussions of the history and ethics of animals in research, and a debate on contemporary and international issues, this book is a go-to resource for laboratory animal welfare.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Javier Guillén.
    Contents:
    1. Same principles, some differences / Javier Guillen and Patri Vergara
    2. Oversight of research animal welfare in the United States / John F. Bradfield, B. Taylor Bennett, and Cynthia S. Gillett
    3. Canada's oversight of animal use in science / Gilly Griffin and Michael Baar
    4. Laboratory animal science legislation in Latin America / Ekaterina Akimovna Botovchenco Rivera [and three others]
    5. The European framework on research animal welfare regulations and guidelines / Javier Guillen [and three others]
    6. Israeli legislation and regulation on the use of animals in biological and medical research / Rony Kalman [and three others]
    7. Animal experimentation in Africa : legislation and guidelines / Amanda R. Hau [and five others]
    8. Laws, regulations, and guidelines shaping research animal care and use in India / Syed SYH Qadri and Christian E. Newcomer
    9. Oversight of animal research in China / Kathryn Bayne and Jianfei Wang
    10. Laws, regulations, guidelines, and principles pertaining to laboratory animals in Far East Asia / Tsutomu Miki-Kurosawa, Jae Hak Park, and Chou-Chu Hong
    11. Laws, regulations, guidelines, and principles pertaining to laboratory animals in Southeast Asia / Montip Gettayacamin [and eight others]
    12. Laboratory animals regulations and recommendations for global collaborative research : Australia and New Zealand / John Schofield [and three others].
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Witthaus, R. A.
    Digital Access Google Books 1886-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J53 .W83 1886
    1
  • Digital
    Sterling T. Bennett, Christopher M. Lehman, George M. Rodgers, editors ; with contributions by Kristi J. Smock and Robert C. Blaylock.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Deborah A. Kegelmeyer, Anne D. Kloos, and Amelia B. Siles
    Summary: "This laboratory manual is a compilation of years of work developing the neurologic and geriatric rehabilitation laboratory course at the Ohio State University. It is a constantly evolving course, but we wanted to capture the essence of the course and share it so that other instructors could utilize the resources developed over the years. This manual is designed to be used in conjunction with the textbook Neurologic Rehabilitation: Neuroscience and Neuroplasticity in Physical Therapy Practice but could be used with other neurologic rehabilitation textbooks."--Preface

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Movement Analysis
    Chapter 2: Motor Learning and Skill Acquisition-- Chapter 3: Brain Circulation
    Chapter 4: Examination of the Neurologic System
    Chapter 5: Examination and Evaluation: Outcome Measure Interpretation
    Chapter 6: Evaluation of the Client With a Neurologic Lesion: Case Study
    Chapter 7: Sitting Upright and Trunk Control
    Chapter 8: Respiratory Management in Neurological Disorders
    Chapter 9: Bed Mobility, Positioning, and Range of Motion
    Chapter 10: Transfers
    Chapter 11: Gait Training in the Client With Hemiplegia
    Chapter 12: Upper Extremity in Stroke
    Chapter 13: Managing Clients With Perceptual Deficits
    Chapter 14: Spinal Cord Injury Foundations
    Chapter 15: Spinal Cord Injury: Bed Mobility Laboratory
    Chapter 16: Spinal Cord Injury Transfer Training
    Chapter 17: Spinal Cord Injury: Wheelchair Skills
    Chapter 18: Spinal Cord Injury: Ambulation Skills
    Chapter 19: Balance Laboratory
    Chapter 20: Examination and Treatment of Vestibular System Disorders
    Chapter 21: Lower Motor Neuron Disorders
    Chapter 22: Managing the Client With Parkinson's Disease
    Chapter 23: Managing Clients With Multiple Sclerosis and Cerebellar Ataxia
    Chapter 24: Brain Injury: Treatment Based on Level of Cognitive Function.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2020
  • Print
    editor, George J. Race.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Clinical chemistry
    v. 2. Hematology and blood banking. Medical microbiology, serology, and immunology
    v. 3. Special techniques
    v. 4. Body fluids, including urine. Cytology and cytogenetics. Laboratory management and function
    v. [5] Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RB37 .R3 1973
    5
  • Digital
    edited by Jon Lorsch.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Kelly Small Casler, Kate Sustersic Gawlik, editors.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    by Anders Kallner.
    Summary: Laboratory Statistics: Handbook of Formulas and Terms presents common strategies for comparing and evaluating numerical laboratory data. In particular, the text deals with the type of data and problems that laboratory scientists and students in analytical chemistry, clinical chemistry, epidemiology, and clinical research face on a daily basis. This book takes the mystery out of statistics and provides simple, hands-on instructions in the format of everyday formulas. As far as possible, spreadsheet shortcuts and functions are included, along with many simple worked examples. This book is a must-have guide to applied statistics in the lab that will result in improved experimental design and analysis. Comprehensive coverage of simple statistical concepts familiarizes the reader with formatted statistical expressionSimple, worked examples make formulas easy to use in real lifeSpreadsheet functions demonstrate how to find immediate solutions to common problemsIn-depth indexing and frequent use of synonyms facilitate the quick location of appropriate procedures.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Aaron Gardner, Wilko Duprez, Sarah Stauffer, Dewi Ayu Kencana Ungu, Frederik Clauson-Kaas.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Aaron Gardner, Sarah Stauffer, Lindsay Petley-Ragan, Philip Wismer, Dewi Ayu Kencana Ungu.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Adam J. Cohen, Michael Mercandetti, Brian Brazzo.
    Summary: While there are books that review lacrimal system disorders and surgery as a section of comprehensive oculoplastic textbooks, The Lacrimal System: Diagnosis, Management and Surgery solely addresses Lacrimology in one concise, practical volume. Building off of the success of the first edition, this text includes significantly updated information, new authors from around the world as well as new chapters that are complete with high quality images and illustrations. Lacrimal surgeries are commonly performed by oculoplastic surgeons and range from alleviating lacrimal system obstructions in children with congenital dysmorphology to minimally invasive lacrimal system reconstruction. The second edition of this book meets the needs of practicing physicians, fellows, and residents who are managing the tearing patient clinically and surgically.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    edited by Bruce L. Larson and Vearl R. Smith.
    Contents:
    v. 1. The mammary gland: development and maintenance
    v. 2. Biosynthesis and secretion of milk. Diseases
    v. 3. Nutrition and biochemistry of milk. Maintenance.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QP246 .L38
    4
  • Digital
    Wei Chen, editor.
    Summary: This book introduces readers to basic studies on and applied techniques involving lactic acid bacteria, including their bioengineering and industrial applications. It summarizes recent biotechnological advances in lactic acid bacteria for food and health, and provides detailed information on the applications of these bacteria in fermented foods. Accordingly, it offers a valuable resource for researchers and graduate students in the fields of food microbiology, bioengineering, fermentation engineering, food science, nutrition and health.

    Contents:
    Lactic acid bacteria and #x1B;(Sd#x1B;(B-aminobutyric acid and diacetyl
    Lactic acid bacteria and conjugated fatty acids
    Lactic acid bacteria and B vitamins
    Bacteriocins of lactic acid bacteria
    Preparation techniques of lactic acid bacteria starters
    Lactic acid bacteria and fermented cereals
    Lactic acid bacteria and fermented fruit and vegetables
    Lactic acid bacteria and fermented meat products
    The Preparation technology of pharmaceutical preparations
    Lactic acid bacteria in animal breeding and aquaculture.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Wei Chen, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the latest research and new techniques in the field of lactic acid bacteria, including comparative genomics, transcriptomics, proteomics and metabolomics. It also introduces the omics and functional evaluation in detail and shows the links between lactic acid bacteria and gut health and host immunity. Summarizing the biotechnological advances in lactic acid bacteria for food and health, it is a valuable resource for researchers and graduate students in the fields of food microbiology, bioengineering, food science, nutrition and health.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Genetic operation system of lactic acid bacteria and its applications
    Comparative Genomic Analyses of Lactic Acid Bacteria
    Transcriptomics of lactic acid bacteria
    Proteomics of lactic acid bacteria
    Metabolomics of lactic acid bacteria
    Functional evaluation model for Lactic acid bacteria
    Lactic acid bacteria and intestinal health
    Lactic acid bacteria and host immunity
    Widely used lactic acid bacteria strains with excellent physiological functions
    Safety Evaluation of Lactic Acid Bacteria.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Wei Chen, Arjan Narbad.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of the physiological basis of lactic acid bacteria and their applications in minimizing foodborne risks, such as pathogens, heavy metal pollution, biotoxin contamination and food-based allergies. While highlighting the mechanisms responsible for these biological effects, it also addresses the challenges and opportunities that lactic acid bacteria represent in food safety management. It offers a valuable resource for researchers, graduate students, nutritionists and product developers in the fields of food science and microbiology.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Genomic analysis of lactic acid bacteria and their applications
    Proteins and exopolysaccharides of lactic acid bacteria
    Metabolites of lactic acid bacteria
    Environmental stress responses of lactic acid bacteria
    Lactic acid bacteria-based food fermentations
    Lactic acid bacteria and foodborne pathogens
    Applications of lactic acid bacteria in heavy metal pollution environment
    Lactic acid bacteria and food-based allergy
    Lactic acid bacteria and biotoxins.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Andrew M. Muir, Charles C. Krueger, Michael J. Hansen, Stephen C. Riley, editors.
    Summary: The lake charr Salvelinus namaycush is a ubiquitous member of cold-water lake ecosystems in previously glaciated regions of northern continental U.S., Alaska, and Canada that often support important commercial, recreational, and subsistence fisheries. The lake charr differs from other charrs by its large size, longevity, iteroparity, top-predator specialization, reduced sexual dimorphism, prevalence of lacustrine spawning, and use of deepwater habitat. The species is remarkably variable in phenotype, physiology, and life history, some of which is reflected in its ecology and genetics, with as many as four morphs or ecotypes co-occurring in a single lake. The lake charr is often the top predator in these systems, but is highly adaptable trophically, and is frequently planktivorous in small lakes. The lake charr by their name highlights their common habitat, lakes both large and small, but often frequents rivers and occasionally moves into the Arctic Ocean. Movement and behaviour of lake charr are motivated by access to cool, well-oxygenated water, foraging opportunities, predator avoidance, and reproduction. Owing to their broad distribution and trophic level, the lake charr serves as a sentinel of anthropogenic change. This volume will provide an up-to-date summary of what is currently known about lake charr from distribution to genetics to physiology to ecology. The book provides a compilation and synthesis of available information on the lake charr, beginning with an updated distribution and a revised treatment of the paleoecology of the species. Understanding of ecological and genetic diversity and movement and behaviour of the species has advanced remarkably since the last major synthesis on the species over 40 years ago. Mid-sections of the book provide detailed accounts of the biology and life history of the species, and later sections are devoted to threats to conservation and fishery management practices used to ensure sustainability. A new standard lake charr-specific terminology is also presented. The book will be a valuable reference text for biologists around the world, ecologists, and fishery managers, and of interest to the angling public.

    Contents:
    Introduction. The Lake Charr: Biology, Ecology, Distribution, and Management
    Distribution
    Paleoecology
    Ecological Diversity
    Genetic Diversity
    Habitat
    Movement Ecology and Behavior
    Life History and Population Dynamics
    Trophic Ecology
    Reproduction
    Contaminants and Ecotoxicology
    A General, Life History Based Model for Sustainable Exploitation of Lake Charr across their Range
    Terminology Issues in Lake Charr Early Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, David P. Hamilton, Kevin J. Collier, John M. Quinn and Clive Howard-Willia.
    Summary: Lakes across the globe require help. The Lake Restoration Handbook: A New Zealand Perspective addresses this need through a series of chapters that draw on recent advances in modelling and monitoring tools, citizen science and First Peoples' roles, catchment and lake-focused restoration techniques, and policy implementation. New Zealand lakes, like lakes across the globe, are subject to multiple pressures that have increased in severity and scale as land use has intensified, invasive species have spread and global climate change becomes manifest. This books builds on the popular Lake Managers Handbook (1987), which provided guidance on undertaking investigations into, and understanding lake ecosystems in New Zealand. The Lake Restoration Handbook: A New Zealand Perspective synthesises contemporary issues related to lake restoration and rehabilitation, integrated with social science and cultural viewpoints, and complemented by authoritative topic-area summaries by renowned scientists and practitioners from across the globe. The book examines the progress of lake restoration and the new and emerging tools available to managers for predicting and effecting change. The book will be a valuable resource for natural and social scientists, policy writers, lake managers, and anyone interested in the health of lake ecosystems.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Margaret F. Docker, editor.
    Summary: This book, published in two volumes, provides the most comprehensive review of lamprey biology since Hardisty and Potter's "The Biology of Lampreys" published more than 30 years ago. This second volume offers a synthesis of topics related to the lamprey gonad (e.g., lamprey sex ratios, sex determination and sex differentiation, sexual maturation, and sex steroids), the artifical propagation of lampreys, post-metamorphic feeding and the evolution of alternative feeding and migratory types, the history and status of sea lamprey control in the Laurentian Great Lakes and Lake Champlain, and an overview of contributions of lamprey developmental studies for understanding vertebrate evolution.

    Contents:
    1. The Lamprey Gonad
    2. Lamprey Reproduction and Early Life History: Insights from Artificial Propagation
    3. Post-Metamorphic Feeding in Lampreys
    4. Life History Evolution in Lampreys: Alternative Migratory and Feeding Types
    5. Control of Invasive Sea Lamprey in the Great Lakes, Lake Champlain, and Finger Lakes of New York
    6. The Lamprey as a Model Vertebrate in Evolutionary Developmental Biology
    7. There and Back Again: Lampreys in the 21st Century and Beyond.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Makiko Kaga, Kimitaka Kaga.
    Summary: This book addresses current topics concerning Landau-Kleffner Syndrome (LKS) and related central auditory disorders from the perspectives of epidemiology, diagnosis, genetics and clinical treatment. LKS is a rare childhood neurological disorder and manifests auditory agnosia as the central auditory verbal dysfunction. In many cases, LKS patients also suffer from epileptic seizures. The book is divided into two parts, the first of which outlines LKS from its historical background to clinical treatment. In turn, the second part examines current topics involving related central auditory disorders, for purposes of comparing them with LKS. The book offers a valuable resource for many specialists, such as pediatric neurologists, neuropsychologists, audiologists and epileptologists, with an interest in this field.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Landau-Kleffner Syndrome (LKS).
    History of LKS and its epidemiology
    Diagnostic paradigms
    Etiology and genetics
    Treatment and long-term prognosis
    Case histories
    Fifty years in the history of Landau-Kleffner Syndrome (LKS). Part 2. Related central auditory disorders.
    Adrenoleukodystrophy (ALD)
    Cerebrovascular accidents
    Auditory agnosia in children due to Herpes Encephalitis
    Transient auditory agnosia/cortical deafness during the recovery phase of acute encephalopathy of unknown origin
    Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease
    Long-term hydrocephalus
    Brain malformation and hydrocephalus.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Santosh Yajnik.
    Summary: This book describes the evolution of treatment in oncology through the lens of approximately 250 landmark clinical trials. The well-designed clinical trial is essential to the practice of medicine. There is no field that has embraced or been transformed more by the clinical trial than oncology. Each primary cancer site has a remarkable story that can be told through clinical trials. For example, patients who presented decades ago with soft tissue sarcoma of the extremities would invariably undergo limb amputation. The landmark National Cancer Institute study by Rosenberg et al. randomized patients to limb sparing surgery followed by adjuvant radiation therapy compared with limb amputation. This study helped change the standard of care by allowing most patients to retain their functioning limbs with an improvement in quality of life and no compromise in overall survival. Such major clinical trials for common malignancies including breast, prostate, lung, gastrointestinal, genitourinary, and gynecologic cancers are discussed. Because oncology is multidisciplinary, this book should be of interest for radiation oncologists, surgeons, medical oncologists, and other physicians interested in learning more about the landmark trials that have shaped oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Garik Gutman, Jiquan Chen, Geoffrey M. Henebry, Martin Kappas, editors.
    Summary: This volume is a compilation of studies on interactions of changes in land cover, land use and climate with people, societies and ecosystems in drylands of Greater Central Asia. It explores the effects of collapse of socialist governance and management systems on land use in various parts of Central Asia, including former Soviet Union republics, Mongolia and northern drylands of China. Often, regional land-atmosphere feedbacks may have large global importance. Remote sensing is a primary tool in studying vast dryland territories where in situ observations are sporadic. State-of-the-art methods of satellite remote sensing combined with GIS and models are used to tackle science questions and provide an outlook of current changes at land surface and potential scenarios for the future. In 10 chapters, contributing authors cover topics such as water resources, effects of institutional changes on urban centers and agriculture, landscape dynamics, and the primary drivers of environmental changes in dryland environment. Satellite observations that have accumulated during the last five decades provide a rich time series of the dynamic land surface, enabling systematic analysis of changes in land cover and land use from space. The book is a truly international effort by a team of scientists from the U.S., Europe and Central Asia. It is directed at the broad science community including graduate students, academics and other professionals at all levels within natural and social sciences. In particular, it will appeal to geographers, environmental and social scientists, economists, agricultural scientists, and remote sensing specialists.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Multiple Perspectives on Eurasian Drylands
    Dry Land Belt of Northern Eurasia: Contemporary Environmental Changes
    Recent Land Surface Dynamics in Greater Central Asia
    Quantifying the Anthropogenic Signature in Drylands of Central Asia and Its Impact on Water Scarcity and Dust Emissions
    The Complexity and Challenges of Central Asia's Water-Energy-Food Systems
    Assessment of the influences of dust storms on cotton production in Tajikistan
    Population and Urban Dynamics in Drylands of China
    Hydrology and Erosion Risk Parameters for Grasslands in Central Asia
    A Conceptual Framework for Ecosystem Stewardship Based on Landscape Dynamics: Case Studies From Kazakhstan and Mongolia
    Social-Ecological Systems across the Asian Drylands Belt (ADB)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Wilfried Mirschel, Vitaly V. Terleev, Karl-Otto Wenkel.
    Summary: This book contributes to a deeper understanding of landscape and regional modelling in general, and its broad range of facets with respect to various landscape parameters. It presents model approaches for a number of ecological and socio-economic landscape indicators, and also describes spatial decision support systems (DSS), frameworks, and model-based tools, which are prerequisites for deriving sustainable decision and solution strategies for the protection of comprehensively functioning landscapes. While it mainly focuses on the latest research findings in regional modelling and DSS in Europe, it also highlights the work of scientists from Russia. The book is intended for landscape modellers, scientists from various fields of landscape research, university teaching staff, and experts in landscape planning and management, landscape conservation and landscape policy.

    Contents:
    Modelling and simulation of agricultural landscapes
    Challenges and perspectives for integrated landscape modelling to support sustainable land use management in agrolandscapes
    Application of ecosystem modelling methodology on rural areas of Crimea
    Systematic approach
    Integral assessment of condition and sustainability of socio-ecological-economic systems
    The use of observation methods and model approaches for estimating regional crop evapotranspiration and yield in agro-landscapes
    Development of landscape-adaptive land use of the Upper Volga region based on geostatistical methods
    Modelling of the suitability of lands to the agrarian use and their resistance to negative processes
    A GIS-based model for the enhancement of rural landscapes: the case-study of Valdera
    Tuscany (Italy)
    Models for describing landscape hydrochemical discharge in mountain countries
    Agent-based modelling of a simple synthetic rangeland ecosystem
    The use of multitemporal spectral information to improve the classification of agricultural crops in landscapes
    Global evaluation of the status and sustainability of terrestrial landscapes and water bodies
    Spatial Estimation of Estonian Forest Landscapes' Soil Cover Humus Status: Methods, Model samples and Assessments
    Dynamics of soil organic matter in agricultural landscapes
    Model based assessment of nutrient load into water bodies from different landscape types
    Model-based estimation of irrigation water demand for different agricultural crops under climate change, presented for the Federal State of Brandenburg, Germany
    Forecasting scanning branches of the hysteresis soil water-retention capacity for calculation of precise irrigation rates in agrolandscapes using a mathematical model
    Estimation of Leaf Area Index (LAI) of Russian Forests Using a Mechanical Model and Forest Inventory Data
    Assessment approach of the spatial wheat cultivation risk for the main cereal cropping regions of Russia
    Model based forecasting winter wheat yields using landscape and climate data
    Actual and model-based assessment of Castor fiber populations for different reserves in the European part of Russia and their impact on ecosystems
    Modelling biodiversity and ecosystem services trade-offs in agricultural landscapes to support planning and policy-making
    Simulating the Effects of Agrochemicals and Other Risk-Bearing Management Measures on the Terrestrial Agrobiodiversity: the RISKMIN Approach
    LandCaRe-DSS
    An interactive model-based decision support system for assessing the impacts of climate change on agriculture and agricultural landscapes
    A spatial analysis framework to assess responses of agricultural landscapes to climates and soils at regional scale
    Integrated modelling approach for land-use changes on different scales
    Assessment of soybeans crop management strategies using crop growth models for Central Brazil
    Estimation of Agro-landscape Productivity in Regional Scale using Dynamic Crop Models in a GIS Environment
    Landscape phenology modelling and decision support in Serbia.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Alexander V. Khoroshev, Kirill N. Dyakonov, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the polycentric and multiscale view of landscape which has been developed in Russia within a framework of physical geography since the early twentieth century. The authors develop the ideas of hierarchical organization of a landscape and strong relationships between abiotic and biotic components with equal attention to both vertical fluxes and lateral transfer. Three-dimensional representation of landscape involves strong emphasis on abiotic drivers of pattern development including relief, geological structures and runoff. The objective of this book is to demonstrate the multiplicity of models and multiscale approach to description and explanation of landscape pattern, functioning, dynamics, and evolution. The contributions deal with various hierarchical levels ranging from within-unit interior variability to between-units interaction at landscape level, as well as regional and supra-regional zonal patterns. Divided into 8 clear parts, the 28 chapters treat spatial pattern in one of the following aspects: indicator of actual matter and energy flows control over actual processes including disturbance expansion as well as determinant of future development indicator of genesis and prerequisite for future trends driver for short-term dynamics of processes response to climatic and anthropogenic influences factor of settlement network and land use adaptation at various historical epochs framework for actual land use spatial arrangement. This contributed volume is written for researchers and students in the field of landscape ecology, physical geography, environmental impact assessment, and ecological planning.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword: Landscape Science
    A Multidisciplinary and Border-Crossing Scientific Approach
    Preface
    Contents
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    Part I: Theory of Landscape Pattern and Hierarchy
    Chapter 1: Concepts of Landscape Pattern
    1.1 What Is Landscape?
    1.2 Notion of Landscape Structure
    1.3 Radial Relations Between Geocomponents
    1.4 Causes of Spatial Heterogeneity
    1.5 Multiplicity of Landscape Structures
    References
    Chapter 2: Polygeosystem Fundamentals of Landscape Science
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Models and Methods 2.3 Facial Analysis of Landscapes
    2.4 Polysystem and Polystructural Interpretation of Knowledge
    2.5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Multipattern (Polystructural) Organization of a Landscape: Geophysical Approach
    3.1 Common Principles of the Landscape Structure Models
    3.2 Typological Model of the Landscape Structure
    3.3 Functional Model of the Geosystem Structure
    3.4 Ecological Zoning of Geosystems Based on Information on Hydrological Functioning
    3.5 Conclusion
    References
    Part II: How Patterns Indicate Actual Processes 5.5 Simulation of the Spatial Structure of 137Cs and Transformation at the Microlandscape Level
    5.6 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 6: Determination of the Order Parameters of the Landscape at the Regional Level
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 General Methodology of Analysis: Definition of the System as an Object of Research
    6.3 Methodology and Methods for Determination of the Hierarchy and the Order Parameters of the Relief
    6.4 Methods of Multidimensional Spatial Analysis and Order Parameters Calculation
    6.5 Study Area and Materials 6.6 Analysis of the Hierarchical Organization, Order Parameters of Relief, and the Allocation of Its Characteristics
    6.7 Analysis of the Properties of Vegetation
    6.8 Analysis of Soil Properties, Soil-Forming Depositions, and Their Genesis
    6.9 Integration of Component Order Parameters
    6.10 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 7: Land Cover Thermodynamic Characteristics Defined by Remote Multispectral Data Based on Nonextensive Statistical Mechanics
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 Materials and Methods
    7.3 Results
    7.4 Discussion
    References Chapter 4: Representation of Process Development Laws in Morphological Pattern Laws: Approach of the Mathematical Morphology of Landscape
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Methods
    4.3 Results
    4.4 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: Transformation of the Chernobyl 137Cs Contamination Patterns at the Microlandscape Level as an Indicator of Stochastic Landscape Organization
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Self-Organization of Nonlinear Hierarchical Landscape Structures
    5.3 Landscape as a Stochastic System
    5.4 Study Area
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Christina von Haaren, Andrew A. Lovett, Christian Albert, editors.
    Summary: Human well-being depends in many ways on maintaining the stock of natural resources which deliver the services from which humans benefit. However, these resources and flows of services are increasingly threatened by unsustainable and competing land uses. Particular threats exist to those public goods whose values are not well-represented in markets or whose deterioration will only affect future generations. As market forces alone are not sufficient, effective means for local and regional planning are needed in order to safeguard scarce natural resources, coordinate land uses and create sustainable landscape structures. This book argues that a solution to such challenges in Europe can be found by merging the landscape planning tradition with ecosystem services concepts. Landscape planning has strengths in recognition of public benefits and implementation mechanisms, while the ecosystem services approach makes the connection between the status of natural assets and human well-being more explicit. It can also provide an economic perspective, focused on individual preferences and benefits, which helps validate the acceptability of environmental planning goals. Thus linking landscape planning and ecosystem services provides a two-way benefit, creating a usable science to meet the needs of local and regional decision making. The book is structured around the Drivers-Pressures-State- Impact-Responses framework, providing an introduction to relevant concepts, methodologies and techniques. It presents a new, ecosystem services-informed, approach to landscape planning that constitutes both a framework and toolbox for students and practitioners to address the environmental and landscape challenges of 21st century Europe.

    Contents:
    1. Landscape planning and ecosystem services: the sum is more than the parts
    2. Objectives and structure of the book
    3. Theories and methodology for ecosystem services assessment in landscape planning
    4. The basis of evaluation: legal, economic and social factors
    5. Data sources for assessments
    6. Using GIS in landscape planning
    7. Ecosystem services under pressure
    8. European Union policies and standards as drivers for ecosystem service provision and impairment
    9. Assessing pressures in landscape planning
    10. Production capacity and actual provision of food, materials and energy
    11. Cooper, Hiscock: Catchment water resources
    12. Renewable energy production capacities and goods
    13. Regional climate regulation capacities
    14. Greenhouse gas storage and sequestration function
    15. Landscape aesthetic capacities as a cultural ecosystem service
    16. The natural support system of ecosystems
    17. Identification and evaluation of habitat development potentials
    18. Habitat capacity
    19. Evaluation of multifunctionality and aggregated benefits
    20. Economic valuation of services
    21. Developing landscape planning objectives and measures
    22. Measures for protecting soil-related ecosystem services
    23. Mitigation measures for water pollution and flooding
    24. Measures for landscape aesthetics and recreational quality
    25. Measures for biodiversity
    26. Methods for increasing spatial and cost effectiveness of measures through multifunctionality
    27. Leitbilder and scenarios in landscape planning
    28. Techniques for participatory approaches
    29. Design in landscape planning solutions
    30. Perspectives from outside the EU: Influence of legal and planning frameworks on landscape planning
    31. Synthesis and prospects for landscape planning.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Suzanne J. Baron, Chistoph I. Lee.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2018
    Users must register and sign in
  • Digital
    Carolan Sherman, Mary Chmielewski.
    Contents:
    Medical terminology
    Microbiology
    Pharmacology and anesthesia
    Blood values
    Aseptic technique
    Sterilization and disinfection
    Operating room environment
    Transportation and positioning
    Counts
    Specimens
    Medical, ethical, and legal responsibilities
    Diagnostic procedures
    Consents
    Skin preparation and draping
    Instruments
    Sutures, stapling devices, and drains
    Wound healing and dressings
    General surgery
    Obstetrics and gynecology
    Ophthalmology
    Otorhinolaryngology
    Plastic and reconstructive surgery
    Genitourinary
    Thoracic
    Cardiac
    Vascular
    Neurosurgery
    Orthopedics
    Pediatrics
    Biomedical science (Electricity, hemostasis, lasers, and computers)
    Occupational hazards/fire safety
    Endoscopy, minimally invasive surgery, and robotics.
  • Digital
    T.W. Sadler, Ph. D., Consultant, Birth Defects Prevention, Twin Bridges, Madison County, Montana, Adjunct Professor of Pediatrics, University of Utah, Visiting Professor of Embroyology, East Tennessee State University, Quillen School of Medicine, Senior Scholar, Greenwood Genetics Center, Greenwood, South Carolina ; computer illustrations by Susan L. Sadler-Redmond ; scanning electron micrographs by Kathy Tosney ; ultrasound images by Jan Byrne and Hytham Imseis.
    Summary: Offering exceptional full color diagrams and clinical images, Langman's Medical Embryology, 13e helps medical, nursing, and health professions students develop a basic understanding of embryology and its clinical relevance. Concise chapter summaries, captivating clinical correlates boxes, clinical problems, and a clear, concise writing style make the subject matter accessible to students and relevant to instructors. The new edition is enhanced by over 100 new and updated illustrations, additional clinical images and photos of early embryologic development, and an expanded chapter on the cardiovascular system. Clinical Correlates boxes illustrated by cases and images cover birth defects, developmental abnormalities, and other clinical phenomena. More than 400 illustrations?including full-color line drawings, scanning electron micrographs, and clinical images?clarify key aspects of embryonic development. Basic genetic molecular biology principles are highlighted throughout the text to link embryology to other critical specialties. Chapter Overview figures provide a visually compelling introduction to each chapter. Problems to Solve (with detailed answers at the back of the book) help you assess your understanding. An expanded glossary defines key terms and concepts. Online learning resources for students include an interactive question bank and animations.

    Contents:
    Introduction to molecular regulation and signaling
    Gametogenesis: conversion of germ cells into male and female gametes
    First week of development: ovulation to implantation
    Second week of development: bilaminar germ disc
    Third week of development: trilaminar germ disc
    Third to eighth weeks: the embryonic period
    The gut tube and the body cavities
    Third month to birth: the fetus and placenta
    Birth defects and prenatal diagnosis
    The axial skeleton
    Muscular system
    Limbs
    Cardiovascular system
    Respiratory system
    Digestive system
    Urogenital system
    Head and neck
    Central nervous system
    Ear
    Eye
    Integumentary system.
  • Digital
    T.W. Sadler ; computer illustrations by Susan L. Sadler-Redmond ; scanning electron micrographs by Kathy Tosney ; ultrasound images by Jan Byrne and Hytham Imseis.
    Summary: "Every student will be affected by pregnancy, either their mother's, because what happens in the womb does not necessarily stay in the womb, or by someone else's. As health care professionals, you will often encounter women of childbearing age who may be pregnant, or you may have children of your own, or maybe it is a friend who is pregnant. In any case, pregnancy and childbirth are relevant to all of us, and unfortunately, these processes often culminate in negative outcomes. For example, 50% of all embryos are spontaneously aborted. Furthermore, prematurity and birth defects are the leading causes of infant mortality and major contributors to disabilities. Fortunately, new strategies can improve pregnancy outcomes, and health care professionals have a major role to play in implementing these initiatives. However, a basic knowledge of embryology is essential to the success of these strategies, and with this knowledge, every health care professional can play a role in providing healthier babies. To accomplish its goal of providing a basic understanding of embryology and its clinical relevance, Langman's Medical Embryology retains its unique approach of combining an economy of text with excellent diagrams and clinical images. It stresses the clinical importance of the subject by providing numerous clinical examples that result from abnormal embryological events. The following pedagogic features and updates in the 14th edition help facilitate student learning"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction : Embryology: Clinical relevance and historical perspective
    pt. I, General Embryology :
    Introduction to molecular regulation and signaling
    Gametogenesis: conversion of germ cells into male and female gametes
    First week of development: ovulation to implantation
    Second week of development: bilaminar germ disc
    Third week of development: trilaminar germ disc
    Third to eighth weeks: the embryonic period
    The gut tube and the body cavities
    Third month to birth: the fetus and placenta
    Birth defects and prenatal diagnosis
    pt. II, Systems-based embryology :
    The axial skeleton
    Muscular system
    Limbs
    Cardiovascular system
    Respiratory system
    Digestive system
    Urogenital system
    Head and neck
    Central nervous system
    Ear
    Eye
    Integumentary system
    pt. III, Appendix : Answers to problems.
  • Digital
    T. W. Sadler.
    Summary: "Every student will be affected by pregnancy, either: 1. Directly from their own gestation, since adverse exposures during their mother's pregnancy can have lasting healthcare effects postnatally; 2. having their own child; 3. having a patient who is pregnant"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2024
  • Digital
    Valentina Cardella.
    Contents:
    The enigma of schizophrenia
    Language in schizophrenia
    Schizophrenic language : the cognitive perspective
    Schizophrenic language : the philosophical perspective
    An alternative view : schizophrenia as a disease of language.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Jean-Bernard Dubuisson, Jean Dubuisson, Juan Puigventos.
    Summary: Gynaecological surgery has made tremendous strides in the last 30 years, due to advances in medical imaging, operative laparoscopy, and new types of prosthesis. Reconstructive plastic surgery of pelvic organ prolapse and of urinary incontinence have benefited from these developments. The laparoscopic sacropopexy and laparoscopic lateral suspension with meshes are two excellent examples. In order to successfully perform these operations, detailed knowledge of the anatomy of the pelvic floor as "seen from above", i.e., from the abdominal view, is an invaluable asset. Achieving perfect knowledge of the anatomical details is now possible, thanks to laparoscopy. With the aid of laparoscopy, following subperitoneal dissections, reconstructive surgery of the pelvic floor can be made substantially more precise, more exact, and also more anatomical. This atlas will allow gynaecologic surgeons to deepen and improve their anatomical expertise, with the aid of laparoscopy. It also describes in detail the most common laparoscopic operative techniques. The book represents a new and unique approach to anatomy studied in the living, and supplements the main content with a wealth of straightforward and clearly explained photographs.

    Contents:
    Traditional anatomy of the pelvic floor
    Laparoscopic normal anatomy of the pelvic floor seen by transperitoneal vision
    Laparoscopic normal retroperitoneal anatomy of the pelvic floor seen after peritoneal incision
    Laparoscopic anatomy of the pelvic floor in case of genital prolapse seen by transperitoneal vision
    Laparoscopic anatomy of the pelvic floor in case of genital prolapse seen after peritoneal incision
    Laparoscopic sacropexy and lateral suspension with meshes to treat genital prolapse
    Anatomical references.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Karl A. LeBlanc, editor.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive advice and recommendations to surgeons practicing the laparoscopic repair of incisional hernias. It opens with a brief history and evolution of the technology surrounding the repair of incisional and ventral hernias laparoscopically and includes the introduction of robotic technology, which is constantly undergoing further refinement as new devices are introduced. The text discusses areas of controversy, as well as the limits and benefits of using this technology in the laparoscopic approach. Written by the current thought leaders of minimally invasive techniques, this helpful resource provides current opinions and methods in incisional and ventral hernia repair. Laparoscopic And Robotic Incisional Hernia Repair: Current Considerations provides a valuable resource for both seasoned laparoscopic surgeons interested in the technical aspects of incisional and ventral hernia repair.

    Contents:
    Overview of past, present, and future of incisional hernia repair
    Peroperative considerations prior to minimally invasive ventral incisional hernia repair
    Overview of laproscopic/robotic technical aspects
    Implants used for hernioplasty
    Laparoscopic closure of fascial defect
    Intraoperative considerations for laprascopy
    Endoscopic and laparoscopic techniques of minimally invasive components separation for abdominal wall reconstruction
    Robotic component separation
    Lumbar hernia repair
    Parastomal hernia repair
    Postoperative management (routing and complex situations)
    Management of adverse events during laparoscopic and robotic hernia repair.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Xu Zhang, editor.
    Summary: This book is a practical guide to the laparoscopic and robotic surgery technique in urology. It includes 34 chapters in three sections, which are adrenal gland, kidney and ureter surgery, bladder and prostate surgery and lympadenectomy. This book covers all parts of laparoscopic and robotic urological surgery, including methods in patient selection, peri-operative management, step-by-step descriptions of specific techniques and complication avoidance. It is accompanied with over 800 illustrations and real-time capture figures. It also includes over 40 surgery videos with online access. Through the combination of texts, pictures and videos, it presents the surgical designing, surgical procedures and surgical techniques in panorama. This book is a good reference book for urologists who interested in these techniques.

    Contents:
    Patient Position and Trocar Placement for Upper Urinary Tract Surgery
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Adrenalectomy
    Robotic Adrenalectomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Simple Nephrectomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Nephrectomy
    Robotic Radical Nephrectomy with Caval Thrombectomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Nephroureterectomy
    Robotic Nephroureterectomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy
    Robotic Donor Nephrectomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial Nephrectomy
    Robotic Partial Nephrectomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Pyeloplasty for Ureteropelvic Junction Obstruction
    Robotic Pyeloplasty for Ureteropelvic Junction Obstruction
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Ureterolithotomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Ureteroureterostomy for Retrocaval Ureter
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Upper-Pole Nephroureterectomy for Duplex Kidney Anomaly
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Renal Pedicle lymphatic Disconnection for Chyluria
    Patient Position and Trocar Placement for Lower Urinary Tract Surgery
    Laparoscopic Radical Cystectomy in Male Patients and Urinary Diversion
    Robotic Radical Cystoproatatectomy and Intracorporeal Neobladder
    Laparoscopic Radical Cystectomy in Female Patients
    Robotic Radical Cystectomy in Female Patients
    Laparoscopic Partial Cystectomy
    Laparoscopic Ureteral Reimplantation
    Robotic Ureteral Reimplantation
    Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Prostatectomy
    Robotic Radical Prostatectomy
    Robotic Excision of Seminal Vesicle Tumor
    Laparoscopic Retroperitoneal Lymph Node Dissection
    Robotic Retroperitoneal Lymph Node Dissection
    Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection for Bladder Cancer
    Robotic Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection for Bladder Cancer
    Laparoscopic Inguinal Lymphadenectomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ferdinando Agresta, Fabio Cesare Campanile, Nereo Vettoretto, editors.
    Summary: "his book, written by expert surgeons, offers a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of all aspects of laparoscopic cholecystectomy. Coverage includes the indications for surgery, anesthesia, establishment of pneumoperitoneum, surgical technique, and the prevention and management of complications. Performance of laparoscopic cholecystectomy in the specific contexts of biliary tree stones and acute cholecystitis is described. Extensive reference is made to the latest clinical evidence, and the real benefits of the laparoscopic approach, for example in terms of outcomes and day surgery, are carefully assessed. New technologies, including SILS, NOTES, robotic surgery, and miniaturized instruments, are reviewed. The learning curve and training are also extensively discussed, and an individual chapter is devoted to the views of international experts in the field. Some 20 years after the National Institutes of Health Consensus Conference first published recommendations regarding indications for laparoscopic cholecystectomy, it remains the gold standard approach and continues to evolve."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    1. An International Survey: State Of The Art
    2. Surgical Strategy
    3. Indication To Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy (Elderly, Obese, Asymptomatic Patients)
    4. Biliary Tree Stones
    5. Acute Cholecystitis
    6. Technical Steps (Devices; Intraop Cholecystectomy; Analgesia Etc )
    7. Complications : How to Prevent and Manage Them
    8. New Technologies (SILS
    NOTES
    Robotic
    Mini-Instruments)
    9. Real Benefits Of The Laparoscopic Approach (Outcomes)
    10. Day Surgery
    11. Learning Curve - Training - Definition Of Expert In Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy
    12. The Point Of View Of International Experts
    13. Establishing Pneumoperitoneum
    14. Anesthesia And Laparoscopy
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sharon L. Stein, Regan R. Lawson, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed specifically to help equip new surgeons with the anatomical and technical knowledge to supplement hands on experience in minimally invasive colon and rectal surgery. There are multiple colorectal surgeries which distinctly lend themselves to the use of the laparoscopic approach. To assist the junior surgeon who is embarking on a career in surgery, expert surgeons and educators in the field of colon and rectal surgery from around the country authored the chapters included in this book. Chapters describe key elements of each surgery, including the order of surgery, when and how the surgeon created tension, rotated the patient, and optimized flow of the surgery. Chapters also contain tips and pitfalls that are not always explicitly presented when describing a surgical approach in order to provide readers with a diverse toolkit. Each chapter is also full of new illustrations that show the direction of traction, the line of dissection, and the anatomy of the colon. The illustrations also present tools in a color-coded format to clearly distinguish between the surgeons and the assistants tools. Laparoscopic Colectomy: A Step by Step Guide is a valuable resource to residents and junior attendings who wish to master laparoscopic colon and rectal surgery.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    About the Editors
    Content Editor and Contributing Author
    Educational Editor
    1: Tools
    Introduction
    Preoperative Preparation
    Bowel Prep
    Patient Setup
    Lines and Tubes
    Accessing the Abdomen
    Open Hassan Technique
    Veress Entry
    Visual Entry System
    Trocars
    Changing Ports in the Obese/Large Patient/Tall Patient/Redundant Pannus
    Techniques for Surgery
    Types of Bowel Graspers
    Running of the Bowel
    Energy Instrumentation
    Intraoperative Endoscopy
    Endoscopy
    Wound Protectors Incisions/Wound Protectors
    Wound Closure
    2: Laparoscopic Right Colectomy
    Introduction
    Patient Positioning for Laparoscopic Laparoscopic Right Colectomy
    Operative Strategy
    Step 1: Port Placement
    Step 2: Laparoscopic Staging (if Indicated) and Restoration of Normal Anatomy
    Step 3: Identification of Pathology
    Step 4: Identification and Transection of the Ileocolic Pedicle
    Step 5: Dissection of the Retroperitoneal Plane
    Step 6: Identification and Transection of the Middle Colic Arteries (MCA)
    Step 7: Transverse Colon Mesenteric Transection Step 8: Entry into the Lesser Sac
    Step 9: Hepatic Flexure Mobilization
    Step 10: Lateral Mobilization
    Step 11: Attachments to the Terminal Ileum
    Step 12: Externalization of Specimen
    Step 13: Anastomosis
    Step 14: Closure
    Special Considerations
    Varying the Approach
    Top-Down Approach
    Bottom-Up Approach
    A Lateral to Medial Approach
    Crohn's Disease
    Intracorporeal Anastomosis
    Steps of Intracorporeal Anastomosis
    Preparation of the Colon and Small Bowel (Fig. 2.12)
    Transection of the Colon and Small Bowel
    Placement of Stabilizing Suture (Stay Suture) Creation of Enterotomy
    Stapling of the Anastomosis
    Suturing the Common Enterotomy
    3: Laparoscopic Transverse Colectomy
    Introduction
    Patient Positioning for Laparoscopic Laparoscopic Transverse Colectomy
    Operative Strategy
    Step 1: Port Placement (Fig. 3.1)
    Step 2: Intraoperative Staging
    Step 3: Identification of Pathology and Determination of Operative Plan
    Step 4: Extent of Resection
    Step 5. Continuation of the Right Colectomy: Middle Colic Vessels
    Step 6: Medial Middle Colic Vessel Ligation
    Step 7: Top-Down Approach: Entering the Lesser Sac Step 8: Omental Resection
    Step 9: Hepatic Flexure Mobilization
    Step 10: Splenic Flexure Mobilization
    Step 11: Transection of the Inferior Mesenteric Vein (IMV) and Ascending Branch of the Left Colic Artery for Splenic Flexure Tumor
    Step 12: Identification and Transection of the Middle Colic Pedicle, Top-Down Approach
    Step 13: Specimen Exteriorization and Anastomosis
    4: Splenic Flexure
    Introduction
    Indications
    Operative Approaches
    Operative Steps
    Patient Positioning for Laparoscopic Splenic Flexure
    Operative Strategy
    Anterior (Lesser Sac) Approach (Fig. 4.2) Patient and Surgeon Positioning
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gregory Kouraklis, Eugenia (Jenny) Matsiota, editors.
    Contents:
    1 Milestones in Laparoscopic Colon Surgery
    2 Types of Colon Surgery and Anatomy
    3 Pre-operative Evaluation and Selection of Patients
    4 Instruments
    5 Surgical Techniques
    6 Complications in Laparoscopic Colorectal Surgery
    7 Robotic Colon Surgery and Quality of Life.
    8 Laparoscopic Colon Surgery: Education and Best Practices
    9 Anaesthesia in Laparoscopic Colorectal Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Makio Mike.
    Summary: This unique guide describes colorectal surgery procedures using medical terminology and anatomical terms originating from embryology. In the last decade, laparoscopic procedures in gastrointestinal surgery have been enhanced and their safety has significantly improved. With the number of cases of colorectal cancer surgery increasing and laparoscopic surgery no longer considered a specialized surgery, the recognition of the correct anatomy is vital in these procedures. Unfortunately, however, the understanding of clinical anatomy is frequently separate from that of basic surgical concepts. Initially, the dissecting layer should be presumed to derive from the fascial anatomy based on embryological recognition. Furthermore, the techniques currently being used by surgeons should be described in sufficient detail and the appropriate anatomical terms should always be used. In view of this, this valuable monograph benefits gastrointestinal surgeons and general surgeons who are involved in the treatment of colorectal cancer.

    Contents:
    Basic Principles
    Basic Approach
    Laparoscopic Sigmoidectomy
    Laparoscopic Low Anterior Resection of the Rectum
    Laparoscopic Abdominoperineal Resecrion of the Rectum
    Laparoscopic Right Colectomy
    Laparoscopic Left Colectomy
    Laparoscopic Subtotal Proctocolectomy
    Unresolved fascia compositions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Alberto Martinez-Isla, Lalin Navaratne, editors ; foreword by Lord Darzi of Denham, Peter B. Cotton.
    Summary: This book provides a concise overview of several critically important techniques and their applications within Laparoscopic Common Bile Duct Exploration (LCBDE). LCBDE is rapidly emerging as the preferential management option for treating patients with common bile duct (CBD) stones. Chapters within this book describe how this technique can be applied to manage patients with concomitant gallstones, which aims to increase the exploration of the CBD via the transcystic route. Particular mention is made for the use of energy devices to enable stone fragmentation within the bile duct also known as Lithotripsy-Assisted Bile duct Exploration by Laparoendoscopy (LABEL). Guidance is also provided on how to set-up an acute biliary service which can offer the single-stage management of concomitant gallstones and choledocholithiasis. The concepts of Leveraging Access to Technology and Enhanced Surgical Techniques (LATEST)--in LCBDE and Biliary Surgery 2.0--as the framework through which these techniques can be further enhanced are analysed. Laparoscopic Common Bile Duct Exploration features insight into how to perform these increasingly important procedures successfully and set-up a service within institutions that are yet to provide it. Therefore, it is a valuable resource for all medical professionals involved in the care of these patients.

    Contents:
    History of biliary surgery.-The first cholecystectomy
    The first choledochotomy
    History of common bile duct imaging
    Technique of CBD exploration in the 60s-70s
    The arrival of ERCP
    Approach to the cbd stones in the 80s
    The revolution in the nineties: The laparoscopic cholecystectomy and bile duct exploration
    Review of the evidence against and in favour of LC-IOC±LCBDE
    Our technique & equipment needed
    Equipment and kit needed for LCBDE
    Surgical technique for LCBDE
    Laparoscopic ultrasound
    Different surgical scenarios and its specific management
    Different surgical scenarios
    CBD and CD both non-dilated
    CD Dilated & CBD non-dilated
    CD non-dilated & CBD Dilated
    CD & CBD both dilated
    The impossible hilum: The transinfundibular approach
    The closure after the access to the CBD
    Closure over T -tube
    Closure over antegrade stent
    Primary closure
    Closure with transcystic drain
    Bilioenteric anastomoses
    The LABEL technique
    Our experience with LCBDE in more than 450 cases
    The evolution to Biliary Surgery 2.0
    Our cases.-Failure to clear the duct
    Morbidity
    Closure after exploring CBD
    T tube vs antegrade stent.-Primary closure
    Increase in the use of transcystic approach
    The transcystic vs the TD access.-management of Type II Mirizzi syndrome
    The impact pf LCBDE in a general surgical department.-Bile duct exploration 2.0 .-Training in LCBDE.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Xiujun Cai.
    Contents:
    Anatomy of the Liver in the Laparoscopic Situation
    Instruments for Laparoscopic Hepatectomy by Curettage and Aspiration
    Laparoscopic Left Lateral Segmentectomy
    Laparoscopic Left Hemihepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Right Hemihepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Resection of Caudate Lobe
    Laparoscopic Non-Anatomical Liver Resection
    Two-Stage Completely Laparoscopic Hemihepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Radical Resection of Gallbladder Cancer
    Other Techniques for Laparoscopic Hepatectomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Rong Liu.
    Contents:
    Laparoscopic Anatomical Hepatectomy
    Positioning and Accesses
    Preoperative Preparation and Anesthesia
    Laparoscopic Fenestration of Liver Cyst
    Laparoscopic Partial Hepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Single-site Hepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Left Lateral Sectionectomy
    Laparoscopic Left Hepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Right Posterior Sectoretomy
    Retroperitoneal Laparoscopic Hepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Right Hepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Caudate Lobectomy
    Radiofrequency Ablation Assisted Laparoscopic Hepatectomy
    Robotic Assisted Laparoscopic Hepatectomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Shailesh Puntambekar, Sambit M. Nanda, Kajal Parikh.
    Summary: This book offers a concise and easy-to-understand overview of facts and concepts in pelvic anatomy. Laparoscopy provides good vision in a limited field, which means that surgeons have to rely on their anatomical knowledge of what structures lie in the vicinity and which structures need to be preserved. Focusing on surgical anatomy, the book helps laparoscopic surgeons better understand the female pelvic structures so improve their surgical skills. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Introduction; Contents; About the Authors;
    1: Pelvic Organs;
    2: Pelvis Boundaries; 2.1 Sacral Promontory (Fig. 2.8); 2.2 Concepts of the Blood Supply; 2.3 Lateral Boundary; 2.4 Caudal Boundary; 2.5 Anterior Boundary;
    3: Ligaments and Supports of the Uterus; 3.1 Uterosacral Ligaments (Fig. 3.8); 3.1.1 Concepts; 3.1.2 Rules; 3.2 Mackenrodt's Ligaments (Fig. 3.22a-c); 3.2.1 Rules; 3.3 Paravaginal/Paracolpos (Fig. 3.30); 3.3.1 Rules; 3.4 Round Ligaments (Fig. 3.39); 3.4.1 Rules; 3.5 Broad Ligament (Fig. 3.44);
    4: Bones and Muscles; 4.1 Coccyges (Fig. 4.3) 4.2 Psoas Muscle4.3 Bones; 4.4 Inferiorly Pubic Symphysis (Figs. 4.9 and 4.10);
    5: Vascular Anatomy; 5.1 Aorta/Vena Cava; 5.2 External Iliac Artery and Vein; 5.2.1 Important Aspects of Inferior Epigastric Artery and Vein; 5.2.2 Internal Iliac Artery; 5.2.3 Rules; 5.3 Uterine Artery; 5.3.1 Rules; 5.4 Superior Vesical Artery; 5.5 Obliterated Hypogastric Artery; 5.5.1 Rules; 5.5.2 Obturator Artery; 5.5.3 Ovarian Artery; 5.5.4 Ovarian Vein; 5.6 Veins; 5.6.1 Common Iliac Vein; 5.6.2 Internal Iliac Vein; 5.6.2.1 Rules; 5.6.3 External Iliac Vein; 5.6.3.1 Rules;
    6: The Spaces 6.1 Pouch of Douglas or the Rectovaginal Space6.2 Pararectal Space; 6.3 Paravesical Space; 6.4 Prevesical Space;
    7: Fascial Anatomy; 7.1 Cervicovesical Fascia; 7.2 Denonvilliers' Fascia; 7.3 Endopelvic Fascia; 7.4 Waldeyer's Fascia;
    8: Anatomy of the Ureter; 8.1 Blood Supply;
    9: Nerves; 9.1 The Genitofemoral Nerve (Fig. 9.1); 9.2 The Obturator Nerve; 9.3 The Hypogastric Nerve; 9.4 Pelvic Splanchnic Nerve; 9.5 Sciatic Nerve;
    10: Lymphatics; 10.1 Ilio-Obturator Nodes; 10.2 Internal Iliac Nodes; 10.3 Lumbosacral Chain; 10.4 Para-aortic and Paracaval Nodes
    11: Applications of Anatomy11.1 Dissection of the Pararectal Space and Paravesical Space; 11.2 Medial Pararectal Space; 11.3 Exposure of the Retroperitoneum; 11.3.1 The Lateral Approach; 11.4 Radical Hysterectomy (Pune Technique); 11.5 Nerve Sparing; 11.6 Hysterectomy Type I or Intrafascial (Figs. 11.72, 11.73, 11.74, 11.75, 11.76, 11.77, 11.78, 11.79, 11.80, 11.81, 11.82, 11.83, 11.84, 11.85, and 11.86); Suggested Reading
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Peter von Theobald.
    Summary: This book offers a practical surgical guide, helping surgeons learn the technique needed to perform Laparoscopic SacroColpoPexy (LSCP). To do so, it explains the surgical process in straightforward language, supplemented by images and diagrams, while also discussing why this procedure is so effective. The book has two primary goals: to provide those surgeons who have never performed LSCP before with essential insights and technical expertise, based on the author's 20 years of practical surgical experience; and to allay the common fear of possible complications. Following a 2012 FDA warning, surgeons whose work involved vaginal prolapse repair have been looking for an alternative technique. Though LSCP offers a safe alternative to current methods, the available literature on it is sparse. This book provides a comprehensive guide to the techniques and methods needed by surgeons operating on pelvic organ prolapse in a range of different specialties, including urogynecology, urology, and gynecology.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Salman Al-Sabah, Ali Aminian, Luigi Angrisani, Eliana Al Haddad, Lilian Kow, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a complete guide to laparoscopic sleeve gastrectomy and the management of obesity. The chapters discuss guidelines for healthcare providers for the management of patients with obesity, the rationale behind choosing patients, performing the procedure in line with the patient's condition, the perioperative period, postoperative requirements, and postoperative complications. This book aims to give readers an understanding of the surgical techniques involved in laparoscopic sleeve gastrectomy and the wider treatment options available. It is relevant to bariatric, metabolic, and general surgeons, physicians, clinical nutritionists as well as students.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Weight Loss Options
    3. Candidates for Sleeve Gastrectomy
    4. Insurance, Self-Pay and Medical Tourism
    5. Laparoscopic Sleeve Gastrectomy
    6. Potential Benefits of the LSG
    7. LSG: Risks and Considerations
    8. Nutritional Considerations
    9. The Sleeve Diet and Exercise Programs
    10. Long Term Outcomes Post-Sleeve.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Giusto Pignata, Umberto Bracale, Fabrizio Lazzara, editors.
    Contents:
    Esophagus and Stomach
    Liver, Gallbladder, and Biliary Tree
    Abdominal Wall
    Colon, Rectum, and Appendix
    Kidney, Adrenal Gland, Ureter, and Varicocele
    Spleen and Pancreas
    Bariatic Surgery
    Gynecology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Yoshiharu Sakai, editor.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Principles of Anatomy
    Chapter 2 Evidence of Laparoscopic Surgery for Colorectal Cancer
    Chapter 3 Right-sided Colectomy (ileo-cecal resection, right-hemicolectomy, extended right-hemicolectomy)
    Chapter 4 Transverse Colectomy
    Chapter 5 Left Sided Colectomy (mobilization of splenic, sigmoidectomy)
    Chapter 6 Laparoscopic Total Mesorectal Excision (TME) for Rectal Cancer
    Chapter 7 Procedures of Right Lateral Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection (LPLND) with Pelvic Autonomic Nerve Preservation
    Chapter 8 Restorative Proctocolectomy
    Chapter 9 Transanal Minimally Invasive Surgery for Rectal Cancer
    Chapter 10 Robotic Total Mesorectal Excision.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Bing Peng, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the latest advances in laparoscopic spleen surgery. The first chapter reviews current status of laparoscopic spleen surgery, including indications, contraindications, and various types of surgical techniques. In the following three chapters, anatomy of spleen, pathology of spleen diseases, and perioperative management are described. After that, surgical techniques of laparoscopic splenectomy, single-incision laparoscopic splenectomy, hand-assisted laparoscopic splenectomy, and laparoscopic partial splenectomy are introduced with high-resolution illustrations combined with typical clinical cases. Focusing on minimally invasive surgery in spleen, this book will be a valuable reference for general surgeons, as well as practitioners in related disciplines.

    Contents:
    Overview and Prospects of Laparoscopic Splenectomy
    Anatomy and Physiology of the Spleen
    Pathology and Pathophysiology of Surgical Spleen Diseases
    Perioperative Management of Laparoscopic Splenic Surgery and Application of Enhanced Recovery after Surgery (ERAS)
    Laparoscopic Splenectomy (LS)
    Single Incision Laparoscopic Splenectomy (SILS)
    Hand-Assisted Laparoscopic Splenectomy
    Laparoscopic Partial Splenectomy
    Laparoscopic Splenectomy Combined Selective Pericardial Devascularization
    Laparoscopic Radical Antegrade Modular Pancreatosplenotomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Michael Laposata, MD, PhD, [edition] editors, Michael Weitz and Peter J. Boyle.
    Summary: "The acclaimed full-color guide to selecting the correct laboratory test and interpreting the results covering ALL of clinical pathology Laboratory Medicine is the most comprehensive, user-friendly, and well-illustrated guide available for learning how to order the correct laboratory test and understand the clinical significance of the results. The book features an easy-to-follow, consistent presentation for each disease discussed. Chapters begin with a brief description of the disorder followed by a discussion that includes tables detailing the laboratory evaluation of specific disorders, diagnosis, baseline tests to exclude diagnostic possibilities, and clinical indications that warrant further screening and special testing. With new, increasingly expensive and complicated tests appearing almost daily, Laboratory Medicine, Third Edition is required reading for medical students, clinical laboratory scientists, and healthcare professionals who want to keep abreast of the latest testing procedures and maximize accuracy and patient safety. Features: 48 clinical laboratory methods presented in easy-to-understand illustrations that include information on the expense and complexity of the assays More than 200 tables and full-color algorithms that encapsulate important information and facilitate understanding Full-color blood-smear micrographs that demonstrate common abnormal morphologies of red blood cells Valuable learning aids in each chapter, including learning objectives, chapter outlines, and a general introduction -- and new to this edition: chapter-ending self-assessment Q&A. Logical systems-based organization that complements most textbooks Extensive table of Clinical Laboratory Reference Values that show the conversions between U.S. and SI units for -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Concepts in laboratory medicine
    Methods
    Autoimmune disorders involving the connective tissue and immunodeficiency diseases
    Histocompatibility testing and transplantation
    Infectious diseases
    Toxicology
    Diseases of infancy and childhood
    Blood vessels
    The heart
    Diseases of red blood cells
    Bleeding and thrombotic disorders
    Transfusion medicine
    Diseases of white blood cells, lymph nodes, and spleen
    The respiratory system
    The gastrointestinal tract
    The liver and biliary tract
    Pancreatic disorders
    The kidney
    Male genital tract
    Female genital system
    Breast
    The endocrine system.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2019
  • Digital
    Carlo Salvarani, Luigi Boiardi, Francesco Muratore, editors.
    Summary: In this book, detailed information on the nosology, pathology, pathogenesis, clinical presentation, diagnosis and treatment of large- and medium-sized vessel and single-organ vasculitis is provided and critically discussed by the most expert physicians and researchers in the field. Among the conditions considered are giant cell arteritis, Takayasu arteritis, polyarteritis nodosa, primary central nervous system vasculitis, isolated aortitis, isolated gastrointestinal vasculitis, cutaneous vasculitis and isolated genitourinary vasculitis. The role of histopathology in the diagnosis and prognosis of these vasculitis is evaluated, along with the part played by imaging studies in diagnosing and monitoring these diseases, while indications and limitations of the available imaging modalities are discussed as well. The expanding role of biological agents for the treatment of the large vessel vasculitis is addressed, as well as the current approaches to these diseases. This book will be a valuable companion in decision-making for medical practitioners, internists, specialists, researchers and postgraduate students interested in the intriguing fields of vasculitis and rare diseases.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Giant cell arteritis
    Chapter 1. Classification criteria
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and genetics
    Chapter 3. Pathogenesis
    Chapter 4. Clinical manifestations, differential diagnosis and laboratory markers
    Chapter 5. Histopathology and imaging
    Chapter 6. Prognosis and disease activity
    Chapter 7. Treatment
    Part 2. Takayasu arteritis
    Chapter 8. Classification criteria, Epidemiology and genetics; and Pathogenesis
    Chapter 9. Clinical manifestations, differential diagnosis and laboratory markers
    Chapter 10. Imaging
    Chapter 11. Prognosis and disease activity
    Chapter 12. Treatment
    Part 3. Polyarteritis nodosa
    Chapter 13. Cutaneous polyarteritis nodosa
    Chapter 14. Systemic polyarteritis nodosa
    Part 4. Single organ vasculitis
    Chapter 15. Primary central nervous system vasculitis
    Chapter 16. Isolated aortitis
    Chapter 17. Isolated gastrointestinal vasculitis
    Chapter 18. Cutaneous vasculitis
    Chapter 19. Isolated genitourinary vasculitis
    Part 5. Arterial and venous involvement in Behcet's disease
    Chapter 20. Arterial and venous involvement in Behcet's disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gary C. Schoenwolf, Steven B. Bleyl, Philip R. Brauer, Philippa H. Francis-West.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Rogerio A. Dedivitis, Giorgio Peretti, Ehab Hanna, Claudio R. Cernea.
    Summary: "Ongoing advances in innovative technologies have improved the diagnosis and treatment of laryngeal cancer, resulting in more optimal oncologic and functional patient outcomes. Laryngeal Cancer: Clinical Case-Based Approaches, by distinguished head and neck surgeon Rogério A. Dedivitis and internationally recognized coeditors, is a comprehensive reference that presents multiple options for similar lesions. Contributions from a diverse group of globally renowned subspecialists reflect the multidisciplinary treatment of laryngeal cancer. The book focuses on diverse primary subsites of laryngeal cancer; local, early-stage, and advanced disease stages; and current available treatment modalities for each type. Case study chapters include insightful discussion of several potential approaches, rationale for surgical decision making, radiographic findings, pearls, and pitfalls"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
  • Digital
    volume editor, Abir K. Bhattacharyya ; associate editor, Nupur Kapoor Nerurkar.
    Summary: 'Laryngology' is a compact yet comprehensive resource on the management of disorders of voice, airway and swallowing. It discusses the latest techniques in laryngeal documentation, key principles in management of laryngeal disorders, outcome measures and quality-of-life assessment, and evolving technologies in laryngology.
  • Digital
    Craig H. Zalvan, editor.
    Summary: This text comprehensively reviews the current state of the art in Laryngopharyngeal Reflux (LPR) together with a comprehensive explanation and description of the known gastroesophageal reflux (GERD) literature. With chapters written by experts from around the world, this text aims to deliver what is current in reflux recognition, diagnosis, reflux related complications, and the various treatment modalities. This is the first textbook to combine the most up to date knowledge of both LPR and GERD meant for both specialties and the general medicine population. Completely unique to the reflux literature is a section detailing the substantial benefits of a mostly plant based, Mediterranean style diet in the treatment of reflux disease. Encouraging patients to read and learn about diet and health is likely the most important step in improving their disease. The text provides direction to the caregiver on how to transition to a mostly plant-based diet. Review of myths, effects of diet in the setting of other disease states, and dietary consequences are explained. Guidelines on how to transition diet, dining out while maintaining a plant-based diet, and how to wean off medication, such as PPI, are also provided. Laryngopharyngeal and Gastroesophageal Reflux: A Comprehensive Guide to Diagnosis Treatment, and Diet-Based Approaches will provide the medical community with a resource to understand, teach, and provide the latest in LPR and GERD information to the caregiver and subsequently the patient. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anatomy and Physiology
    LPR: Presentation, Physical Findings, Diagnostic Testing
    GERD: Presentation, Physical Findings, Diagnostic Testings
    Historical Treatments
    Western Treatments
    Plant Based Diet Approach to LPR and GERD
    Plant Based Diet Benefits
    Dining Out Guide
    Cooking Guideline
    Recipes
    Chegan Challenge with Guidelines
    Special Dietary Needs: Diabetes, Short Gut, Post-Surgical, Renal, Coumadin). .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nausheen Jamal, Marilene B. Wang, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text provides the reader with an in-depth understanding of laryngopharyngeal reflux (LPR), and presents a practical and readable evidence-based approach to the diagnosis and management of patients with this condition. It highlights options for management of those patients who fail to improve with traditional reflux treatment and assists in determining the next steps in the management of this population. Information is presented from an inter-disciplinary perspective, including input by otolaryngology, gastroenterology, speech pathology, and complementary/integrative medicine. The first section of the book is dedicated to understanding the fundamentals of laryngopharyngeal reflux as a condition. It begins with a review of the fundamental anatomy and pathophysiology of LPR and summarizes the landmark and most recent advances in the scientific understanding of this condition. Subsequent chapters delve into the typical symptoms and clinical presentations of patients, with information provided on cost-effective work-up strategies to confirm the diagnosis. The second section focuses on management of this condition. It begins with a thorough review of traditional medical management, including use of proton pump inhibitors, histamine receptor antagonists, neutralizing agents, low acid diet, alkalinizing agents, and alginates. Surgical management is reviewed as well, including partial and full fundoplication operations. It concludes with "non-traditional" treatment options for LPR, with chapters dedicated to voice therapy, probiotics, herbal therapies, and integrative East-West medicine approaches. Laryngopharyngeal Reflux Disease will be a definitive guide for otolaryngologists, gastroenterologists, speech pathologists, and general physicians with an interest in traditional and complementary/integrative treatments for patients with laryngopharyngeal reflux.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Wiley
    v. 4-, 1977- Many early supplements missing
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    v. 20-56, 67-112, 1980-91, 1995-2006.
    Vol. 20-31 SHELVED WITH: Laryngoscope, v. 90-92.
    7
  • Digital
    editors: Veronica L. Chiang, Shabbar F. Danish, Robert E. Gross.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kayvan Shokrollahi, editor.
    Summary: This book addresses the management of scars using lasers and light. The authors provide a comprehensive overview of the current laser modalities and the science and evidence behind them. They also present various treatments, including those using carbon dioxide lasers, Erbium:YAG lasers, pulsed dye lasers and Q-switched lasers. The book includes detailed information on the treatment of burn, acne, keloid and hypertrophic scars, as well as discussions of the complications of laser treatments and ethical and medico-legal issues. Scars have many causes, including trauma and burns, but also medical treatments themselves - scars are an inevitable consequence of most surgery. There have been significant advances in laser and light technology over the last decade, and the management of scars with a variety of lasers has been adopted both in traditional healthcare settings and in the cosmetic sector. Edited by a respected burns and plastic surgeon, this book is a valuable resource for a variety of clinicians including dermatologists, laser practitioners, physiotherapists and occupational therapists, burn care professionals, as well as multidisciplinary teams working with patients with scars of all aetiologies.

    Contents:
    Assessment and classification of scars
    Therapeutic targeting for scars
    Overview of laser modalities in scar management
    The science and evidence behind laser scar management
    Ablative laser technologies in scar management
    Non-ablative laser technologies in scar management
    Erbium:YAG laser treatment for scarring
    Carbon dioxide laser treatment for scarring
    Pulsed dye laser treatment for prevention and treatment of scarring
    Role of Q-switched lasers in treatment of scars
    Laser management of burns scars
    Laser management of acne scars
    Strategies for keloid and hypertrophic scars with lasers
    Role of laser depilation in scar management
    Laser-mediated drug delivery in scar management
    A holistic approach to scar management
    Complications of laser treatment of scars
    Ethical and Medico-legal issues related to laser scar management
    Informed Consent in relation to laser scar management
    Skills, training and accreditation for laser management of scars.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Alberto Piqué and Pere Serra.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to laser-induced transfer and other associated processes
    2. Origins of laser-induced transfer processes
    3. LIFT using a dynamic release layer
    4. Laser-induced forward transfer of fluids
    5. Advances in blister-actuated laser-induced forward transfer (BA-LIFT)
    6. Film-free LIFT (FF-LIFT)
    7. Laser-induced forward transfer of metals
    8. LIFT of solid films (ceramics and polymers)
    9. Laser-induced transfer of soft materials
    10. Congruent LIFT with high-viscosity nanopastes
    11. Laser printing of nanoparticles
    12. Laser printing of electronic materials
    13. Laser printing of chemical and biological sensors
    14. Laser printing of proteins and biomaterials
    15. Laser-assisted bioprinting of cells for tissue engineering
    16. Industrial, large-area, and high-throughput LIFT/LIBT digital printing
    17. LIFT of 3D metal structures
    18. Laser transfer of entire structures and functional devices.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Lidia Bakota, Department of Neurobiology, University of Osnabrück, Osnabrück, Germany, Roland Brandt, Department of Neurobiology, University of Osnabrück, Osnabrück, Germany.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Junseok Bae, Sang-Ho Lee, editors.
    Summary: This book describes and illustrates state-of-the-art techniques in laser spine surgery. Laser technology has revolutionized surgeries in many specialties to perform minimally invasive and cutting-edge procedures. Recent advances in spinal surgery have led to the increasingly widespread use of minimally invasive techniques based on endoscopy and microscopy. Nevertheless, the application of laser in the context of spinal surgery remains less well known, and the aim of this book is to present practical usage of laser in spine surgery to our readers. A wide variety of minimally invasive approaches to spine surgery using CO2, Ho: YAG, and Nd: YAG lasers are presented in detail, with a discussion of equipment and specific recommendations on laser settings. Care has been taken to ensure that the content is faithful to the fundamental principles of spine surgery and evidence-based medicine. The book will be an essential resource for all who use or are intending to use lasers in spine surgery.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1: Evolution of Spine Surgery as a Request of Endoscopic and Microscopic Laser to Technology
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Summary
    References
    2: Physics and General Principle of Spinal Laser
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Basic Laser Physics
    2.3 The Utility of Laser Application in Spinal Surgery
    2.4 The Principle of the Laser in the Treatment of PLDD
    2.5 CO2 Laser
    2.6 Holmium:YAG (Ho:YAG) Laser
    2.7 Neodymium-Doped YAG (Nd:YAG) Laser
    2.8 Summary
    References
    3: Setting Up Lasers in Spine Surgery 3.1 General Operating Room Layout
    3.2 Laser Spine Surgery Equipment
    3.3 Positioning
    3.4 Laser Machine
    4: Anesthetic Consideration of the Laser Spine Surgery
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Anesthetic Considerations for General Anesthesia
    4.2.1 Monitoring
    4.2.2 Induction
    4.2.3 Positioning
    4.2.4 Airway Management
    4.2.5 Maintenance
    4.2.6 Transfusion Management
    4.2.7 Extubation
    4.2.8 Postoperative Care
    4.2.9 Postoperative Complications
    4.3 Awakened Sedation
    References 5: Transforaminal Endoscopic Lumbar Discectomy for Paramedian Disc Herniation with Ho:Yag Laser
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Indication
    5.3 Surgical Technique
    5.3.1 Anesthesia and Position
    5.3.2 Special Surgical Instrument
    5.3.3 Surgical Step
    5.4 Literature Review
    5.5 Postoperative Consideration
    References
    6: Transforaminal Endoscopic Lumbar Discectomy for Foraminal Disc Herniation with Ho:Yag Laser
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Indications
    6.2.1 Surgical Technique
    References
    7: Endoscopic Lumbar Foraminotomy with Ho:Yag Laser
    7.1 Introduction 7.2 Indications
    7.3 Surgical Procedure
    7.4 Role of Ho:Yag Laser in Endoscopic Foraminotomy
    7.5 Case Illustration
    7.5.1 Case 1
    7.5.2 Case 2
    7.6 Summary
    References
    8: Microscopic Lumbar Discectomy for Paramedian Disc Herniation with CO2 Laser
    8.1 Introduction
    8.2 Indications
    8.3 Surgical Technique
    8.4 Postoperative Consideration
    8.5 Case Illustration
    8.6 Summary
    References
    9: Discectomy of Calcified Disc Herniation Using CO2 Laser
    9.1 Introduction
    9.2 Surgical Technique
    9.3 Conclusion
    References 10: Microscopic Lumbar Discectomy for Foraminal and Extraforaminal Disc Herniation Using CO2 Laser
    10.1 Introduction
    10.2 Indications
    10.3 Surgical Technique
    10.3.1 L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L4, and L4-L5
    10.3.2 L5-S1
    10.4 Case Illustration
    10.5 Summary
    References
    11: Transforaminal Endoscopic Thoracic Discectomy with Ho:Yag Laser
    11.1 Introduction
    11.2 Indications
    11.3 Surgical Technique
    11.4 Postoperative Consideration
    11.5 Case Illustration
    11.5.1 Case 1
    11.6 Summary
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Ronald J. Riegel, John C. Godbold, Jr.
    Contents:
    Part I: The History of Laser Therapy
    Part II: The Theory and Science of Laser Therapy
    Part III: Practical Applications of Laser Therapy
    Part IV: Clinical Applications of Laser Therapy in Companion Animals
    Part V: Clinical Applications of Laser Therapy in Canine Sports Medicine
    Part VI: Clinical Applications of Laser Therapy in Companion Animal Rehabilitation
    Part VII: Clinical Applications of Laser Therapy in Exotic Animals
    Part VIII: Clinical Applications of Laser Therapy in Equine Practice
    Part IX: Clinical Applications of Laser Therapy in Food Animal Practice
    Part X: Laser Therapy and Alternative and Regenerative Therapies
    Part XI: Integrating Laser Therapy into Veterinary Medicine.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    volume editors, Susan Bard, New York, N.Y., David J. Goldberg, New York, N.Y.
    Summary: Today, nearly 60 years after the invention of the first medical laser, multiple laser and light systems exist and are applied in various medical specialties such as dermatology, ophthalmology, and urology. This volume - the first in the series Aesthetic Dermatology - focuses on the laser treatment of cutaneous lesions with a vascular target. Each chapter describes a particular laser or light modality and its specific application to a variety of both vascular and nonvascular lesions. Renowned specialists in laser medicine have contributed their expertise, incorporating current evidence-based literature and their own personal treatment recommendations, as well as pearls and perils. The purpose of this book is to explore the options and parameters available to treat cutaneous lesions traditionally responsive to vascular laser therapy and to expand the application to further lesion treatments. Readers who wish to broaden their knowledge and further hone their skills in treating cutaneous vascular lesions with lasers will find this publication a valuable and comprehensive review.

    Contents:
    Laser history, physics, and safety / Bard, S.
    Argon, krypton, and copper lasers / Styperek, A.R.
    Pulsed dye laser / Waibel, J.S.
    KTP laser / Green, J.B., Serowka, K., Saedi, N., Kaufman, J.
    Alexandrite and diode lasers / Nouri, K., Savas, J.A., Ledon, J., Franca, K., Chacon, A., Nouri, K.
    Nd:YAG laser / Kaufman, J.
    Intense pulsed light / Chen, A.F., Weiss, E.
    Complications of vascular laser treatment / Grunebaum, L.D., Bartlett, K.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Elizabeth L. Tanzi, Jeffrey S. Dover ; video editor, Leah K. Spring ; series editors, Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Maria Claudia Almeida Issa, Bhertha Tamura, editors.
    Summary: The series “Clinical Approach and Procedures in Cosmetic Dermatology” intends to be a practical guide in Cosmetic Dermatology. Procedures in cosmetic dermatology are very popular and useful in medicine, indicated to complement topical and oral treatments not only for photodamaged skin but also for other dermatosis such as acne, rosacea, scars, etc. Also, full-face treatments using peelings, lasers, fillers and toxins are increasingly being used, successfully substituting or postponing the need for plastic surgeries. Altogether, these techniques not only provide immediate results but also help patients to sustain long-term benefits, both preventing/treating dermatological diseases and maintaining a healthy and youthful skin. Throughout this series, different treatments in Cosmetic Dermatology will be discussed in detail covering the use of many pharmacological groups of cosmeceuticals, the new advances in nutraceuticals and emerging technologies and procedures. This volume addresses the most important physical approaches in cosmetic dermatology, disclosing their uses and advantages. Here are discussed in detail the applicability of lasers and other lights, photodynamic therapy, radiofrequency, ultrasound and transepidermal drug delivery.

    Contents:
    SECTION A: LASERS AND LIGHTS Chapter 1. Biophotonics
    Chapter 2. IPL for Photorejuvenation
    Chapter 3. IPL for rosacea and other indications
    Chapter 4. LED for acne, scars and photodamaged skin
    Chapter 5. Nonablative lasers for photorejuvenation
    Chapter 6. Nonablative lasers for stretch marks
    Chapter 7. Nonablative lasers for scars
    Chapter 8. QS Laser for Melasma, Dark circles eyes and photorejuvenation
    Chapter 9. Ablative lasers (Erbium laser) for photorejuvenation
    Chapter 10. Ablative lasers (Erbium laser) for scars and stretch marks
    Chapter 11. Ablative lasers (CO2 laser) for photorejuvenation
    Chapter 12. Ablative lasers (CO2 laser) for stretch marks
    Chapter 13. Ablative lasers (CO2 laser) for scars
    Chapter 14. Ablative lasers (CO2 laser) for other indications
    Chapter 15. Fractional ablative and non ablative lasers for ethnic skin
    Chapter 16. Laser for hair removal
    Chapter 17. Laser on hair regrowth
    Chapter 18. Laser lipolysis
    Chapter 19. Laser for vascular lesions
    Chapter 20. Laser for onychomycosis
    Chapter 21. Safety rules of lights and lasers use.- SECTION B: PHOTODYNAMIC THERAPY (PDT) Chapter 22. Daylight PDT and its relation to photodamaged skin
    Chapter 23. Actinic chelitis: efficacy x cosmetic result
    Chapter 24. PDT for photorejuvenation
    Chapter 25. PDT for acne
    Chapter 26. New substances and equipments developed in Brazil – PDT.- SECTION C: RADIOFREQUENCY (RF) Chapter 27. Non Ablative RF for facial rejuvenation
    Chapter 28. Non ablative RF for laxity and cellulites
    Chapter 29. Non ablative RF for hyperhidrosis
    Chapter 30. Ablative RF in cosmetic dermatology.- SECTION D: ULTRASSOUND (US) Chapter 31. US for lipolysis
    Chapter 32. US for tightening
    Chapter 33. Impact US for drug delivery.- SECTION E: TRANSEPIDERMAL DRUG DELIVERY (TED) Chapter 34. TED: concept, effects and applications
    Chapter 35. TED with ablative methods (RF and laser)
    Chapter 36. TED and Photodynamic Therapy.- SECTION F: CRYOLIPOLYSIS Chapter 37. Cryolipolysis for body sculpting. .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] William H. Truswell.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
  • Digital
    O. Topaz, editor.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Laser physics and laser sources for cardiovascular applications
    Optic fibers and mechanical properties of laser catheters
    Landmarks along the introduction of laser to cardiovascular therapy
    Laser-thrombus interaction: from basic research to clinical utilization in the management of cardiovascular diseases
    Laser for treatment of acute coronary syndromes
    Laser for management of ST-elevation acute myocardial infarction
    Laser for revascularization of complex targets: old SVGs, CTO, left main disease, stent restenosis
    Laser utilization for synergistic technology strategy for coronary revascularization: laser and directional rotablation; laser combined with drug eluting balloon
    Laser for revascularization of peripheral arterial disease- SFA, renal, subclavian, carotid arteries
    Laser for infra-popliteal revasculariztion
    TMR- physiology, pathology and basic research concepts
    TMR-endovascular and surgical techniques and clinical outcomes
    Laser application for venous thrombosis
    Laser for IVC filter removal
    Laser for interventional electrophysiology ? extraction and removal of pacemaker and AICD leads
    Laser for treatment of cardiac arrhythmias
    Laser application for treatment of congenital heart disease
    Nursing perspectives of cardiovascular laser procedures
    Laser safety in the cardiovascular suite and the operation room
    Laser induced cardiovascular complications : mechanisms, recognition and management
    Laser in cardiovascular veterinary medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Donald J. Coluzzi, Steven P.A. Parker, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Patricia M. de Freitas, Alyne Simoes.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Jae Dong Lee, Min Jin Maya Oh.
    Summary: In the book of 'Lasers in Dermatology: Parameters and Choice,' specific laser parameters are described around each laser instrument for these novices. However, since it is impossible to treat effective and safe laser simply by memorizing parameters, it is described based on the important principles that is essential for parameter control. This book describes a total of 13 lasers and energy-based devices : Q-switched ruby laser, Q-switched Nd:YAG laser, picosecond alexandrite laser, long-pulsed Nd:YAG laser, pulsed-dye laser, intense pulsed light (IPL), long-pulsed alexandrite laser, Er:YAG laser, CO2 fractional laser, fractional microneedle radiofrequency (RF), light-emitting diode (LED), skin equipment, and 1,450nm diode laser. And for novices, it explains the simple principles of lasers and the concepts you need to know when you start skin care and laser. It also explains the treatment of scars and melasma, which are the diseases that novices are most interested in. Finally, it describes post-inflammatory (PIH) and side effects and complications that novices are embarrassed about in diagnosis and treatment.

    Contents:
    I. Principles of Laser
    1. Six parameters of lasers in dermatology
    II. Choice of laser and medical skin care
    2. Choice of laser
    3. Medical skin care
    III. Lasers and parameters
    4. Q-switched Ruby laser and absorption coefficient
    5. Q-switched Nd:YAG laser and subcellular selective photothermolysis
    6. Alexandrite picosecond laser and stress confinement time
    7. Long-pulsed Nd:YAG laser and Arrhenius equation
    8. Pulsed-dye laser and macropulse
    9. Intense pulsed light and extended theory of selective photothermolysis
    10. Long-pulsed alexandrite laser and thermal kinetic selectivity
    11. CO2, Er:YAG laser and residual thermal damage
    12. CO2 fractional laser and fractional photothermolysis
    IV. Energy-based devices and parameters
    13. Fractional microneedle radiofrequency and conductivity
    14. Light emitting diode and Arndt-Schultz curve
    15. Skin care equipment and calcium gradient
    V. Treatment of acne, scar and melasma
    16. Photodynamic therapy and consensus of acne treatment
    17. Acne atrophic scar and hisology
    18. Melasma and melanogenesis
    VI. Complications of laser treatment
    19. Pathogenesis and treatment of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation
    20. Complications and its treatment in laser treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Keyvan Nouri editor.
    Summary: Along with its sister dermatologic volume, this comprehensive textbook of laser technology covers the use of lasers to treat vascular anomalies and lesions, control of pigmented lesions and tattoos, hair removal, acne, facial rejuvenation, Psoriasis, hypopigmented lesions and Vitiligo. Chapters are formatted in an easy to follow format with clear concise sections with bulleted summaries to highlight key points. Lasers in Dermatology and Medicine: Dermatologic Applications provides detailed explanations of when lasers can be of use how to use them across a range of medical disciplines. Clinically relevant examples are provided along with relevant images and summary boxes to highlight key points. It therefore provides a critical resource on the applications and use of lasers across medicine for both the trainee and trained clinician.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Stefan Stübinger, Florian Klämpfl, Michael Schmidt, Hans-Florian Zeilhofer, editors.
    Summary: This book provides surgeons with important insights into laser technologies as well as a sound understanding of their current and potential applications within oral and maxillofacial surgery and related disciplines. The opening chapters focus on the relevant physical background, the technology of the typically used lasers, laser-tissue interactions, and the treatment systems. Detailed information is then provided on the various established applications of laser treatments, including in relation to skin and mucosa and the dental hard tissues and bone. Special applications are also described, for example with respect to periodontal surgery, peri-implantitis therapy, photodynamic treatment, holography and additive manufacturing. The book closes by examining technologies that will soon be available for application in hospitals, topics which are currently the subject of research, and laser safety. Beyond surgeons, the book will be of value for engineers and scientists working in the field of medical engineering using lasers.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Laser Fundamentals
    1: Physical Fundamentals
    1.1 Prequel
    1.2 Basic Properties of Light
    1.2.1 Geometrical Optics: Light as Rays
    1.2.2 Wave Optics
    1.2.3 Photons
    1.3 Light Propagation
    1.4 Light-Matter Interaction
    1.5 Scattering of Light
    1.5.1 Elastic Scattering
    1.5.2 Inelastic Scattering
    References
    2: An Introduction to Laser
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Physics of Laser
    2.3 Laser Light Properties
    2.3.1 Coherence
    2.3.2 Divergence and Directionality
    2.3.3 Monochromaticity
    2.3.4 Brightness 2.4 Gaussian Beam Optics
    2.5 Solid-State Lasers
    2.6 Gas Lasers
    2.7 Semiconductor Lasers
    References
    Suggested Reading
    3: Laser-Tissue Interaction
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Optical Properties of Tissue
    3.2.1 Absorption
    3.2.2 Scattering
    3.3 Photochemical Interaction
    3.3.1 Photodynamic Therapy (PDT)
    3.3.2 Laser Biostimulation
    3.4 Photothermal Interaction
    3.5 Photoablation
    3.6 Plasma-Induced Ablation
    3.7 Photodisruption
    3.8 Conclusion
    References
    Part II: Clinical and Technical Applications 4: Prevention and Treatment of Oral Mucositis in Cancer Patients Using Photobiomodulation (Low-Level Laser Therapy and Light-Emitting Diodes)
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Oral Mucositis
    4.2.1 Photobiomodulation (PBM) and Oral Mucositis
    4.2.2 New Beneficial Evidence
    References
    5: Photodynamic Reactions for the Treatment of Oral-Facial Lesions and Microbiological Control
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Photodynamic Therapy in Facial Lesions
    5.3 Photodynamic Therapy of Head and Neck Cancers
    5.3.1 Protocols and Determining Factors in the Outcome
    5.3.2 Lesion Size and Appearance 5.3.3 Dosimetry
    5.3.4 Site
    5.4 Photodynamic Inactivation
    References
    6: Biophotonic Based Orofacial Rehabilitation and Harmonization
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Photonic Therapies for Orofacial Rehabilitation and Harmonization
    6.2.1 Photobiomodulation
    6.2.1.1 Red Light (622-780 nm)
    6.2.1.2 Near Infrared Light (780-1500 nm)
    6.2.1.3 Blue Light (455-492 nm)
    6.2.1.4 Amber Light (577-622 nm)
    6.2.1.5 Violet Light (390-455 nm)
    6.2.1.6 Green Light (492-577 nm)
    6.2.2 Photokinesiotherapies
    6.3 Photopeelings
    6.4 Conclusion
    References 7: Use of Er:YAG Laser in Conservative Dentistry and Adhesion Process
    7.1 Er:YAG Laser Interaction with Enamel and Dentine
    7.2 Laser Er:YAG and Adhesion
    7.3 Clinical Cases and Protocols for Laser Conservative Dentistry
    References
    8: Deep Lasers on Hard Tissue and Laser Prevention in Oral Health
    8.1 Laser and Hypersensitivity
    8.1.1 Nd:YAG Laser: LITS Technique
    8.1.2 Diode Laser
    8.2 Er:YAG Sealing
    References
    9: Laser in Bone Surgery
    9.1 Introduction
    9.2 History of Hard Tissue Laser Ablation
    9.3 The Physics Behind the Laser-Bone Interaction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kamal Gupta.
    Summary: This multidisciplinary book introduces all the known and unknown facts, tips, and tricks of laser procedures in various anorectal disorders including haemorrhoids, fistula in ano, anal fissure, pilonidal sinus, etc. It describes minimally invasive procedures, provides authoritative, in-depth presentations of all perspectives of this latest technique. Each chapter includes surgical anatomy, clinical evaluation, and the principle behind hybrid procedures, complications, and solutions that may arise while using Lasers. The book also discusses case presentations in various scenarios and a brief comparison of laser techniques with conventional procedures. It includes an up-to-date scientific and clinical data for quick reference. It emphasizes on "What to do, How to do and What not to do." This is a must-read book for all trainees and surgeons practicing anorectal disorders, providing an overview of the latest treatment options. This book empowers surgeons with in-depth knowledge and enhance their skills to manage common anorectal diseases. It will serve as a valuable guide for residents, clinicians, surgeons, researchers, and proctologists keen to use lasers as a futuristic approach to deal with anorectal disorders.

    Contents:
    Lasers in surgery -From Past to Present
    Surgical Anatomy of Anal Canal; - Anal cushions and Pathophysiology of Hemorrhoids
    Clinical Evaluation of Hemorrhoids
    Non-Surgical Management of Hemorrhoids
    Hemorrhoidectomy The Gold Standard
    Minimal Invasive Procedures for Hemorrhoids
    Laser Hemorrhoidoplasty; - Lasers in external and complicated internal haemorrhoids
    Anatomy of Para-anal and Para-rectal spaces
    Anatomy of Para-anal and Para-rectal spaces
    Evaluation and Management of Anorectal Abscess
    Clinical Evaluation and Classification of Anal Fistula
    Clinical Evaluation and Classification of Anal Fistula
    Sphincter Saving Techniques
    Role of lasers in fistula - Fistula laser closure (FiLaC)
    Hybrid Procedures-Future of Fistula Surgery
    Role of Lasers in Pilonidal Sinus
    Role of Lasers in Anal Fissures,- Postoperative Management of Anorectal Wounds.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Robert A. Norman, Sharad P. Paul.
    Summary: This book describes a paradigm shift for all of humanity -- We are at a point where we may be the last generation that is still partially or fully natural. We are often balancing on the precipice between science and science fiction, now ready to tip the scales and slide comfortably into the future of great discoveries and wonderful changes. Many crucial and important questions are addressed in the pages of this book, including: what are the true medical and social problems facing us? Which are the highest value targets we need to focus on to ensure our best route of success? How can we protect our futures and enhance our lives by understanding what it means to be the "last natural humans" to roam this planet? The Last Natural Man combines a fascination with the history of medicine, evolutionary biology, and medical anthropology and mix it with modern medicine and science to investigate how we evolved and where we are headed. The overall result is a clear and engaging guidebook for navigating the often confusing and cloudy waters of the future of medicine and our life on Earth.‍?‍? Cultural evolution has been the major driving force over the last several thousand years and enormous in its influence compared to almost invisible changes in our physical adaptations. If cultural and religious evolution was the driver for human history, are we now entering the phase of physical transformation ? where humanity refuses to accept mortality and seeks to make changes to defeat nature. ‍In this book the authors are describing a paradigm shift of all of humanity?just as hunter-gatherers had their stellar features, the future man will have many attractive qualities, even if many artificial. We are often balancing on the precipice between science and science fiction, now ready to tip the scales and slide comfortably into the future of great discoveries and wonderful changes. But are these changes all for the good? What will being human mean.

    Contents:
    A history of disease and human invention
    Germs, genes and geography
    Is aging a disease?
    Vaccines and prevention
    The future of disease: evolution and ecology
    Acute vs. chronic illness: how do we decide what to treat or eliminate?
    The last natural brain
    Biomimicry
    The new creationists
    The replaceable you
    Sensing the future
    Moving on
    The last chapter
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    Elizabeth Boatwright, DMin, BCC-PCHAC, CFP.
    Summary: "Whether we like it or not, we all die. People avoid talking about death because it is too mysterious, too dark, and occasionally, as in the case of an accidental or other sudden death, too unpredictable. Because we do not discuss death and dying in our current culture, people are left to wrestle with large questions about death. This book is a place to start thinking about, and preparing for, this inevitable event. The primary goal of The Last Things We Talk About is to help readers affirm, celebrate, and remember the people and experiences they cherish in this life. It encourages them to seriously consider their death and take planning one step at a time, according to their schedule, and as energy permits. Elizabeth Boatwright, DMin, BCC-PCHAC, CFP is a Relief Chaplain in Oncology Outpatient Palliative Care Medicine at Stanford Health Care. She has over 25 years in ministry experience serving diverse cultures along with extensive work in the arts and financial planning"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Exploring and expressing meaning and purpose
    Making wishes known to loved ones
    Talking about health and illness
    Putting your house in order
    Saying goodbye and the dying process
    Figuring out what happens next
    Piercing things back together after death: conversations around grief and loss.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    HQ1073 .B63 2021
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Art Walaszek.
    Summary: "Late-Life Depression and Anxiety empowers health care professionals to identify and diagnose anxiety and depression in older adult patients and help them find relief, stay independent, and lower their risk of suicide. Readers will gain up-to-date knowledge of the scope and seriousness of depression, anxiety, and suicide in older adults, alongside a system of proven assessment and treatment techniques for turning evidence-based theory into practice"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to late-life depression / Art Walaszek
    Introduction to late-life anxiety and related disorders / Lisa L. Boyle
    Assessment of late-life depression and anxiety / Rebecca M. Radue
    Suicide risk reduction in older adults / Lucy Y. Wang
    Management of late-life depression and anxiety / Anna Borisovskaya, Elizabeth Chmelik, William Bryson, Matthew Schreiber, Marcella Pascualy, Samantha May, Courtney Roberts
    Comprehensive cultural assessment of the older adult with depression and anxiety / Eileen Ahearn.
  • Digital
    Shahirose Sadrudin Premji, editor.
    Summary: This volume analyses the distinct care needs of late preterm infants and their parents by reflecting on the best available evidence to inform on practice and latest innovations in care. It addresses the spectrum of issues experienced by late preterm infants and their parents to ensure their health life trajectories. We define late preterm infants as those born between 34 to 36 weeks' gestational age. The book uses creative writing prompts and a narrative style to gain insight and self-reflection in and on practice to move the reader to embracing best practices. Issues such as mother's physical and emotional health, father's burden in postpartum period and neurodevelopmental outcomes of late preterm infants are specifically addressed. Areas of innovation are shared for consideration to prompt readers thinking about continuous improvement in quality of care. The book shares local and global perspectives to address the common concerns related to care of late preterm infants and their families, and to foster a partnership in promoting their health all across the globe. It is intended to any health care providers such as nurses, midwives, physicians and other allied care professionals like health visitors, community health workers.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Chapter 1. Who is the late preterm infant and what trouble can he potentially gets into after birth?
    Chapter 2. Mother's physical health before delivery matters: what happens and why?! Why is hypoglycaemia a potential concern forlate preterm infants?
    Chapter 3. Mother's emotional health during pregnancy matters: what happens and why?!
    Chapter 4. What do I need to know about the father of a late preterm infant to support him in the postpartum period?
    Chapter 5. The social organization of nurses' work with late preterm infants in non-tertiary settings: say that again?
    Chapter 6. Why is it so hard to breastfeed a late preterm infant and what can I do to help parents?
    Chapter 7. Why is it so hard to breastfeed a late preterm infant and how to help parents?
    Chapter 8. Am I a frequent flyer? Taking care of late preterm infants and their parents in the community
    Chapter 9. Late preterm infants and neurodevelopmental outcomes: Why do I need to serve and return? Are there innovative therapies we can explore?
    Chapter 10. Perspectives from health care providers local to global: Words of wisdom. Personal reflections of caring for late preterm infants
    Chapter 11. The alternative facts about late preterm infants: You mean there are fake stories about me?
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jörn D. Beck, Carsten Bokemeyer, Thorsten Langer, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive guide describes the aftercare that is appropriate in young cancer patients and discusses in detail the risk and detection of treatment sequelae. It explains the impacts on body and mind of both the disease itself and the different risk-adapted cancer treatments currently in use. Clear guidance is provided on diagnosis and management of the principal treatment-related toxicities in different organs and organ systems and for a wide variety of tumor types. In addition, the role of genetic polymorphisms in the development of adverse therapy-related outcomes is explored, and advice offered on genetic counselling. As the number of long-term survivors of childhood cancer and of cancer in young adults continues to grow, so issues surrounding potential sequelae, second malignancies, and quality of life are becoming ever more important. All practitioners involved in the care of young cancer patients will find this book to be a helpful source of up-to-date information and assistance.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Michael Y. Wang, Andrew A. Sama, Juan S. Uribe, editors.
    Summary: This well-illustrated textbook is the first comprehensive and authoritative source of information on minimally invasive lateral access spine surgery. It covers all aspects of the subject, including patient selection, approach and monitoring techniques, soft tissue management, application in a variety of pathologies, technical nuances, and the prevention and management of complications. In addition, current controversies in the field are discussed and the biomechanics of lateral spinal reconstruction, the physiologic benefits, and cost implications are explained. Over the past decade, the emergence of minimally invasive lateral access spine surgery has created a revolution in spine treatment. This trend began with the introduction of extreme lateral interbody fusion, a totally new spinal procedure. In recent years, the conversion of more than 15% of lumbar spinal fusion procedures to a lateral approach has been due to the unique advantages of this approach over conventional anterior or posterior surgery. All major purveyors of spinal products and implants have entered this market enthusiastically, and all major spinal societies now conduct annual cadaveric and didactic courses to teach the technique. As use of the lateral approach in spinal surgery has become more popular, so its diversity and complexity have increased. Nevertheless, coverage in the literature is typically limited to single chapters, and the spinal surgeon seeking to achieve optimal results must rely on chance discussions with colleagues at meetings to learn the latest information. Lateral Access Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery is designed to fill this vacuum. Written by world experts on the topic, it will be an excellent resource for both beginning and experienced surgeons.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Hélder Pereira, Stéphane Guillo, Mark Glazebrook, Masato Takao, James Calder, Niek Van Dijk, Jón Karlsson, editors.
    Summary: This superbly illustrated, up-to-date reference textbook covers all aspects of ankle instability and its management. Readers will find extensive information on biomechanics, injury prevention, current strategies for conservative treatment, and established and emerging surgical techniques. The most recent procedures, particularly those which are minimally invasive and arthroscopically assisted, are described and discussed in depth. Detailed attention is also devoted to controversies such as the indications and timing for conservative or surgical treatment, the current and future roles of arthroscopy, the definition of "anatomic" repair, and the upcoming concept of "anatomic reconstruction" (replication of anatomy by using a graft). The book is published in cooperation with ESSKA, and the chapter authors include clinicians and scientists working in the field of foot and ankle orthopaedics and sports medicine from across the world. All who are involved in the care of patients suffering from ankle instability, including amateur and high-level athletes, will find Lateral Ankle Instabilityto be an excellent source of knowledge and a valuable aid to clinical practice. .

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the Ankle ligaments
    Anatomic perspective on the role of inferior extensor retinaculum in lateral ankle ligament reconstruction
    Biomechanics of the ankle
    History and Clinical Examination of Lateral Ankle Instability
    Lateral ankle instability imaging
    Microinstability of the ankle
    Assessment of subtalar instability
    Combined medial pathology in patients with lateral chronic ankle instability: Rotational instability of the ankle? --Prevention Strategies and Prehab For lateral Ankle Instability
    Current Concepts in Ankle Sprain Treatment
    Level of evidence for nonoperative treatment on Chronic ankle instability
    Surgical treatment for acute ankle sprain "state of the art"
    Current published evidence to support open surgical treatment of chronic ankle instability
    Anatomic open Repair procedures: Description of the Broström-Gould technique
    Reinforcement of the Broström Technique: When and how to do it?
    Collateral lateral ligament repair: anatomic ligaments reinsertion with augmentation using an extensor retinaculum flap
    Anatomical reconstruction: Open procedure to percutaneous procedure (P-AntiRoLL)
    Open surgical treatment: nonanatomic reconstruction
    Anatomic open Repair procedures: Periosteal flap
    Ankle Ligament Injuries Long-term Outcomes After Stabilising Surgery
    Level of evidence for mini-invasive treatment of chronic ankle instability
    Arthroscopic Capsular shrinkage
    Arthroscopic Assisted Repair of Chronic Lateral Ankle Instability
    Arthroscopic ATFL repair with percutaneous Gould augmentation
    The Arthroscopic all inside knotless option
    Arthroscopic all inside ATFL repair
    All Inside Endoscopic Brostrom-Gould Technique
    Anatomical reflections when considering tunnel placement for ankle ligament reconstruction
    ATFL anatomical reconstruction
    Arthroscopic anatomical reconstruction of the lateral ankle ligaments
    Arthroscopic AntiRoLL technique
    The plantaris tendon option for anatomical reconstruction
    Rehabilitation after acute lateral ankle ligament injury and after surgery
    Goal-based protocol for rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation options for chronic ankle instability: what is new?
    Lower Extremity Alignment and Ankle Instability
    Ankle instability and gastrocnemius tightness
    Concurrent Pathology and Ankle instability
    Non-Biological Adjuncts for Ankle Stabilization
    Unique Perspective of care of the elite athlete
    Assessing outcomes for Treatment of Chronic Ankle Instability
    Consensus and Algorithm in the approach to patients with chronic lateral ankle instability.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sebastian Ocklenburg, Onur Güntürkün.
    Summary: The Lateralized Brain: The Neuroscience and Evolution of Hemispheric Asymmetries is an up-to-date teaching resource for neuroscience faculty members that teach courses concerning hemispheric asymmetries. The book provides students with all relevant information on the subject, while also giving aspiring researchers in the field an up-to-date overview of relevant, previous work. It is ideal for courses on hemispheric asymmetries, that is, the functional or structural differences between the left and the right hemispheres of the brain, and also highlights how the widespread use of modern neuroimaging techniques, such as fMRI and DTI has completely changed the way hemispheric asymmetries are currently investigated.

    Contents:
    1. Brain asymmetries: two millennia of speculation, research and discoveries
    2. Evolution of asymmetries
    3. The connected hemispheres: the role of the corpus callosum for hemispheric asymmetries
    4. Language and the left hemisphere
    5. Handedness and other behavioral asymmetries
    6. Spatial attention, neglect, and the right hemisphere
    7. Recognizing yourself and others: the role of the right hemisphere for face and self perception
    8. Hemispheric asymmetries in emotion processing
    9. Structural hemispheric asymmetries
    10. Hemispheric asymmetries over the lifespan
    11. Sex differences in hemispheric asymmetries
    12. Altered hemispheric asymmetries in neurodevelopmental, psychiatric, and neurological disorders
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Marín Pompa-García, J. Julio Camarero, editors.
    Summary: Latin America is a megadiverse territory hosting several hotspots of plant diversity and many types of forest biomes, ecosystems and climate types, from tropical rainforest to semi-arid woodlands. This combination of diverse forests and climates generates multiple responses to ecological changes affecting the structure and functioning of forest ecosystems. Recently, there have been major efforts to improve our understanding of such impacts on ecosystems processes. However, there is a dearth of studies focused on Latin-American forest ecosystems that could provide novel insights into the patterns and mechanisms of ecological processes in response to environmental stress. The abundance of "New World" tree species with dendrochronological potential constitutes an ideal opportunity to improve the ecological state of knowledge regarding these diverse forest types, which are often threatened by several impacts such as logging or conversion to agricultural lands. Thus, detailed information on the dendroecology of these species will improve our understanding of forests in the face of global change. Accordingly, this book identifies numerous relevant ecological processes and scales, ranging from tree species to populations and communities, and from both dendrochronological and dendroecological perspectives. It offers a valuable reference guide for the exploration of long-term ecological interactions between trees and their environmental conditions, and will foster further research and international projects on the continent and elsewhere.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1
    Dendroecology investigation of Magnolia vovidesii, a threatened Mexican Cloud Forest tree species endemic to eastern Mexico
    Chapter 2
    Drought is a driving factor of seasonal growth of Pinus strobiformis Engelm. in northern Mexico
    Chapter 3
    Dendroecological studies with Cedrela odorata L., Northeastern Brazil
    Chapter 4
    Xylogenesis explains climate- growth relationships in a Mexican conifer
    Chapter 5
    Dendrochronological potential of tree species from America's rainiest region
    Chapter 6
    Potential of Tropical Dry Forest trees species: anatomy, chronologies and environment
    Chapter 7
    Tree-growth variations along environmental gradients in tropical montane forests of South America
    Chapter 8
    Forest dynamics in the Patagonian Andes: Lessons learned from dendroecology
    Chapter 9
    Historical fire regimes in high-elevation tropical forests
    Chapter 10
    Patterns of tree establishment following glacier-induced floods in southern Patagonia
    Chapter 11
    Dendrochronological reconstruction of Ormiscodes amphimone outbreaks in Nothofagus pumilio forests from Southern Patagonia, Argentina
    Chapter 12
    Dendroecology in Polylepis forests in the tropical Andes: modeling of the radial growth of the last centuries and its implications for its conservation
    Chapter 13
    Dendrochronological study of the xeric and mesic Araucaria araucana forests of northern Patagonia: implications for the Ecology and Conservation
    Chapter 14
    Dendroecology applied to silvicultural management in the Southern Patagonian forests: a case of study from an experimental forest in Tierra del Fuego, Argentina
    Chapter 15
    Reconstructing land use changes through ring-width variations in Nothofagus antarctica chronologies from Southern Patagonia
    Chapter 16
    Long-term decoupling between growth and water-use efficiency and its implications for the conservation of old-growth conifer forests in southern Chileong-term decoupling between growth and water-u se efficiency and its implications for the conservation of old-growth conifer forests in southern Chile.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Thomas A. Arcury, Sara A. Quandt, editors.
    Summary: Taking a social justice stance, this book highlights the unique characteristics of the farmworker population in the eastern United States. It examines the health and living conditions of this underserved population, while advocating for equality.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Chapter 1: The Health and Safety of Latinx Farmworkers in the Eastern United States: A Renewed Focus on Social Justice
    1.1 A Renewed Focus on Social Justice
    1.2 Organization of the Chapters
    1.3 Definitions and Conventions
    1.4 The Chapters
    References
    Chapter 2: Latinx Farmworkers and Farm Work in the Eastern United States: The Context for Health, Safety, and Justice
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Farmworkers Defined
    2.3 Geographic Context
    2.4 Agricultural Context
    2.4.1 From Family Farm to Commercial Agriculture 2.4.2 The Risk and Safety Culture of US Farmers
    2.4.3 Regional Crops in the Eastern US with Farmworker Involvement
    2.4.4 Livestock and Poultry
    2.5 Demographic Context
    2.5.1 Number of Farmworkers
    2.5.2 Farmworker Personal Characteristics
    2.6 Housing Context
    2.6.1 Employer-Provided Housing
    2.6.2 Non-Employer-Provided Farmworker Housing
    2.7 Cultural Context
    2.7.1 General Beliefs and Values of Latinx Farmworkers
    2.7.2 Health Values, Beliefs, Behaviors
    2.7.2.1 General Health Beliefs
    2.7.2.2 Lay-Defined Illness
    2.7.2.3 Self-Treatment Versus Medical Care 2.8 Political Context
    2.8.1 Political Processes
    2.8.2 Political Organizations
    2.9 Summary and Recommendations to Address Health, Safety, and Justice
    References
    Chapter 3: Occupational Injury and Illness in Farmworkers in the Eastern United States
    3.1 Introduction
    3.1.1 The Role of Culture in Farmworker Occupational Injury
    3.1.2 Data on Farmworker Occupational Illness and Injury
    3.1.2.1 Numerator Problems
    3.1.2.2 Denominator Problems
    3.2 Access to Optimal Health Care
    3.3 Common Occupational Health Problems
    3.3.1 Heat Stress 3.3.1.1 Work-Related Hyperthermia
    3.3.1.2 Prevention of Heat Injury
    3.3.1.3 Other Heat Considerations
    3.3.2 Health Effects of Pesticide Exposure
    3.3.2.1 The Ubiquity of Farmworker Pesticide Exposure
    3.3.2.2 The Health Effects of Farmworker Pesticide Exposure
    3.3.2.3 Reducing Pesticide Exposure
    3.3.3 Musculoskeletal Injuries and Illness
    3.3.3.1 Musculoskeletal Injuries Affecting Farmworkers
    3.3.3.2 Diagnosis and Treatment of Musculoskeletal Disorders
    3.3.3.3 Musculoskeletal Disorder Solutions
    3.3.4 Skin Disease
    3.3.4.1 Skin Disorders Affecting Farmworkers 3.3.4.2 Skin Disease Solutions
    3.3.5 Hearing Loss
    3.3.5.1 Hearing Loss Occurring in Eastern Agriculture
    3.3.5.2 Causes of Hearing Loss in Farmworkers
    3.3.5.3 Hearing Loss Solutions
    3.3.6 Eye Injury
    3.3.6.1 Eye Injuries Affecting Eastern Farmworkers
    3.3.6.2 Chronic Irritation of the Eyes
    3.3.6.3 Cataract and Pterygium
    3.3.6.4 Eyesight and Eye Care
    3.3.6.5 Eye Injury Solutions
    3.3.7 Transportation
    3.3.7.1 Transportation Injuries Affecting Farmworkers
    3.3.7.2 Transportation Solutions
    3.4 Commodity-Specific Occupational Illness and Injury
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Genevieve Negrón-Gonzales and Magdalena L. Barrera.
    Summary: "The Latinx Guide to Grad School offers readers advice on the graduate school process-from the application stage to the cultivating of effective networks in academia-in an accessible guidebook. It provides a broader institutional analysis as well as grounded advice for prospective and current graduate students navigating doctoral and Master's programs, with a specific focus on the humanities and social sciences, areas of study with significant Latinx representation. Genevieve Negrón-Gonzales and Magdalena L. Barrera have worked for many years as professors, thesis advisors, dissertation chairs, instructors, and mentors within institutions with a large percentage of Latinx undergraduate and graduate students. They identify common challenges, key questions, and helpful techniques for supporting Latinx students that will be helpful for both students and faculty mentors. This book offers their refined approaches to working with Latinx students in a way that both pushes them forward in their work and academic goals in an ethical, socially-engaged manner that still offers a critical assessment of institutions of higher education."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    To grad school or not to grad school?
    Learning to be a grad student
    Essential skills in graduate school
    Unwritten rules of the academy : navigating the gray area
    Navigating professional relationships in graduate school
    Navigating personal relationships in graduate school
    Life after graduate school
    Five mandamientos for remaking the academy
    UndocuGrads : undocumented and applying to grad school (FAQs) / Carolina Valdivia.
  • Digital
    Gianezio Paribelli, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    by Stu Silverstein.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RJ48.2 .S55 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Isabelle Bartkowiak-Théron, James Clover, Denise Martin, Richard F. Southby, Nick Crofts, editors.
    Summary: The expanding remit of policing as a fundamental part of the public health continuum is increasingly acknowledged on the international scene. Similarly the growing role of health professionals as brokers of public safety means that the need for scholarly resources for developing knowledge and broadening theoretical positioning and questioning is becoming urgent and crucial. The fields of law enforcement and public health are beginning to understand the inextricable links between public safety and public health and the need to shift policies and practices towards more integrated practices. This book comes as a first, an utterly timely scholarly collection that brings together the views of multidisciplinary commentators on a wide range of issues and disciplines within the law enforcement and public health (LEPH) arena. The book addresses the more conceptual aspects of the relationship as well as more applied fields of collaboration, and the authors describe and analyze a range of service delivery examples taken from real-life instances of partnerships in action. Among the topics covered: Defund, Dismantle or Define Law Enforcement, Public Health, and Vulnerability Law Enforcement and Mental Health: The Missing Middle The Challenges of Sustaining Partnerships and the Diversification of Cultures Using Public Health Concepts and Metrics to Guide Policing Strategy and Practice Policing Pandemics Law Enforcement and Public Health: Partners for Community Safety and Wellbeing is essential reading for a wide array of professions and areas of expertise in the intersectoral field of LEPH. It is an indispensable resource for public health and law enforcement specialists (practitioners, educators, scholars, and researchers) and training programs across the world, as well as individuals interested in developing their knowledge and capacity to respond to complex LEPH issues in the field, including public prosecutors, coroners, and the judiciary. The text also can be used for undergraduate and postgraduate university policing, criminology, sociology, psychology, social work, public health, and medicine programs.

    Contents:
    PART I - HISTORICAL AND CONCEPTUAL ISSUES
    Chapter 1. Conceptual and practice tensions in LEPH: Public health approaches to policing and Police and public health collaborations
    Chapter 2. The historical public health and social work role of the police
    Chapter 3. Defund, Dismantle or Define
    Chapter 4. Law Enforcement, Public Health, and Vulnerability
    Chapter 5. Challenges and Opportunities in Educating Law Enforcement Officers: 2020 and Beyond
    Chapter 6. Historical and Conceptual Issues: Community Voices
    PART II - LAW ENFORCEMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH: PARTNERSHIPS AND COLLABORATIONS IN PRACTICE
    Chapter 7 - Improving Community Outcomes and Social Equity Through Leveraged Police Leadership
    Chapter 8. Law enforcement and mental health: The missing middle
    Chapter 9. The challenges of sustaining partnerships and the diversification of cultures
    Chapter 10. Using public health concepts and metrics to guide policing strategy and practice: The case for an academic center for policing and public health
    Chapter 11. Law Enforcement and Public Health Partnerships and Collaborations in Practice: Community Voices
    PART III - SPECIAL ISSUES IN LAW ENFORCEMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH
    Chapter 12. Moving Beyond the War on Drugs? The Rhetoric and Reality of Harm Minimisation in Australia
    Chapter 13. Refugees: sitting at the nexus of law enforcement and public health. Chapter 14. First responders stress and resilience as a matter of the public health: A Scientific Approach to Police Commander's Testimonial about Police Work Challenges following Practical Implications
    Chapter 15. Law enforcement and public health: a framework for analysis of LEPH in lower- and middle-income countries (LMICs)
    Chapter 16. Policing pandemics: developing effective policing responses during health emergencies.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    J. Stuart Showalter.
    Summary: "The Law of Healthcare Administration teaches readers to think through these and other questions of law. Wide-ranging and skillfully written, author Stuart Showalter surveys the pressing issues uncovered during of two centuries of US policy, court decisions, and regulation. Unlike other textbooks on healthcare law, this book emphasizes a practical understanding of legal concepts of interest to students and educators in health administration, public health, nursing, allied health, and related programs. It does so in plain, accessible language, featuring real-life judicial decisions"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    A brief history of medicine
    Access to healthcare : rights and responsibilities
    The organization and management of a corporate healthcare institution
    Human resources law
    Contracts and intentional torts
    Negligence
    Liability of the healthcare institution
    Medical staff privileges and peer review
    Health information management
    Emergency care
    Consent for treatment and withholding consent
    Taxation of healthcare institutions
    Competition and Antitrust Law
    Issues of reproduction and birth
    Fraud laws and corporate compliance.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Print
    Jonathan Evison.
    Summary: Mike Muñoz is a young Mexican American not too many years out of high school--and just fired from his latest gig as a lawn boy on a landscaping crew. Though he tries time and again to get his foot on the first rung of that ladder to success, he can't seem to get a break. But then things start to change for Mike, and after a raucous, jarring, and challenging trip, he finds he can finally see the future and his place in it.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3605.V57 L39 2019
    1
  • Digital/Print
    issued by Physical Therapy Examining Committee, Board of Medical Quality Assurance.
    Digital Access Google Books 1979-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RA27 .C1533
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Catherine Picart, Frank Caruso, and Jean-Claude Voegel.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Audrey Marie Beauvais.
    Contents:
    Transition to the professional nurse role / Audrey Marie Beauvais
    Leadership attributes / Audrey Marie Beauvais
    Leadership and management roles in professional nursing / James Cyrus
    Foundational aspects of effective leadership / Mary E. Quinn
    Handling stress in the workplace / Susan DeNisco
    Setting priorities and managing time / Audrey Beauvais and Bonnie Haupt
    Effective communication in leadership and management roles / Sherylyn M. Watson
    Accountability and delegation / Susan A. Goncalves
    Building and leading teams / David M. Depukat and Karri Davis
    Facilitating problem solving and decision making in teams / Audrey Marie Beauvais
    Conflict resolution skills in professional nursing practice / Robin S. Krinsky
    Factors that Influence organizational culture / Kelly Hancock
    Innovation and change / Audrey Beauvais and Kimberly Spahn
    Power and politics in professional nursing practice / Audrey Marie Beauvais
    Managing quality and safety / David M. Depukat
    Management and leadership roles in professional nursing / Kristy Dixon Stinger
    Care delivery models, staffing and scheduling / Karen Burrows
    Budgeting and managing fiscal resources / Deirdre O'Flaherty and Jean Marie DiNapoli
    Selection and promotion in staff development / Lisa M. Rebeschi
    Envisioning and developing your career : where am I going? / Linda Roney
    Preparing for professional opportunities / Karri Davis and David M. Depukat
    Contributing to the profession-your responsibility as a professional nurse / Susan A. Goncalves.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Stefan Abela.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive guide to leadership in healthcare and the management of complex clinical scenarios in the medical or dental practice. Training in leadership and hospital management is not part of the curriculum and so guidance is often not provided in depth. This book outlines strategies for dealing with the management problems that arise in the healthcare profession, and it prepares the reader for interviews, examinations and the supervision of a team. It opens with an overview of the NHS, its evidence-based practice and healthcare regulations. Subsequent chapters discuss data protection, management of new business cases, formal complaints and inappropriate use of social media. Information is provided on the recruitment of new junior trainees, the management of underperforming allied health professionals, and the handling of injuries sustained at work. This book is ideal for final-year medical and dental undergraduate students, foundation year doctors, core trainees, junior and senior specialists and newly-appointed consultants.

    Contents:
    Part 1: The management, structure and function of the Na-tional Health Service
    1. The structure of the NHS in England
    2. Quality, efficiency and value in the NHS
    3. Evidence-based practice in the NHS
    4. Healthcare Regulation in the United Kingdom
    5. Staffing in the NHS
    6. Ethical practice and Medico-legal themes in the NHS
    7. Clinical effectiveness and clinical audit
    8. Trainee performance and assessment in the NHS
    9. Clinical risk management in the NHS
    10. Data protection and freedom of information
    . Part B: Management scenarios
    11. Management of an underperforming allied health professional
    12. Management of an injury sustained at work
    13. Management of clinical incidents at work
    14. Justifying existing levels of care
    15. Management of a suspected victim of physical abuse
    16. Management of a breach of data confidentiality
    17. Management of a formal complaint
    18. Management of a contaminated needlestick injury
    19. Management of staff with repeated episodes of absenteeism
    20. Management of a new business case
    21. Management of a conflict between personal and work confidential information
    22. Management of a non-compliant trainee
    23. Management of recruiting new junior trainees
    24. Management of suspected fraud in your department
    25. Management of violence and aggression at work
    26. Management of Health Tourism in your department
    27. Management of colleagues affected by stress at work
    28. Management of inappropriate use of social media
    29. Appendix 1
    30. List of commonly asked Acts and Legislations
    31. Appendix 2
    32. Appendix 3.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    James M. Kouzes, Barry Z. Posner.
    Summary: This book is a manual for effective leadership, grounded in research and written by authorities in the field. With insight into the complex interpersonal dynamics of the workplace, this book positions leadership both as a skill to be learned, and as a relationship that must be nurtured to reach its full potential. This edition has been revised to address current challenges, and includes more international examples and a laser focus on business issues. Readers will learn how extraordinary leaders accomplish extraordinary things, and how to develop your leadership skills and style to deliver quality results every time. Engaging stories delve into the fundamental roles that great leaders fulfill, and simple frameworks provide a primer for those who seek continuous improvement; by internalizing key insights and putting concepts into action, you'll become a more effective, more impactful leader. A good leader gets things done; a great leader aspires, inspires, and achieves more. This book highlights the differences between good and great, and shows how to bridge the chasm between getting things done and making things happen. Gain insight into leadership's critical role in organizational health. Navigate the shift toward team-oriented work relationships. Motivate and inspire to break through the pervasive new cynicism. Leverage the electronic global village to deliver better results. Business is evolving at an increasingly rapid rate, and leaders must keep pace with the changes or risk stagnation. People work differently, are motivated differently, and have different expectations today - and business as usual is quickly losing its effectiveness. This book aims at helping readers stay current, relevant, and effective in the modern workplace.--description from Amazon.

    Contents:
    Introduction : Making extraordinary things happen in organizations
    What leaders do and what constituents expect. When leaders are at their best ; Credibility is the foundation of leadership
    Practice 1. Model the way. Clarify values ; Set the example
    Practice 2. Inspire a shared vision. Envision the future ; Enlist others
    Practice 3. Challenge the process. Search for opportunities ; Experiment and take risks
    Practice 4. Enable others to act. Foster collaboration ; Strengthen others
    Practice 5. Encourage the heart. Recognize contributions ; Celebrate the values and victories
    Leadership is everyone's business.
  • Digital
    edited by Sandra Davidson, PhD, MSN, RN, Daniel Weberg, Tim Porter-O'Grady, Kathy Malloch.
    Summary: "Leadership for Evidence-Based Innovation in Nursing and Health Professions addresses the current emerging issues facing healthcare leaders and practitioners who spearhead evidence-based innovation. This text is truly unique in that it systematically addresses innovation and evidence from the perspective of both a leader and a practitioner within the context of healthcare. Leadership for Evidence-Based Innovation in Nursing and Health Professions was written by healthcare leaders for current and future innovation leaders. The content is organized to walk the learner through the foundations of evidence, innovation, and leadership. The text is divided into four sections covering evidence and innovation leadership, sources of new evidence, how to lead and measure, and synthesis between theory and practice. This text seeks to be a catalyst for disruptive innovation in healthcare in terms of content as well as how we educate the next generation of healthcare leaders."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    EBP and innovation paradigm : defining and aligning
    Leading innovation : competencies of the truly innovative leader
    Assessing your innovation and evidence capacity, alignment, and drivers
    Patient centered care, evidence and innovation
    Incorporating big data, emerging technology, and disruptive practices into your innovation ecosystem
    Creating the business case for innovation : communicating innovation value through evidence
    Emergence and disruption : working on the edge of evidence
    Just in Time information enabled by technology for real time point of care innovation
    Setting the stage for an evidence-based practice culture and emergence of innovation
    Recognizing pattern changes as evidence for innovation work
    Failure is the only option : progress and learning when things don't work
    Partnership economics : innovating the workforce of the future
    21st century alchemy : overcoming resistance
    Evidence-based education for healthcare innovation
    Innovation and partnerships : healthcare, industry and labor unions
    Moving to the future of evidence, innovation, and leadership in healthcare.
    Digital Access R2Library 2017
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Daniel Weberg, Sandra Davidson.
    Summary: "Healthcare organizations require both innovation and evidence-based practice to build systems that will support the future of improved care. Leadership for Evidence-Based Innovation in Nursing and Health Professions, Second Edition addresses the core competencies and behaviors required to be an innovative leader. This text fulfills the market need for an advanced practice resource focused on how to address new and emerging sources of evidence-based practice that can inform, translate and scale the complexity of leading innovation in healthcare organizations. The Second Edition has been heavily revised and updated to refine the focus on leadership of innovation and place less foundational focus on evidence-based practice process. In addition to a strong revision to the organization and updated content, this unique text features three new chapters discussing workarounds as a source of innovation, performance improvement leadership vs. innovation methodology and the use of evidence in both, and a technology primer for nursing leaders"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Susanne A. Schneider, Cynthia Comella.
    Summary: This book provides insights into the meaningful milestones of leaders and world experts in the field of movement disorders/neurology. Through the format of interview questions, it communicates the skills of key leaders in movement disorders. The interviewees are past and present leaders of the International Parkinson and Movement Disorders Society (IPMDS) and their experiences reflect the nature of working in the global environment and diversity of this society. The stories in this book have value that transcends a specific Society and will provide lessons in leadership that have application to many organizations around the world. This is a key resource for movement disorders experts, clinicians, scientists and young neurologists who are planning the next step in their career.

    Contents:
    Inteviews by: Christopher Goetz
    Stan Fahn
    Eduardo Tolosa
    C. Warren Olanow
    Philip Thompson
    Mark Hallett
    Günther Deuschl
    Joseph Jankovic
    Werner Poewe
    Anthony Lang
    Matthew B. Stern
    Oscar Gershanik
    Claudia Trenkwalder
    Susan Fox
    David Burn
    Victor Fung
    Jose Obeso
    Marcelo Merello
    Kailash Bhatia.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Thóra B. Hafsteinsdóttir, [and 5 others], editors.
    Summary: This book explores the leading role played by nursing science in the European Nordic countries. Recognized leaders in nursing research from Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway and Sweden, reflect on the leadership of nurses, the societal developments and the state of nursing science in their country, and the successes and remaining challenges nurses are facing. The book highlights representative leadership projects focusing on e.g. evidenced-based clinical practice, education and research that have impacted patient and healthcare outcomes in each country. The book shows how nursing, as a scientific discipline, has been developing rapidly in these five Nordic countries. They have more nurses per capita than other countries (OECD 2016) and healthcare is provided to all citizens. Moreover, nursing qualification in the Nordic countries was based on university education early on, and there are more professors of nursing than in other countries. Accordingly, this book on Leadership in nursing within the Nordic countries shares essential and pioneering expertise that will benefit nurses and nurse scientists around the globe.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction on leadership, nursing and the Nordic countries / Thóra B. Hafsteinsdóttir. Part I: Nursing leadership in Denmark: 2. The state of nursing science in Denmark / Kirsten Lomborg
    3. Evidence-based clinical practice / Jeanette Finderup and Kirsten Lomborg
    4. Higher education in nursing in a changing Danish society / Kirsten Frederiksen and Kirsten Beedholm
    5. Pioneers in an old culture : developing and leading a research and development capacity building program / Bibi Hølge-Hazelton. Part II: Nursing leadership in Finland: 6. State of nursing science in Finland / Helena Leino-Kilpi and Minna Stolt
    7. Leading evidence-based practice in Finnish healthcare / Riitta Suhonen, Minna Ylönen, Leena Jalonen, and Arja Holopainen
    8. Nursing education and nurse education research in Finland / Leena Salminen, Sanna Koskinen, Asta Heikkilä, Camilla Strandell-Laine, Elina Haavisto, and Helena Leino-Kilpi
    9. Professional practice competence framework for the nurse leader / Riitta Meretoja, Kirsi Lindfors, and Jaana Kotila. Part III: Nursing leadership in Iceland: 10. State of leadership in nursing science in Iceland / Helga Jónsdóttir
    11. Complexity leadership in the collaboration between academia and clinical nursing : searching for harmony / Marianne E. Klinke and Helga Jónsdóttir
    12. Towards the future : the education of nurses in Iceland reconsidered / Herdís Sveinsdóttir, Þóra Jenný Gunnarsdóttir, and Kristín Björnsdóttir
    13. A nurse-managed follow-up practice for patients after discharge from the intensive care unit : development, testing and implementation / Rannveig J. Jónasdóttir and Helga Jónsdóttir. Part IV: Nursing leadership in Norway: 14. Historical development and the state of nursing science in Norway / Marit Kirkevold
    15. Research development in the clinical field / Hilde Wøien and Sigrid Rannem
    16. Research in nursing education in Norway / Ida Torunn Bjørk
    17. Developing a clinical nursing research programme : the case of promoting psychological well-being in stroke survivors / Marit Kirkevold. Part V: Nursing leadership in Sweden: 18. Nursing science in Sweden : internal and external forces contributing to its development / Ingalill Rahm Hallberg
    19. Clinical practice project implementing evidence-based practice / Ami Hommel
    20. Nursing leadership in transition : from matriarch and instructor to university teacher and researcher / Gerd Ahlström
    21. Nursing research in Sweden : academic leadership / Jimmie Kristensson and Ingalill Rahm Hallberg.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Daniel Weberg, Kara Mangold, Tim Porter-O'Grady, Kathy Malloch.
    Summary: Leadership in Nursing Practice: Changing the Landscape of Healthcare, Third Edition, gives nursing students the opportunity to develop the leadership skill set they will need to succeed in the field. The text acknowledges that not all nurses will be managers, but that all, regardless of career path, will be leaders. The Third Edition focuses on current leadership, innovation, and organization theory and prepares students for a transition into leadership positions. It also explores time management, finance and fiscal management, communication and negotiation, ethical decision making, career management, and much more.

    Contents:
    Change and innovation
    Becoming a professional nurse
    Person of the leader : the capacity to lead
    Conflict skills for clinical leaders
    Staffing, scheduling, and patient care assignments : models, components, and measures of effectiveness
    Principles of ethical decision making
    Leadership : the foundation of practice partnership
    Resources for healthcare excellence
    Navigating the care network : creating the context for professional practice
    Managing your career : a lifetime of opportunities and obligations
    Policy, legislation, licensing, and professional nurse roles
    Delegation and supervision : essential foundations for practice
    Overcoming the uneven table : negotiating the white waters of the profession
    Accountability and ownership : the centerpiece of professional practice
    Integrating learning : applying the practices of leadership.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Print
    Susan C. Helm-Murtagh, Paul C. Erwin, editors.
    Summary: "Today's public health and healthcare leaders face an array of leadership contexts presenting formidable challenges, including the syndemics of COVID-19 and structural racism; an ageing population; unhealthy lifestyles; the rapid spread of infectious pathogens; national disasters, conflicts, and mass population movements; antimicrobial resistance; injuries; and the health impacts of climate change and environmental pollution"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part I: Leadership basics : skills, traits, and behaviors. Dialogue : a foundational skill for effective health leadership / Daniel Martin and Edward L. Baker
    Moral courage in public health leadership / James C. Thomas
    Systems thinking in public health / Kaye Bender
    Strategic thinking : rationale, process, and behaviors / Peter M. Ginter and W. Jack Duncan
    Emotional intelligence / Susan C. Helm-Murtagh
    Part II: Key leadership theories and their application. The situational approach to leadership / Eduardo Sanchez and John Wiesman
    Transformational leadership / Donna J. Petersen
    Authentic leadership / Paul C. Erwin, Stephanie B. C. Bailey, and Susan C. Helm-Murtagh
    Servant leadership / Paul C. Erwin
    Adaptive leadership / Laura Magaña-Valladares, Sandro Galea, and Angelina Casazza
    Part III: The context and challenges of leadership practice. Leading change / Suzanne M. Babich
    Diversity, equity, inclusion, and intercultural competence in leadership / Katherine L. Turner
    Managing and resolving conflict / Michael R. Fraser
    Crisis leadership / J. Bennet Waters and Claude A. Jacob
    Building and leading teams : essential approaches and practical tools for improving the health of populations / Kathleen Colville and Trissa Torres
    Talent management : a leadership imperative / Lynn "Stevie" Sesslar McNeal
    Creating effective public health messengers / Barbara Alvarez Martin and Gene W. Matthews
    Part IV: Putting it all together : your leadership practice. The evolution and development of a leader / Susan C. Helm-Murtagh
    Mentoring and trusted advisors / Cynthia D. Lamberth, F. Douglas Scutchfield, and C. William Keck
    Leadership intangibles / Paul C. Erwin
    Creating your leadership framework / Susan C. Helm-Murtagh
    Learning from experience / Karen DeSalvo, Kushal Kadakia, Ross C. Brownson, Stephanie Watson-Grant, David Adler, Elizabeth (Liz) Maguire, Dave Chang, Alyson Rose-Wood, Innocent Ndubuisi Ibergbunam, Nancy McGhee, Max Michael, Katie Kaney, Ugbede Abu, and Lisa M. Koonin.
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Melina R. Kibbe, Herbert Chen, editors.
    Contents:
    1. What is leadership?
    2. Leadership in surgery
    3. Are you ready to be a leader? The ontology of leadership
    4. Leadership theories and styles
    5. Leadership traits: are people born to lead?
    6. Understanding emotional intelligence and its role in leadership
    7. Common mistakes in leadership
    8. Practical tips for developing leadership skills early in a career
    9. Leading teams effectively: motivating and prioritizing work
    10. How to manage difficult team members
    11. How to effectively manage up
    12. How to manage difficult situations and decisions: conflict resolution
    13. Change management: how to effectively lead a cultural or organizational change
    14. How culture influences leadership styles
    15. Women as leaders in surgery
    16. What does it mean to be an underrepresented minority leader in surgery?
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Melina R. Kibbe, Herbert Chen.
    Summary: This updated volume provides a guide to the theories and concepts of leadership in surgery. New chapters on team motivation, understanding different healthcare systems, and leadership negotiation are included. Practical management skills are also covered, including how to manage difficult personalities, change management, and conflict resolution techniques. Leadership in Surgery examines the skills and characteristics needed to be a good leader and aims to improve surgical leadership. The book is relevant to both trainees and practicing surgeons.

    Contents:
    1 What is leadership?
    2 Leadership in surgery
    3 Leadership theories and behaviors
    4. Leadership traits
    Are people born to lead?
    5. The role of emotional intelligence in leadership
    6. Practical tips for developing leadership skills early in a career
    7. Common mistakes in leadership
    8. How to build and motivate an effective team
    9. How to manage difficult team members
    10. How to effectively manage up
    11. Conflict resolution
    How to successfully manage conflict
    12. Change management
    How to effectively lead to a cultural or organizational change
    13. Understanding different health care systems and funds flow models in surgery
    14. Understanding different compensation models in surgery
    15. Negotiation as a leader
    what you need to know to get things done
    16. How foreign culture impacts leadership
    17. How sex and gender impacts leadership
    18. How being a minority impacts leadership.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Cheryl Kruschke.
    Summary: This textbook fills a gap in education for licensed practical nurses (LPN), providing information specific to their own needs and concerns. Firstly, it clarifies the leadership role of LPNs in the healthcare setting, and then identifies the knowledge, skills and abilities related to leadership, management, communication, culture change and person-directed care concepts. It also explains the efficacy of these concepts related to the LPN care of patients in the work setting and reviews the Nurse Practice Act (NPA) enacted in every US state. LPNs play an essential role in the patient care team and we have to ensure they receive advanced education as practitioners in healthcare settings that reach vulnerable populations such the elderly. They have been considered as the registered nurses' right hand in acute care as well as many home-health settings. They provide basic medical and nursing care, ensure the comfort of patients, discuss health care with patients, and report the status of patients to registered nurses and doctors. But the LPNs are often expected to take on a real leadership role based on the perception that as licensed nurses they already have all the qualifications and education necessary for leadership roles. However, there is a gap in the education they receive and a limited body of literature dedicated to them. Written in honor of all LPNs, this educational textbook fills that gap. With learning objectives, review questions and scenarios, it is a valuable resource for courses for undergraduate students training to be LPNs.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2: The Health Care System Related to the Aging Population
    Chapter 3: Regulatory Compliance and the Role of the Licensed Practical Nurse
    Chapter 4: Fiscal Management and the Role of the LPN (Working in Long-Term Care)
    Chapter 5: The Role of the LPN as a Leader and Manager in the Health Care Setting
    Chapter 6: Communication Skills for the LPN
    Chapter 7: Team Building and the Civil Work Environment
    Chapter 8: Quality Improvement
    Chapter 9: Aspects Integral to Managing the Care Environment
    Chapter 10: Developing a Culture Change Person-Centered Environment
    Chapter 11: Current and Future Trends in Long Term Care
    Chapter 12: Licensed Practical Nurse Practice Acts across the Country.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Lee Bach Lu, [and four others], editors.
    Summary: This book informs and supports medical educators and clinic leaders regarding the key clinical and administrative components necessary to run an academic medical practice. From a group of expert faculty from the Society of General Internal Medicine (SGIM) with years of experience in managing academic medical practices, this manual offers comprehensive guidance to the clinic director regarding critical factors involved with running an academic medical practice including, but not limited to: compliance with Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education (ACGME) requirements, clinic orientation and curricula implementation, clinic workflow challenges, billing, coding, and the Primary Care Exception Rule, productivity metrics and quality indicators, evaluation and feedback for trainees, faculty, and clinic staff, implementation of a Patient Centered Medical Home (PCMH), development of controlled substance prescribing policies, medical student involvement in resident clinics, and Veteran Affairs practices and non-traditional care settings. The scope of this book is sufficiently broad to be comprehensive and practical while still anticipating the further evolution of the academic medical practice in the years to come. Each chapter focuses on a particular aspect of clinic leadership and will offer real-world examples and management "pearls" for the clinic director. Chapters highlight common challenges and solutions and should be useful across disparate practice settings. This is an ideal resource for clinic directors, core faculty, and clinic leadership in academic outpatient medical practices, particularly those within the field of Internal Medicine, Primary Care, and related specialties.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Roles, Responsibilities, and Requirements
    Clinic Director's Roles and Expectations
    ACGME Requirements/Accreditation Issues
    Clinic Orientation and Expectations
    Supervising and Supporting Faculty
    Section 2: Academic Workflow
    Block Scheduling Challenges and Solutions
    Maximizing Continuity in Continuity Clinic
    Panel Management for Residents and Faculty
    Medical Students in Clinic
    Clinic Hand-Offs and Sign-Outs
    Section 3: Clinical Workflow
    Results, Refills, and Critical Communication
    The Electronic Medical Record System
    Outpatient Billing and Coding
    Controlled Substance Policies
    Section 4: Quality Improvement
    Quality Improvement Projects and Indicators
    Practice Improvement Modules
    Scholarship in Clinic
    Evaluation and Feedback
    Section 5: Models of Care Delivery
    Patient Centered Medical Home
    Veteran Affairs Continuity Clinics
    Non-Traditional Methods of Care
    Other Clinic Settings (FQHCs, etc.)
    Comparative Data and Metrics
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by John Knights, Danielle Grant & Greg Young.
    Summary: "The traditional leadership styles of the past are underperforming in a world of continuous transformation. Those that recognise this and learn how to lead beyond their ego will become emotionally intelligent and ethical leaders who are able to build strong, collaborative relationships, and create a caring, sustainable and performance enhancing environment. This new book is rooted in the experience of senior managers and the latest discoveries in neuroscience. It gives you the tools to overcome the challenges faced by new organisational and commercial structures, technological developments, increased diversity and rapid globalisation and succeed.? An essential read for current and aspiring organisational leaders, HR professionals, executive coaches and mentors, Leading Beyond the Ego is a vital point of reference for anyone in a leadership position and who wants to embrace this new world and Transpersonal Leadership."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 The background to this book / John Knights
    part 121 The intermediate journey of the Transpersonal Leader
    chapter 142 Introduction of Part 1, 2The intermediate journey3 / John Knights
    chapter 3 Understanding leadership / John Knights
    chapter 4 The neuroscience of leadership
    Default and emotions / John Knights
    chapter 5 Increasing self-awareness / John Knights
    chapter 6 Understanding emotions and how to deal with them / John Knights
    chapter 7 The power of emotional intelligence (managing emotions) / John Knights
    chapter 8 Using different leadership styles / John Knights
    chapter 9 Coaching style of leadership / John Knights
    chapter 10 Creating a performance-enhancing culture / John Knights
    chapter 11 Identifying strengths and improving development areas / John Knights
    part 1322 The advanced journey of the Transpersonal Leader
    chapter 13412 Introduction of Part 2, 2The advanced journey3 / John Knights
    chapter 13 The Eight Integrated Competencies of Leadership (8ICOL®) / John Knights
    chapter 14 The neuroscience of consciousness and how it applies to leadership / John Knights
    chapter 15 Beyond the ego
    Working for all stakeholders / John Knights
    chapter 16 Improving judgement and decision-making / John Knights
    chapter 17 The values of leadership
    Personal conscience and self-determination / John Knights
    chapter 18 Managing diversity / Jennifer Plaister-Ten
    chapter 19 The inner development of a Transpersonal Leader / Sue Coyne
    chapter 20 Choice and for the greater good / John Knights
    chapter 21 Continuous personal development / John Knights
    part 2413 Implementation of Transpersonal Leadership development
    chapter 22 Modern learning principles and methodologies / Danielle Grant
    chapter 23 Infusing ethics in leadership learning and development / Tony Wall.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2018
  • Digital
    Ritsert C. Jansen.
    Summary: Team leaders should be full of ideas for new research projects and inspire a research group to achieve great results. This practical guide for team leaders, and those who aspire to become team leader, offers a unique approach to help readers develop research and become a more independent and productive investigator. Readers can learn how to recruit and develop talented team members, how to negotiate contracts and manage projects, and how to create wider visibility and publicity for their science. From human resources and project finances, legal affairs and knowledge transfer to public engagement and media performance, the book provides guidance to enhance skills and combine them with those of support staff on the road to success. With numerous valuable tips, real-life stories and practical exercises, this must-read guide provides everything needed to take responsibility for leading research teams. This title is available as Open Access via Cambridge Core.

    Contents:
    Contents
    Introduction
    Team
    Introduction
    Scout
    Select
    Prepare
    Advance
    Organization
    Introduction
    Human resources
    Financial affairs
    Legal affairs
    Patent affairs
    Society
    Introduction
    Open science
    Citizen science
    Media
    Web profile
    Epilogue
    Further reading
    Acknowledgements.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Jay Arthur.
    Summary: A fully updated, practical guide to Lean Six Sigma applications in the healthcare industry.

    Contents:
    A faster hospital in five days
    Lean for accelerated patient flow
    Simple steps to a better hospital
    Reducing defects with six sigma
    Simple steps to a cheaper (more profitable) hospital
    Six sigma for hospitals
    Excel power tools for lean six sigma
    Is there an improvement project in my data?
    Sustaining improvement
    Laser-focused process innovation
    Statistical tools for lean six sigma
    Change management
    Theory of constraints
    Implementing lean six sigma in hospitals.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2016
  • Digital
    Nilmini Wickramasinghe, Latif Al-Hakim, Chris Gonzalez, Joseph Tan, editors.
    Summary: A growing, aging population; the rise to epidemic proportions of various chronic diseases; competing, often overlapping medical technologies; and of course, skyrocketing costs compounded by waste and inefficiency - these are just a few of the multifarious challenges currently facing healthcare delivery. An unexpected source of solutions is being imported from the manufacturing sector: lean thinking. "Lean Principles for Healthcare" presents a conceptual framework, management principles, and practical tools for professionals tasked with designing and implementing modern, streamlined healthcare systems or overhauling faulty ones. Focusing on core components such as knowledge management, e-health, patient-centeredness, and collaborative care, chapters illustrate lean concepts in action across specialties (as diverse as nursing, urology, and emergency care) and around the globe. Extended case examples show health systems responding to consumer needs and provider realities with equal efficiency and effectiveness, and improved quality and patient outcomes. Further, contributors tackle the gamut of technological, medical, cultural, and business issues.

    Contents:
    Key Concepts, Tools and Techniques
    Applications of Lean Thinking Around the Healthcare World
    Macro issues
    Micro issues
    Case Studies.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Contents:
    Book 1: Introduction to medical Spanish and basics: Book 1 description
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter II. Spanish basics
    Chapter III. Basic medical terminology. Book 2: Spanish medical communication : anatomy, procedures, prescription, and emergencies: Book 2 description
    Chapter I. Anatomy and physiology
    Chapter II. Medical procedures and exams
    Chapter III. Prescription and medication
    Chapter IV. Medical emergencies. Book 3: Cultural competence in healthcare and additional practice: Book 3 Description
    Chapter I. Introduction
    Chapter II. Enhancing cultural competence in healthcare
    Chapter III. Cultural concepts in Hispanic healthcare
    Chapter IV. Additional practice exercises
    Chapter V. Appendices
    Chapter VI. Conclusion
    Bibliography.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PC4120.M3 L437 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Ahmed Ammar, editor.
    Summary: The neurosurgical, surgical and medical training and practice models have to keep up with the technological revolution in the 21st Century as our lives changed on a swift base. Making bioethics and metacognition a cornerstone in medical education and practice will flourish our humane societies. Metacognition is thinking about ones thinking, to plan, monitor and assess ones understanding and performance. By adherence to medical ethics and Values-Based Medicine (VsBM) as guiding principles, we can develop benevolent medical practice. To enhance knowledge application, skills, and character qualities in realms beyond the immediate context in which they were learned. In this book, we developed a framework on how to evolve medical education and training by utilizing hi-tech. We divided the book into five principal components; Current and traditional root analysis of the learning process, Ethics and metacognition of education, learning and career development, Obstacles, difficulties and setbacks in learning and career development process, Learning in the digital era, and Mentorship. The author believes we are entering a new era of information technology, which will have a significant impact on the education, sciences, strategies and philosophy. Therefore, in preparation for this colossal transformation, the author brings together the best brains in the neurosurgical field from around the globe. Twenty distinguished Professors of Neurosurgery and educators from Canada, the USA, Colombia, the UK, Italy, the Netherland, India, Japan, China, Rwanda, Egypt and Saudi Arabia gathered their experiences and thoughts in this book to shade light on an evolving world that will be the norm in near future.

    Contents:
    Introduction,. Part 1 Current and traditional root analysis of the learning process,. What is the training all about? Lesson learned from Japanese culture,. Training of the trainers
    The anatomy of education and learning process
    The progress of education and learning process through years
    The light of science and knowledge never fades away
    Part 2 Ethics and metacognition of education learning and career development
    Career development in neurosurgery
    Metacognition of learning
    Ethics of learning and teaching
    Ethics of clinical research
    Utilitarianism and consequentialism in learning and career development
    Values Based Medicine (VsBM); Trainee is the center of the training process
    Part 3 Obstacles, difficulties and setbacks in learning and career development process
    Women in neurosurgery an inspiring story
    Cross borders learning and career development
    Difficult trainee!
    Difficult teacher!
    Learning form errors
    Dreams and realities- Challenges of Low-income countries
    Surgical Training for Developing Countries: Challenges and Opportunities
    Part 4 Learning in the digital area
    Hybrid learning in neurosurgery
    The modern teaching learning and training tools (Simulation, research)
    Artificial intelligence in neurosurgery
    Intelligent operating room
    Distance learning, CME and on job training
    Examination, evaluation and certification in digital area
    Part 5 Mentorship
    Who is the mentor? Quality, obligation and continues self-training
    Who needs a mentor? How to choose the mentor?.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Allen J. Taylor, Editor.
    Summary: The foundation of this handbook lies in the supremacy of careful, clinical observation in medicine. The science and application of auscultation, albeit not without its imperfections, represent a learnable, tangible, personal approach to assessment of the heart and remains crucial in medical practice. Today's medicine tends towards the high tech, discarding simple approaches that can and should steer clinicians towards when to utilize expensive testing, and at the most can, potentially, outperform technology for accurate cardiovascular diagnosis. Within a cost conscious, personalized approach to medicine, the art of clinical examination of the heart could never be more alive, or more important. Technology needs a clinically informed platform upon which to provide benefits to patients with careful clinical observation providing proper identification of patients in need of additional testing and avoiding unnecessary expensive testing. Learning Cardiac Auscultation: From Essentials to Expert Clinical Interpretation provides a clinically-oriented approach to the astute observation of heart sounds and other aspects of the cardiovascular examination. It describes key clinical and auscultation features, and clinical clues to the diagnosis. More importantly, auscultation of the heart should not just end with a simple diagnosis, but an unearthing of nuances of the diagnosis, for example, describing the possible severity or diagnostic implications of the auscultation findings.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Cardiac Auscultation
    Dynamic Auscultation
    Stethoscope Performance
    Aortic Sclerosis
    Aortic Stenosis
    Bicuspid Aortic Valve
    Aortic Regurgitation
    Hypertrophic Obstructive Cardiomyopathy
    Mitral Regurgitation
    Flail Mitral Leaflet
    Mitral Stenosis
    The Austin Flint Murmur
    Mitral Valve Prolapse
    Pulmonic Valve: Pulmonic Regurgitation
    Pulmonic Valve: Pulmonic Stenosis
    Pulmonic Valve: Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Tricuspid Valve: Tricuspid Regurgitation
    The S3 Gallop
    The S4 Gallop
    Pericardial Constriction
    Prosthetic Heart Valves
    The Clinical Assessment of Ejection Fraction and Hemodynamics in Congestive Heart Failure
    The Innocent Murmur
    Atrial Septal Defect
    Ventricular Septal Defect
    Patent Ductus Arteriosus.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Massimo Imazio, Monica Andriani, Luisa Lobetti Bodoni, Fiorenzo Gaita.
    Summary: This book provides an easy-to-use guide, giving cardiologists and other physicians more confidence in training with and understanding cardiac magnetic resonance (CMR) in clinical daily practice. The case-based format promotes step-by-step learning and makes this book a helpful tool for students, residents and trainees in cardiology. An updated, comprehensive review of CMR diagnostic criteria is provided for all clinical cardiovascular applications of CMR in adult patients, from ischemic heart diseases to myocarditis, and from pericardial diseases to tumors, artifacts and incidental findings. CMR is an expanding imaging technique for cardiologists and radiologists alike. Despite several textbooks, manuals and dedicated texts, clinicians may still find it difficult to familiarize themselves with the exam and there are limited formats that provide easy access to the basic information (e.g. physics, specific applications) that are needed for training and clinical interpretation (especially case-based). By describing the basics of physics and methodology in a straightforward manner and providing meaningful clinical examples, this book will help all cardiologists dealing with cardiac imaging as well as doctors in training to quickly and accurately interpret CMR findings in their clinical practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Jesse H. Wright, Gregory K. Brown, Michael E. Thase, Monica Ramirez Basco.
    Contents:
    Basic principles of cognitive-behavior therapy
    The therapeutic relationship : collaborative empiricism in action
    Assessment and formulation
    Structuring and educating
    Working with automatic thoughts
    Behavioral methods I : improving mood, increasing energy, completing tasks, and solving problems
    Behavioral methods II : reducing anxiety and breaking patterns of avoidance
    Modifying schemas
    Cognitive-behavior therapy to reduce suicide risk
    Treating severe, complex, or chronic disorders
    Building competence in cognitive-behavior therapy.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC489.C63 W74 2017
    1
  • Print
    [Jerome Hellmuth, editor].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    P499 .H48
    4
  • Digital
    Regina Roller-Wirnsberger, Katrin Singler, Maria Cristina Polidori, editors.
    Summary: This textbook presents hands-on training material for medical students. The style reflects the need for practice-based teaching with a modern edge in daily clinical routine; accordingly, it also employs online material and pocket cards. Each chapter begins with specific learning objectives, which are cross-referenced with the European curriculum for undergraduate medical education released by the European Union of Medical Specialists (UEMS) together with the European Union Geriatric Medicine Society (EUGMS), as well as the minimum geriatric competences for medical students established by the American Geriatrics Society (AGS). World-renowned European experts in practicing and teaching the interdisciplinary field of Geriatrics contributed to this work, with the aim of offering the new generation of health professionals a global perspective on one of the greatest public health challenges of our time: the management of the steadily increasing number of older, multimorbid, and vulnerable persons. The major strength of this book - published under the auspices of the EUGMS - is its pragmatic, goal-oriented approach, which makes it suitable for bedside learning and patient-centered medicine; further, all of the chapters are firmly based on the pillars of the ageing process in all of its biological aspects, helping readers understand the pathophysiology of and rationale behind interventions for the main geriatric syndromes and disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    edited by Justin Shafa, MD, Stephen T. Kee, MD, FSIR.
    Summary: "Now designated as a primary medical specialty, the field of interventional radiology has contributed many ground-breaking procedures, including angioplasty, catheter-delivered stents, aneurysm coiling, and minimally-invasive cancer treatment. This first-of-its-kind review text offers an authoritative, easy-to-use introduction to the field, highlighting procedures, instruments, techniques, modalities, and more. Using an image-filled, practical format it covers exactly what you need to know for a solid foundation in this fast-growing field."--From the Publisher.

    Contents:
    SECTION A Grand Topics
    History Of Interventional Radiology- Basics Of Interventional Radiology- Imaging Modalities- Anatomy- Neurointerventional Radiology- Interventional Oncology- Surgery- Obstetrics And Gynecology- Pediatrics- Frontiers Of Interventional Radiology- SECTION B Vascular Cases
    Adrenal Venous Sampling- Arteriovenous Fistulas And Grafts- Arteriovenous Malformations- Balloon-Assisted Retrograde Transvenous Obliteration- Bronchial Artery Embolization- Deep Vein Thrombosis- Endovascular Aneurysm Repair- Foreign Body Retrieval- Inferior Vena Cava Filter- Peripheral Arterial Disease- Pulmonary Embolism- Renal Artery Stenosis- Thrombolysis And Thrombectomy- Transjugular Intrahepatic Portosystemic Shunts- Transjugular Liver Biopsy- Varicose Veins- Venous Access- Y-90 Embolization- SECTION C Percutaneous Cases
    Abscess Drainage- Biliary Drains And Biliary Stenting- CT-Guided Lung Biopsy- Gastrostomy Tube Placement- Lymphangiography and Thoracic Duct Embolization- Paracentesis- Percutaneous Nephrostomy- Thoracentesis- Answer Key to End-of-Chapter Review Questions- Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD33.55 .L425 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Tracey A.H. Taylor, Dwayne Baxa, Matthew Sims.
    Summary: "Learning Microbiology and Infectious Diseases: Clinical Case Prep for the USMLE® by Tracey A. H. Taylor, Dwayne Baxa, and Matthew Sims presents diverse cases that encourage problem-based learning, which is key to building diagnostic skills. Each case portrays a real-life scenario, promoting a bridge from foundational knowledge to its application. A series of USMLE style questions with thorough explanations provide an understanding of microbiology and infectious diseases, an ability to differentiate between infections and viruses, and identify bacteria, fungi, and parasites. Questions cover causative agents, disease transmission, mechanism of pathogenesis action, and pharmacotherapy"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Berenice C. Langdon, Aodhán S. Breathnach.
    Summary: 'Learning Microbiology through Clinical Consultation' is a highly accessible text which describes the fundamentals of microbiology within the practice setting in an informative way. It is an ideal resource for medical students and newly qualified doctors, as well as anyone wishing to study medicine or preparing for medical school interviews.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Swathi Beladakere Ramaswamy, Sachin M. Bhagavan, Raghav Govindarajan, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the basics of teleneurology and provides an outline of curriculum and practice with the help of clinical vignettes. It fills the gap for a text that reflects the rapidly evolving nature of the teleneurology field, with specific attention paid to examining how this can be extended to patient treatment. Recent COVID-19 pandemic rapidly revolutionized telemedicine technology and reformed the practice of medicine; this book will serve as an easy guide to physicians all over the world to adapt to changing needs of the health care system. Concise and comprehensive, this 12 chapter book covers a variety of neurological disorders and highlights specific aspects of teleneurology practice, including medicolegal issues, licensure, standard of care, ethical issues, and future trends. Designed to be a resource for students and residents, as well as medical school faculty and practicing clinicians, Learning Teleneurology Basics will prepare the reader to deliver care remotely.

    Contents:
    Tele-neurology Curriclum.-Tele-Neurology and Technology
    Tele-history and Tele-examination
    Webside manners and Professionalism
    Webside manners and Professionalism
    Licensing and Regulatory issues
    Current state of Tele-Neurology
    Payment models for Tele-Neurology
    Future trends in Teleneurology
    Remote monitoring in Tele-Neurology
    Application of telemedicine in research
    Digital revolution in tele-neurology during COVID 19 pandemic.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jeffrey L. Houpt, Roderick W. Gilkey, Susan H. Ehringhaus.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    par M. Loeper.
    Digital Access Google Books 1922-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L801 .L82 1922
    1
  • Digital
    Shie-Liang Hsieh, editor.
    Summary: This book systemically presents the latest research on lectins, covering all the major topics in the field, including the heterocomplex of lectins and Toll-like receptors, protective versus pathogenic functions in connection with microbial infections, and novel strategies for enhancing host immunity against infectious diseases caused by viruses, bacteria, and fungi. Lectins are a large group of glycan-binding proteins that recognize diverse glycan and non-glycan structures expressed on prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells, and are vital to cell-cell interactions, the attachment of microbes to host cells, and the recognition and activation of immune responses to exogenous and endogenous danger signals. The composition and structure of microbes are complex and include numerous 'pathogen-associated molecular patterns or 'damage-associated molecular patterns. As such, microbes interactions with immune cells activate multiple innate immunity receptors and produce distinct inflammatory reactions, which can be protective to contain microbial invasion, or pathogenic to cause tissue damage and shock syndrome in the host. The book shares lessons learned from state-of-the art research in this field, highlights the latest discoveries, and provides insightful discussions on lectin-mediated inflammatory reactions, while also outlining future research directions.

    Contents:
    C-type Lectin Receptors in Antifungal Immunity
    Immune recognition of pathogen-derived glycolipids through Mincle
    CLEC5A: A promiscuous pattern recognition receptor to microbes and beyond
    Collectins: Innate immune pattern recognition molecules
    Insect C-type lectins in microbial infections
    Galectins in Host Defense against Microbial Infections
    Galectins in Host-Pathogen Interactions: Structural, Functional and Evolutionary Aspects
    Siglecs at the Host-Pathogen Interface
    Siglecs that associate with DAP12.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gab Kovacs, Paula Briggs.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Introduction
    1. Basic Physiology- The Menstrual Cycle
    2. Basic Embryology- The Development of the Foetus
    3. Basic Genetics for the Obstetrician
    4. The Gynaecological History and Examination
    5. The Obstetric History and Examination.- Part 2: Gynaecology
    6. An Outline of How to Think About Each Gynaecological Syndrome
    7. Abnormal Vaginal Bleeding (AUB)
    8. Endometriosis.- 9. Perlvic Organ Prolapse (POP).- 10. Urinary problems
    11. Gynaecological Cancers- 12. Ovarian Cysts
    13. Fibroids- Fibroleiomyomata
    14. Termination of Pregnancy (TOP)
    15. Contraception
    16. Subfertility
    17. Polycystic Ovaries (PCO) and Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome (PCOS)
    18. Menopause
    19. Psychosexual Problems.- Part 3: Obstetrics
    20. Antenatal Care
    21. The Labour
    22. Multiple pregnancy
    23. Malpresentation- 24. Early Pregnancy Loss and Ectopic Pregnancy
    25. Antepartum Haemorrhage (APH)
    26. Post Partum Haemorrhage (PPH)
    27. Hypertension in Pregnancy, Gestational Hypertension, Pre Eclampsia, Eclampsia and HELLP Syndrome
    28. Intrauterine growth restriction
    29. Infections during pregnancy- Varicella, Herpes, Cytomegalovirus, Toxoplasma, Listeria, Group B Streptococcus
    30. Endocrine Disease and Pregnancy- Thyroid Disorders and Diabetes
    31. Medical Conditions- Cardiac Disease, Thrombophilias, Rhesus Immunisation
    32. Postnatal Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    edited by Andrus Viidik.
    Contents:
    v. 1, pt. A-B. On biology of ageing.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP86 .L4
    2
  • Digital
    Fiona Roberts, Chee Koon Thum.
    Contents:
    Examination of the Globe: Technical Aspects
    The Traumatised Eye
    ?Absolute Glaucoma?
    Retinal Vascular Disease
    Intraocular Tumours
    Ocular Inflammation
    Treatment of Retinal Detachment
    The Malformed Eye
    Autopsy Eye: the Eye in Systemic Disease
    Biopsy of the Eyelid, the Lacrimal Sac, and the Temporal Artery
    The Conjunctival Biopsy
    The Orbit: Biopsy, Excision Biopsy, and Exenteration Specimens
    The Corneal Disc
    Lens.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Fiona Roberts, Chee Koon Thum.
    Summary: Completely revised and updated, this book now outlines changing patterns in eye trauma, corneal surgery and glaucoma; developments in molecular genetics in uveal melanoma; and diagnostic techniques for intraocular lymphoma. Information on new treatments for vascular disease in diabetic eye disease and wet age related macular degeneration is now included and the chapter on the orbit has many new additions. Recently identified causes of inflammation in the eye including drug reactions are described, as are the effects of topical therapies in basal cell carcinoma. Well-illustrated and practically-oriented, this book has retained its general layout and style. The visual image remains key to explaining the pathological processes and this is facilitated by full color photography throughout the text. It helps both the pathologist and ophthalmologist understand the process that a specimen must go through prior to producing a report and how these various techniques help to refine the diagnosis. The fourth edition of Lee's Ophthalmic Histopathology is an invaluable reference source for ophthalmic pathologists, general pathologists and ophthalmologists.

    Contents:
    Examination of the Globe: Technical Aspects
    The Traumatised Eye
    "Absolute Glaucoma"
    Retinal Vascular Disease
    Intraocular Tumours
    Ocular Inflammation
    Treatment of Retinal Detachment
    The Malformed Eye
    Autopsy Eye: the Eye in Systemic Disease
    Biopsy of the Eyelid, the Lacrimal Sac, and the Temporal Artery
    The Conjunctival Biopsy
    The Orbit: Biopsy, Excision Biopsy, and Exenteration Specimens
    The Corneal Disc
    Lens.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jacqueline Saw, Saibal Kar and Matthew J. Price, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of state-of-the-art left atrial appendage (LAA) closure, covering epidemiology of atrial fibrillation and stroke, LAA anatomy, surgical approaches, imaging for LAA closure, LAA closure procedure, and post-procedural management. LAA closure is a rapidly emerging field in stroke prevention for patients with atrial fibrillation. Several percutaneous and surgical devices are now available in many countries, including WATCHMAN, Amplatzer Cardiac Plug and Amulet, and LARIAT devices, and many more are in clinical development and are being evaluated in research trials. As LAA closure is a technically challenging procedure, detailed knowledge of the rationale, anatomy, and technical approach of this modality guides clinicians in patient selection and facilitates procedural success. Left Atrial Appendage Closure is a valuable resource for interventional cardiologists, electrophysiologists, echocardiographers, radiographers, fellows, and residents in guiding the management of patients prior to, during, and following LAA closure. .

    Contents:
    Atrial fibrillation and stroke epidemiology
    Efficacy and limitations of warfarin, and novel oral anticoagulants with AF
    Mechanistic rationale for LAA closure with AF and stroke prevention
    LAA anatomy
    Conventional surgery for LAA closure
    The use of transesophageal echocardiography to guide percutaneous LAA closure
    The use of intracardiac echocardiography to guide procedural LAA closure
    The use of cardiac CTA to guide percutaneous LAA closure
    PLAATO device
    WATCHMAN device
    WATCHMAN: Trials and registries results
    Amplatzer Cardiac Plug (ACP) and Amulet
    ACP and Amulet: Trials and registries results
    LARIAT
    LARIAT: Trials and registries results
    Novel percutaneous LAA closure devices in clinical or pre-clinical trials
    Concomitant AF ablation and LAA closure
    Procedural complications and management
    Antiplatelet and anticoagulant strategies after LAA closure
    Device-related thrombi, residual leaks and consequences.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Bernardo Cortese, editor.
    Summary: This book comprehensively reviews LM revascularization, one of the most technically challenging and prognostically relevant topics for cardiologists. LM carries blood to 70-80% of the normal heart, and diseases affecting this coronary segment are a common cardiac condition. Beginning in the sixties, management was exclusively within the domain of cardiac surgeons, and recent dramatic changes in percutaneous techniques have led to huge improvements but have also brought significant surgical challenges. In the book, top cardiac surgeons describe current and future operative techniques, while leading interventional cardiologists discuss new bifurcation techniques. This book also investigates the recently released European Society of Cardiology Guidelines in detail. Featuring the latest scientific studies with long-term follow up, and detailed descriptions of the techniques used, this book provides comprehensive guidance for any clinician, and is a valuable resource for cardiologists, interventional cardiologists, cardiac surgeons and internists.

    Contents:
    1 Historical background of left main stem revascularization
    2 Anatomical and pathophysiological considerations on the left main coronary artery
    3 CABG vs. PCI for left main revascularization
    4 CABG should be the first option for left main disease- a surgical perspective
    5 Now, PCI should be the first option for left main disease- an interventional cardiologist's perspective
    6 Which device for left main PCI? A description of available devices
    7 Which interventional technique for left main PCI
    8 Which surgical technique for left main coronary artery bypass?
    9 Preoperative and postoperative IVUS assessment of the left main
    10 Preoperative functional assessment of the left main and postoperative side branch evaluation
    11 Is there a role for OCT for left main assessment before and after PCI?
    12 The role of intravascular imaging for intraprocedural and post-procedural evaluation of the left main undergone PCI
    13 Follow up of left main patients treated with PCI or CABG.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Nessa Coyle, PhD, APRN, FAAN ; consultant Palliative Care and Clinical Ethics in Oncology, New York, New York.
    Contents:
    Ethical considerations in palliative care / Maryjo Prince-Paul and Barbara J. Daly
    Palliative care and requests for assistance in dying / Deborah L. Volker
    Artificial nutrition and hydration / Michelle S. Gabriel and Jennifer A. Tschanz
    End-of-life care for patients with medical illness and personality disorders / Betty D. Morgan
    Poor, homeless and underserved populations / Anne Hughes
    Self-assessment test questions / Nessa Coyle.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Rade B. Vukmir, Critical Care Medicine Associates.
    Summary: On any given day in the emergency department, the chance of confronting a medical-legal dilemma is significant. Emergency medicine and critical care practitioners may have to deal with malpractice claims, informed consent, protection of minors, resuscitation, operational issues and legal compliance requirements frequently. Substantial knowledge of the law as it pertains to their emergency care and acute care practice is essential. Legal Issues in Emergency Medicine is an invaluable resource for medical practitioners, legal practitioners and administrators in practice and in training. The book covers key topics that have direct relevance to day to day acute patient care practice. Each topic includes a clinical vignette, followed by a review of the legal controversy, current medical scientific evidence, case law and preventative solutions to the dilemma. This approach allows practitioner exposure to a wide variety of medical-legal problems, allowing a pre-emptive, informed approach to problem solving.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Print
    edited by Max Borten and Emanuel A. Friedman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    KF2910.G94 L44
    2
  • Digital
    David S. Feldman, Dror Paley, editors.
    Summary: Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease (LCPD) remains a challenging hip condition to treat. More than a century after its identification, the etiology of LCPD remains unclear and treatment continues to be controversial. The main goal of treatment is to prevent femoral head deformation. Preservation of femoral head sphericity is known to minimize the risk of premature hip pain, stiffness and arthritis. The best ways to achieve these goals remain elusive. This book is replete with up-to-date discussions of history, epidemiology, radiology and classification systems for LCPD. It takes a well-balanced, evidence-based approach to various methods of treatment, from conventional containment femoral and pelvic surgery, to more cutting-edge procedures such as transfemoral head-neck tunneling, hip distraction, hip arthroscopy and intraarticular femoral head reshaping osteotomies, ending with a discussion of the latest biologic and pharmacologic treatment strategies. It is a well-illustrated tome for the various surgical techniques presented. The chapter authors, all experts in LCPD, share their practical, innovative and comprehensive approach to this challenging condition. Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease will be the definitive reference work on this condition for many years to come.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    About the Editors
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: History and Epidemiology of Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease
    Who is at Risk and How do We Diagnose it?
    History
    Epidemiology
    Risk Factors and Prediction
    What Makes it Worse?
    Symptoms and Clinical and Radiological Examination
    References
    2: Staging and Classification of Severity of Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease and Its Relevance
    Catterall Classification
    Herring (Lateral Pillar) Classification
    Salter-Thompson Classification
    Stulberg Classification Waldenstrom and Modified Waldenstrom (Elizabethtown) Classification
    Works Cited
    3: Treatment of Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease by Maintaining Abduction to Allow Dynamic Hip Modeling Through Range-of-Motion Therapy
    Rationale
    Indication
    OR Technique
    Abduction/Range-of-Motion Care
    The Problematic Hip
    Duration of Treatment
    Response to and Outcome of Treating LCPD
    Summary
    References
    4: Prevention and Early Treatment of Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease Utilizing Transphyseal Neck-Head Tunnelling (TNHT)
    Introduction
    Pathogenesis of LCPD: An Experimental Animal Model Effect of Transphyseal Neck-Head Tunnelling
    Experimental Animal Model
    Surgical Technique of TNHT
    Clinical Use of TNHT in Children with IDGH
    Clinical Use of TNHT in Children with Early LCPD
    Conclusions
    Bibliography
    5: Varus Derotational Osteotomy as Treatment of Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease
    Introduction
    History
    Biology
    Techniques
    Time of Intervention
    Complications
    Conclusions
    References
    6: Pelvic Osteotomies as Treatment for Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease
    Introduction
    Innominate Osteotomy
    Shelf/Chiari Pelvic Osteotomy Combined VDRO with Innominate Osteotomy
    Triple Innominate Osteotomy
    Conclusion
    References
    7: Treatment of Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease of the Hip by Joint Distraction
    Introduction
    Surgical Procedure (Fig. 7.1 and 7.2)
    Postoperative Management of Distraction Treatment for Perthes Disease
    Results
    Complications
    Discussion
    References
    8: Comparison Between Distraction and Femoral Varus Osteotomy in the Treatment of Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease
    Introduction
    Femoral Varus Osteotomy
    Indication
    Surgical Technique Considerations Advantages of Femoral Varus Osteotomy
    Disadvantages of Femoral Varus Osteotomy
    Hip Distraction: Arthrodiastasis
    Comparison Between Distraction and Femoral Varus Osteotomy
    References
    9: Femoral Head Reduction Osteotomy for Coxa Magna and Nonspherical Femoral Head for Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease
    Goals of Treatment
    Treatment Strategy
    Surgical Details of Femoral Head Reduction Osteotomy
    Postoperative Care
    Postoperative Considerations
    Case Examples
    Pearls and Pitfalls
    Outcome of Ganz- and Paley-Type FHRO
    Summary
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Praveen Guleria, Vineet Kumar, Eric Lichtfouse, editors.
    Summary: In the context of climate change, pollution and food safety, the current challenge is to enhance legumes production to sustain the growing population needs by 2050. This is a daunting task because abiotic and biotic stresses are threatening the growth, survival and productivity of legumes. For instance, the productivity of legumes is documented to be reduced by 14-88% by abiotic stresses. The co-occurrence of abiotic and biotic stresses under field conditions leads to interactive stress types, thus yielding positive or negative outcomes. Legumes react using antioxidant defense, osmoregulatory adjustments, hormonal regulations and molecular mechanisms to tolerate stress. Hence, improving legume productivity requires knowledge on the sensitivity, mechanisms and approaches of stress tolerance in legumes, in order to design new crops and alternative management systems. This book presents advances on bioactive compounds, applications, effect of various stresses and biotechnology-based stress tolerance mechanisms of legumes. This is our second volume on Legume Agriculture and Biotechnology, published in the series Sustainable Agriculture Reviews.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1 Nutraceutical Legumes: Nutritional and Medicinal Values of Legumes
    Chapter 2 Horse gram an underutilized legume: A Potential Source of Nutraceuticals
    Chapter 3 Grain legumes and their By-products: As a nutrient rich feed supplement for sustainable intensification of commercial poultry industry
    Chapter 4 Potential impact of annual forage legumes on sustainable cropping systems in Turkey
    Chapter 5 Alternative RNA splicing and editing: A functional molecular tool directed to successful protein synthesis in plants
    Chapter 6 Abiotic Stress Tolerance Including Salt, Drought and Other Stresses
    Chapter 7 Biotic stress to legumes: Fungal diseases as major biotic stress factor
    Chapter 8 Molecular mechanism underlying Chickpea - Fusarium oxysporum f. sp. ciceri Interaction
    Chapter 9 Biotechnological Approaches for Enhancing Stress Tolerance in Legumes
    Chapter 10 Deciphering the molecular mechanisms of biotic stress tolerance unravels the mystery of plant-pathogen interaction.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ram Swaroop Meena, Anup Das, Gulab Singh Yadav, Rattan Lal, editors.
    Summary: Sustainable management of soils is an important global issue of the 21st century. Feeding roughly 8 billion people with an environmentally sustainable production system is a major challenge, especially considering the fact that 10% of the world's population at risk of hunger and 25% at risk of malnutrition. Accordingly, the 68th United Nations (UN) general assembly declared 2016 the "International Year of Pulses" to raise awareness and to celebrate the role of pulses in human nutrition and welfare. Likewise, the assembly declared the year 2015 as the "International Year of Soils" to promote awareness of the role of "healthy soils for a healthy life" and the International Union of Soil Science (IUSS) has declared 2015-2024 as the International Decade of Soils. Including legumes in cropping systems is an important toward advancing soil sustainability, food and nutritional security without compromising soil quality or its production potential. Several textbooks and edited volumes are currently available on general soil fertility or on legumes but, to date, none have been dedicated to the study of "Legumes for Soil Health and Sustainable Management". This is important aspect, as the soil, the epidermis of the Earth (geoderma), is the major component of the terrestrial biosphere. This book explores the impacts of legumes on soil health and sustainability, structure and functioning of agro-ecosystems, agronomic productivity and food security, BNF, microbial transformation of soil N and P, plant-growth-promoting rhizobacteria, biofertilizers, etc. With the advent of fertilizers, legumes have been sidelined since World War II, which has produced serious consequences for soils and the environment alike. Therefore, legume-based rational cropping/soil management practices must support environmentally and economically sustain­able agroecosystems based on (sequential) rotation and intercropping considerations to restore soil health and sustainability. All chapters are amply illustrated with appropriately placed data, tables, figures, and photographs, and supported with extensive and cutting-edge references. The editors have provided a roadmap for the sustainable development of legumes for food and nutritional security and soil sustainability in agricultural systems, offering a unique resource for teachers, researchers, and policymakers, as well as undergraduate and graduate students of soil science, agronomy, ecology, and the environmental sciences.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; About the Editors;
    1: Legumes andSustainable Use ofSoils; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Prospects ofLegumes inDeveloping Countries; 1.3 Current Need forSoil Sustainability; 1.4 Role ofLegumes inSoil Sustainability; 1.4.1 Agroecosystem; 1.4.2 Agricultural Productivity; 1.4.3 Intercropping; 1.4.4 Crop Rotations; 1.4.5 Soil Conservation; 1.4.6 Fertilizer Savings; 1.4.7 Restore Polluted Soil; 1.4.8 Soil Microbial Biomass; 1.4.9 Soil Physical Properties; 1.4.10 Soil Chemical Properties; 1.4.11 Soil Carbon Stock; 1.4.12 Soil N Pool; 1.4.13 Crop Succeeding Effects. 1.5 Future Outlook ofLegumes1.6 Conclusion; References;
    2: Cereal-Legume Cropping System inIndian Himalayan Region forFood andEnvironmental Sustainability; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Pulse Scenario inIndia; 2.2.1 Pulse Scenario inEastern, Western, andCentral Himalayas; 2.2.2 Major Pulses ofIHR; 2.2.2.1 Indigenous Pulses ofEHR; 2.2.3 Cropping System inCentral Himalayas; 2.3 Prospect ofLegumes inIHR; 2.4 Land Degradation inIHR; 2.5 Role ofLegumes inSoil Sustainability; 2.5.1 Legume Effect onSoil Properties; 2.5.2 Efficient Utilization ofP. 2.10.2 Vertical Inclusion ofPulses inCropping System2.10.3 Cultivation ofPulses inField Bund; 2.10.4 Inclusion ofPulses inShifting Cultivation; 2.10.5 Farm Mechanization; 2.10.6 Transfer ofTechnology; 2.11 Future Perspectives; 2.12 Conclusion; References;
    3: Grain Legumes forResource Conservation andAgricultural Sustainability inSouth Asia; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Crop Diversification withGrain Legumes; 3.3 Grain Legumes forRestoration ofSoil Health; 3.3.1 Biological Nitrogen Fixation; 3.3.2 Nutrient Recycling; 3.3.3 Soil Health Improvement. 2.6 Scope ofLegume inExisting Cropping Systems2.6.1 Potential Future Pulse-Based Cropping System forIHR; 2.6.2 Legume Cropping inWestern andCentral Himalayas; 2.7 Cereal + Legume Intercropping; 2.7.1 Effect ofLegumes onSucceeding/Associated Crops; 2.8 Role ofLegume inImproving Input Use Efficiency; 2.8.1 Weed Smothering Efficiency ofPulses; 2.9 Opportunity forPulses UnderConservation Agriculture (CA) inNER; 2.10 Strategies forEnhancing Area andProductivity ofLegumes; 2.10.1 Horizontal Inclusion ofPulses inCropping System. 3.3.3.1 Soil Physical Properties3.3.3.2 Soil Chemical Properties; 3.3.3.3 Soil Biological Properties; 3.4 Grain Legumes forWater Economy; 3.5 Weed Smothering Effects ofGrain Legumes; 3.5.1 Crop Rotation; 3.5.2 Intercropping; 3.5.3 Cover Crop; 3.5.4 Pulse Crop Residues andAllelopathy; 3.6 Grain Legumes inConservation Agriculture; 3.6.1 Reduced Tillage; 3.6.2 Water Saving; 3.6.3 Crop Residues; 3.6.4 Crop Diversity; 3.7 Higher Productivity andSustainability; 3.8 Grain Legumes inRice Fallows; 3.9 Grain Legumes forEcosystem Services; 3.10 Way Forward; References.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Laura D. Rosenthal, Jacqueline Rosenjack Burchum.
    Summary: "Lehne's Pharmacotherapeutics for Advanced Practice Nurses and Physician Assistants, 2nd Edition, builds on the same foundation of clearly explained, up-to-date, and clinically current content as the trusted Lehne undergraduate text, while focusing on the information that advanced practice nurses and Physician Assistants specifically need for safe and effective prescribing. Three introductory chapters provide foundational content for new prescribers in the areas of prescriptive authority, rational drug selection, prescription writing, and promoting positive outcomes of drug therapy. Core drug chapters are focused on the drugs that prescribers will most commonly see in clinical practice. A sharp focus is also placed on pharmacotherapeutic decision-making, with Black Box Warnings and new bulleted Key Prescribing Considerations features. Carefully focused pharmacotherapeutic content reflects the drugs most commonly seen and used by prescribers, with emphasis not on the first drug discovered or developed in each class but on the agents most often used today. Primary care drugs are addressed first in each chapter as appropriate, followed by acute care drugs. The second edition features completely new chapters on Genetic and Genomic Considerations, Muscarinic Antagonists and Immunomodulators, and updated content throughout. It's everything advanced practice nursing and Physician Assistant students need to be safe and effective prescribers!"--taken from publisher description.

    Contents:
    Unit I. Introduction
    Unit II. Basic principles of pharmacology
    Unit III. Drug therapy across the life span
    Unit IV. Peripheral nervous system drugs
    Unit V. Central nervous system drugs
    Unit VI. Drugs for pain
    Unit VII. Psychotherapeutic drugs
    Unit VIII. Substance use disorders
    Unit IX. Drugs that affect the heart, blood vessels, blood, and blood volume
    Unit X. Drugs for endocrine disorders
    Unit XI. Women's health
    Unit XII. Men's health
    Unit XIII. Antiinflammatory, antiallergic, and immunologic drugs
    Unit XIV. Drugs for bone and joint disorders
    Unit XV. Respiratory tract drugs
    Unit XVI. Gastrointestinal drugs
    Unit XVII. Nutrition and complementary therapies
    Unit XVIII. Therapy of infectious and parasitic diseases
    Unit XIX. Cancer therapy
    Unit XX. Drugs for eyes, ears, and skin
    Unit XXI. Drug therapy for acute care.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Print
    David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox.
    Summary: "Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry ... brings clarity and coherence to an often unwieldy discipline, offering a thoroughly updated survey of biochemistry's enduring principles, definitive discoveries, and groundbreaking new advances with each edition.This new Seventh Edition maintains the qualities that have distinguished the text since Albert Lehninger's original edition--clear writing, careful explanations of difficult concepts, helpful problem-solving support, and insightful communication of contemporary biochemistry's core ideas, new techniques, and pivotal discoveries. Again, David Nelson and Michael Cox introduce students to an extraordinary amount of exciting new findings without an overwhelming amount of extra discussion or detail."--Publisher description.

    Contents:
    The foundations of biochemistry
    I. Structure and catalysis. Water
    Amino acids, peptides, and proteins
    The three-dimensional structure of proteins
    Protein function
    Enzymes
    Carbohydrates and glycobiology
    Nucleotides and nucleic acids
    DNA-based information technologies
    Lipids
    Biological membranes and transport
    Biosignaling
    II. Bioenergetics and metabolism. Bioenergetics and biochemical reaction types
    Glycolysis, gluconeogenesis, and the pentose phosphate pathway
    Principles of metabolic regulation
    The citric acid cycle
    Fatty acid catabolism
    Amino acid oxidation and the production of urea
    Oxidative phosphorylation
    Photosynthesis and carbohydrate synthesis in plants
    Lipid biosynthesis
    Biosynthesis of amino acids, nucleotides, and related molecules
    Hormonal regulation and integration of mammalian metabolism
    III. Information pathways. Genes and chromosomes
    DNA metabolism
    RNA metabolism
    Protein metabolism
    Regulation of gene expression
    Abbreviated solutions to problems
    Glossary
    Index.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP514.2 .L425 2017
    1
  • Digital
    by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox and Aaron A. Hoskins
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital/Print
    von S. Jessner.
    Contents:
    1. Bd. Hautleiden und Kosmetik (xvi, 391 p., 31 col. plates)
    2. Bd. Geschlechtsleiden (viii, 344 p., 22 col. plates).
    Digital Access Google Books 1913-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    T71 .J58 1913
    1
  • Print
    dargestellt unter Bevorzugung funktioneller Zusammenhänge ; begründet von Alfred Benninghoff ; hrsg. und bearb. von Kurt Goerttler.
    Contents:
    Bd. 1. Allgemeine Anatomie und Bewegungsapparat
    Bd. 2. Eingeweide
    Bd. 3. Nervensystem, Haut und Sinnesorgane.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    E23 .B47
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Zeissl, H.
    Digital Access Google Books 1864-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N33 .Z45 1864
    1
  • Print
    Schaltenbrand, Georges.
    Contents:
    [T. 3] Die Nervenkrankheiten.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L341 .S29
    1
  • Print
    von Eduard Kaufmann.
    Contents:
    2. Bd., 1. T., 1. Lfg. Knochen, Gelenke, Muskeln, Sehnen, Sehnenscheiden, Schleimbeutel. Anhang: Literaturangaben
    2. Bd., 1. T., 2. Lfg. Geschlechtsorgane. Anhang: Literaturangaben
    2. Bd., 1. T., 3. Lfg. Harnorgane (Niere und ableitende Harnwege einschliesslich Harnröhre).
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J25 .K21
    3
  • Digital/Print
    von Jacob Wolff.
    Digital Access Google Books 1907
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC275 .W85 1907
    1
  • Digital
    Marilyn R. McFarland, Hiba B. Wehbe-Alamah.
    Contents:
    Transcultural nursing : importance, focus, and history / Marilyn R. McFarland
    Essential transcultural nursing care concepts, principles, guidelines, and policy statements for culturally congruent and competent health care practice, education, and research / Hiba B. Wehbe-Alamah
    Leininger's culture care theory / Marilyn R. McFarland
    The ethnonursing research method : major features and enablers / Hiba B. Wehbe-Alamah
    The theory of culture care diversity and universality : a trailblazing theory / Priscilla L. Sagar
    Globalization of transcultural nursing theory / Margaret M. Andrews
    Cultural assessments and transcultural communication for culturally congruent care / Hiba B. Wehbe-Alamah
    Integrating generic care and professional healthcare practices / Hiba B. Wehbe- Alamah
    The biocultural basis of transcultural nursing (includes genetics and genomics) / Margie Murray Wright
    Transcultural food functions, beliefs, and practices / Hiba B Wehbe-Alamah
    Using a culturally congruent approach in mental health care / Helene B. Vossos, Hiba B. Wehbe-Alamah
    Culture care theory : integrating care and caring into nursing practice / Marilyn K. Eipperle
    Providing culturally congruent care to Haitians using Leininger's culture care theory / Robert Kelch, Hiba B. Wehbe-Alamah
    Ayurveda : relevance in culture care / Joanna Maxwell, R. Amadea Morningstar
    Transcultural nursing and health care in Taiwan / Lenny Chiang-Hanisko
    The sunrise enabler's application in conflict resolution for nurse administrators and managers / Ann O. Hubbert
    Enhancing the role of the transcultural nurse in the global environment / Mary Brigid Martin, Marilyn A. Ray
    Use of culture care theory in translational science : a review of projects focused on the implementation of evidence-based culture care research findings into practice settings / Marilyn R. McFarland
    Engaging in the sacred song of diversity : the art of cultural immersion / Edith Morris
    Culturally competent research using the culture care theory : malaria care in Maasailand / Cecily W. Strang, Sandra J. Mixer
    The lived experiences of African American women receiving care from nurse practitioners in an urban nurse-managed clinic in the midwestern United States / H.B. Wehbe-Alamah, M.R. McFarland, J. Macklin, N. Riggs
    Yupiit : Alaska native people of Southwest Alaska / Pamela J. Embler, Mary Weiss, Sandra J. Mixer
    Understanding the culture care needs of Appalachian mothers experiencing homelessness / Rebecca C. Lee
    Cultural expressions, meanings, beliefs, and practices of Mexican American women during the post-partum period : an ethnonursing study / Valera Alexandra Hascup
    Culture care of Syrian Muslims in the midwestern United States : an ethnonursing research study / H.B. Wehbe-Alamah.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2017
  • Digital
    Fabrizio Bruschi, Luigi Gradoni, editors.
    Summary: Out of the 20 neglected tropical diseases (NTDs) prioritized by the World Health Organization, the leishmaniases rank in the top 3 among those caused by protozoa. The purpose of this book is to provide the reader with a comprehensive and updated overview of all the aspects of leishmaniasis with a worldwide perspective - authors of many chapters include eminent scientists from both the Old and New Worlds. The chapters cover a wide range of topics, classically organized into biology and epidemiology, followed by clinical and control aspects. Following an introductory chapter intended to take the reader into the leishmaniasis complexity, a chapter on Leishmania taxonomy reports on the most recent advances in molecular and phylogenetic data. Parasite biology is then described in detail by means of two separate chapters devoted to phlebotomine vectors and reservoir hosts, respectively. The medical part of the book begins with a chapter on basic immunology and immunopathology associated with Leishmania infection, followed by a classical chapter on clinical aspects of different disease entities. The complexity of disease case management is presented by means of 3 chapters, respectively on diagnosis, treatment of visceral forms and treatment of tegumentary forms. Finally, the last chapter deals with the available approaches to control leishmaniasis and related public health issues.

    Contents:
    Introduction to epidemiology
    Leishmania taxonomy
    Parasite biology: the vectors
    Parasite biology: the reservoir hosts
    Immunological and immunopathological aspects
    Clinical aspects in immunocompetent and immunocompromised patients
    Diagnosis
    Treatment of visceral leishmaniasis
    Treatment of tegumentary forms of leishmaniasis
    Control and public health aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Ajay Niranjan, L. Dade Lunsford, Hideyuki Kano.
    Digital Access Karger 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Shizuya Saika, Liliana Werner, Frank J. Lovicu.
    Summary: This book is the first to summarize the current knowledge of the cell biology of lens epithelial cells in relation to and in the development of posterior capsular opacification (PCO). PCO remains the most common long-term complication of modern cataract surgery, occurring months or years after cataract surgery, unlike most other complications that tend to arise during or soon after the procedure. Opacification of the posterior capsule appears to be linked to lens epithelial cells that are left behind in the eye during cataract removal. These cells proliferate, migrate across the posterior lens capsule, and undergo changes that result in fibrous or pearl-type opacities in the capsule. The first section of the text explains the molecular mechanism and biology of lens epithelial cells that lead to the incidence of PCO. In the second part, in addition to a description of the mechanism and pathological condition of PCO, surgical methods and devices for preventing PCO are discussed in detail. Lens Epithelium and Capsular Opacification will benefit not only young clinical residents and junior researchers, but also established faculty in the clinical or basic academic field.

    Contents:
    PART I: Lens Epithelial Cell Biology
    Chapter 1. From Zygote to Lens: Emergence of the Lens Epithelium
    Chapter 2. Cell Biology of Lens Epithelial Cells
    Chapter 3. The Lens Capsule
    Synthesis, Remodeling and MMPs
    Chapter 4. Lens Epithelial Cell Proliferation
    Chapter 5. Growth Factor Signaling in Lens Fiber Differentiation
    Chapter 6. Lens-Specific Transcription Factors and Their Roles in Diagnosis and Treatment of Human Congenital Cataract
    Chapter 7. Lens Regeneration
    Chapter 8. Fibrotic Modifications of the Lens Epithelium
    Chapter 9. Wound Healing and Epithelial-Mesenchymal Transition in the Lens Epithelium: Roles of Growth Factors and Extracellular Matrix
    Part II: Clinical Science -Pathology
    Chapter 10. Histology of Posterior Capsular Opacification
    Chapter 11. PCO Rates in a Large Series of Human Eyes Obtained Post-Mortem
    Part III: Clinical Outcomes
    Chapter 12. Natural Course of Elschnig Pearl Formation and Disappearance
    Chapter 13. Effect of Posterior Capsule Opacification and Anterior Capsule Contraction on Visual Function
    PART IV: Surgical Methods for PCO Prevention
    Chapter 14. Size of Continuous Curvilinear Capsulorhexis for Prevention of PCO
    Chapter 15. Effect of Anterior Capsule Polishing on Capsule Opacification and YAG Laser Capsulotomy
    Chapter 16. Laser Photolysis System and PCO Prevention
    PART V: Intraocular Lenses/Devices and PCO
    Chapter 17. PCO Prevention: IOL Material Versus IOL Design
    Chapter 18. Capsular and Uveal Biocompatibility of Different IOLs in Eyes with and Without Associated Conditions
    Chapter 19. Capsule-Bending Ring for the Prevention of Posterior Capsule Opacification
    Chapter 20. PCO Prevention with Endocapsular Equator Rings
    Chapter 21. PCO Prevention with IOLs Maintaining an Open or Expanded Capsular Bag
    Chapter 22. Prevention of PCO with the Bag-in-the-lens (BIL)
    Chapter 23. Posterior capsule Opacification with Micro incision (MICS) IOLs
    PART VI: Special Cases
    Chapter 24. PCO and the Pediatric Eye.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kishwer S. Nehal, Klaus J. Busam, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive approach to the diagnosis and management of melanoma of the lentigo maligna subtype, specifically. Authors from multiple fields provide educational information along with importantly relevant, practical, and insightful details to improve the understanding and management approach to this type of melanoma. The chapters address each aspect of this melanoma ranging from clinical presentation, clinical and pathologic diagnosis, surgical management, nonsurgical options, and followup. There is frequent misunderstanding when diagnosing and managing this type of melanoma due to the clinical, pathologic, and surgical complexities detailed. Educational resources truly dedicated to this topic are lacking presently.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Enrico Nunzi, Cesare Massone, Françoise Portaels, editors.
    Summary: A highly disabling infectious disease in developing countries, leprosy, or Hansens disease, is caused by Mycobacterium leprae, and is still very relevant for the human community due to its transmissible nature, variable presentation and composite clinical picture. Early identification of leprosy and Buruli ulcer (also caused by a Mycobacterium, M. ulcerans) is critical to prevent spreading and patient disability and to establish appropriate therapy. This richly illustrated, completely revised second edition of Leprosy and Buruli Ulcer describes the characteristic signs of both these diseases, and contents include abnormalities of the skin, nerves, eyes, hands, feet, testes and bone. It also presents the latest diagnostic tools to identify and quantify organ damage to enable readers to recognize and treat this composite systemic disorder, which can represent a true medical emergency if affecting eyes, nerves, and kidneys. Further, it includes additional chapters on leprosy in childhood, prophylaxis and vaccines. For both leprosy and Buruli ulcer, this handy guide helps practitioners and nursing personnel to spot the different clinical manifestations, make a prompt diagnosis and apply effective treatment of both these diseases.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Part I Leprosy: General Section
    1. History and Phylogeography of Leprosy
    2. Microbiology of Mycobacterium leprae
    3. Genetics of Leprosy
    4. Host Response to Mycobacterium leprae
    5. Pathogenesis of Leprosy
    6. Classification of Leprosy
    Part II Leprosy: Patients Examination
    7. Leprosy Patient History
    8. Laboratory Investigations in Leprosy
    Part III Skin
    9. Physical Examination in Leprosy: Skin
    10. Clinical Features of Leprosy
    11. LucioLatapi Leprosy
    12. Histopathology of the Skin in Leprosy [FP1]
    13. Differential Diagnosis of Leprosy: Skin
    Part IV Leprosy and Nerves
    14. Peripheral Nerves in Leprosy
    15. The Leprosy Neuropathy
    16. Primary Neural Leprosy
    17. Chronic Neuropathic Pain in Leprosy
    18. Electrodiagnostic Studies in Leprosy
    19. Imaging in Leprosy
    20. Differential Diagnosis of Leprosy: Nerves
    Part V Reactions in Leprosy
    21. Reactions in Leprosy
    22. Lucios Phenomenon in Leprosy
    Part VI Leprosy: Systemic Involvement
    23. Ocular Involvement in Leprosy
    24. Otolaryngological Manifestations of Leprosy
    25. Other Organs involved in Leprosy
    Part VII Patients Management in Leprosy
    26. Diagnostic Work-Up of Leprosy
    27. Drugs in Leprosy
    28. Treatment and Prophylaxis of Leprosy
    29. Prognosis of Leprosy
    30. Neurolysis in Leprosy
    31. Prevention of Disability and Ulcer Care in Leprosy
    32. Surgical and Social Rehabilitation in Leprosy
    Part VIII Leprosy and Community
    33. Leprosy in Pregnancy
    34. Leprosy in Childhood
    35. Leprosy and HIV/AIDS Co-infection
    36. Epidemiology of Leprosy
    37. Leprosy Control
    38. The Leprosy Mailing List
    Part IX Buruli Ulcer: General Section
    39. History and geographic distribution of Buruli ulcer
    40. Microbiology of Mycobacterium ulcerans
    Part X Buruli Ulcer: Patients Examination
    41. Laboratory Investigations in Buruli ulcer
    42. Clinical Features of Buruli ulcer
    43. Differential Diagnosis of Buruli ulcer
    Part XI Buruli Ulcer: Patients Management
    44. Diagnostic Work-up of Buruli ulcer
    45. Treatment of Buruli ulcer
    46. Rehabilitation in Buruli ulcer
    Part XII Buruli Ulcer and Community
    47. Epidemiology of Buruli ulcer
    48. Buruli ulcer Control
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Sam Dagogo-Jack, editor ; contributors Denis G. Baskin [and forty one others].
    Summary: Twenty years after its discovery, recombinant human leptin has been approved by the Food and Drug Administration for the treatment of patients with lipodystrophy. Beginning with a synthesis of the vast body of work on its discovery, dissection of mechanisms, and effects in experimental models , the focus of this book shifts to a consideration of the regulation and role of leptin in humans. The emphasis on human-level data is a unique feature of this book. The results of numerous studies indicate that leptin is indeed a regulated human hormone. Leptin provides a detailed account of the myriad physiological, hormonal, metabolic, immunological, mitogenic and inflammatory modulators and targets of leptin in a single volume. Next follows a comprehensive presentation of the therapeutic trials of recombinant leptin in patients with congenital leptin deficiency, lipodystrophy, hypothalamic amenorrhea, and other emerging areas, including leptin supplementation in leptin-replete subjects, leptin substitution for insulin in diabetic models, and novel combination regimens of leptin and other biogenic peptides. Unanswered questions and future directions in leptin research are highlighted in the Foreword by Dr. Jeffrey Friedman and throughout the volume. Identifying such questions helps direct research that could deepen understanding of the complex regulation of leptin under physiological and pathological conditions, a critical prerequisite to its rational deployment in the treatment of human disorders.

    Contents:
    Discovery of leptin and elucidation of leptin gene expression
    Leptin receptors and mechanism of action
    Leptin interaction with brain orexigenic and anorexigenic pathways
    Measurement of circulating leptin and soluble leptin receptors
    Physiological and hormonal factors that influence leptin production
    Leptin, obesity and leptin resistance
    Leptin and intermediary metabolism: Focus on glucoregulation and lipid metabolism
    Leptin in acute stress
    Leptin and the kidney
    Leptin, immune function, and inflammation
    Leptin and bone
    Leptin, cell cycle, and cancer
    Leptin, the autonomic nervous system, and hypertension
    Dynamic leptin secretion in obesity and diabetes
    Leptin therapy of congenital leptin deficiency
    Leptin therapy in people with normal leptin gene
    Leptin therapy in patients with lipodystrophy and syndromic insulin resistance
    Leptin therapy in women with hypothalamic amenorrhea
    Leptin therapy as a substitute for insulin replacement in experimental models of diabetes: Clinical implications in humans
    Novel combinatorial therapies involving leptin: Opportunities for mechanistic advances and therapeutic translation in human diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ben Adler, Editor.
    Summary: This volume covers all aspects of infection by pathogenic Leptospira species, the causative agents of the world?s most widespread zoonosis. Topics include aspects of human and animal leptospirosis as well as detailed analyses of our current knowledge of leptospiral structure and physiology, epidemiology, pathogenesis, genomics, immunity and vaccines. Updates are presented on leptospiral systematics, identification and diagnostics, as well as practical information on culture of Leptospira. Contact information is also provided for Leptospira reference centers. All chapters were written by experts in the field, providing an invaluable reference source for scientists, veterinarians, clinicians and all others with an interest in leptospirosis.

    Contents:
    History of Leptospirosis and Leptospira
    Systematics of Leptospiraceae
    Leptospiral Structure, Physiology and Metabolism
    Genomics, Proteomics and Genetics of Leptospira
    Leptospirosis in Humans
    Animal Leptospirosis
    The Molecular Basis of Leptospiral Pathogenesis
    The Leptospiral Outer Membrane
    Host Response to Leptospira Infection
    Vaccines Against Leptospirosis
    The Role of Leptospirosis Reference Laboratories.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    volume editors, Chih-Wei Yang, Ming-Jeng Pan, Huang-Yu Yang.
    Summary: "In this book, leading experts contribute their cutting-edge clinical and research experiences for the understanding of leptospirosis kidney disease"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Leptospirosis and the kidney : an overview / Srisawat, N., Sitprija, V.
    Pathophysiology of leptospirosis kidney disease / Wu, M.-Y., Wu, M.-S.
    Leptospirosis-associated acute kidney injury / Lin, C.-Y.
    Leptospirosis and chronic kidney disease / Yang, H.-Y., Chang, C.-H., Yang, C.-W.
    Detection and treatment of leptospirosis kidney disease / Chiu, S.-H., Pan, M.-J.
    Innate immunity and kidney injury in leptospirosis / Hung, C.C.
    Leptospirosis and kidney fibrosis / Tian, Y.-C.
    Murine models for leptospirosis kidney disease / Werts, C.
    Zebrafish model for leptospirosis kidney disease / Chang, M.-Y., Cheng, Y.-C.
    Structural and functional biology approaches of leptospirosis kidney disease / Hsu, S.-H., Yang, C.-W.
    Systems biology approach to understanding leptospirosis kidney disease / Chou, L.-F., Yang, C.-W.
    Digital Access Karger 2019
  • Digital
    Kristen Eckstrand, Jesse M. Ehrenfeld, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: The LGBT Population and Health
    1. Understanding the LGBT Community
    2. Access to Care
    3. Culture, Climate, and Advocacy
    4. Internalized Homophobia, Disclosure, and Health
    Part II: The LGBY-Inclusive Clinical Encounter
    5. Clinic and Intake Forms
    6. Medical History
    7. Utilizing the Electronic Health Record as a Tool for Reducing LGBT Health Disparities
    Part III: LGBT Preventative Health and Screening
    8. Primary Care, Prevention, and Coordination of Care
    9. LGBT Parenting
    10. Intimate Partner Violence
    Part IV: LGBT Health in Specialty Medicine
    11. Pediatric and Adolescent LGBT Health
    12. Geriatric Care and the LGBT Older Adult
    13. Adult Mental Health
    14. Sexually Transmitted Infections in LGBT Populations
    15. Dermatology
    16. Urologic Issues in LGBT Health
    17. Obstetric and Gynecologic Care for Individuals Who Are Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender
    Part V: Transgender Health
    18. Interdisciplinary Care of the Transgender Patient
    19. Medical Transition for Transgender Individuals
    20. Surgical Treatments for the Transgender Population
    21. Facial Feminization Surgery: Review of Facial Analysis and Surgical Procedures
    Part VI: Emerging Topics in LGBT Medicine
    22. Immigrant and International LGBT Health
    23. Disorders of Sex Development / Intersex Populations
    24. Legal and Policy Issues
    25. Common LGBT Sexual Health Questions.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Ovid
  • Digital
    Lothar Krienitz.
    Summary: This book provides insights into the fascinating life of the Lesser Flamingo (Phoeniconaias minor) and describes how this enigmatic bird has adapted to the extreme conditions of tropical soda lakes and can even withstand the caustic effects of brine. However, humans are increasingly disrupting the natural cycles of these wetlands, and for these pink birds characteristic of these salt lakes, it is becoming more and more difficult to find suitable habitats, food and breeding grounds. Their fate is considered a cautionary example of man's dealings with nature. Will the Lesser Flamingo survive in a man-made world? Flamingos are considered to be an embodiment of the Phoenix, and the author interweaves his personal experiences with and observations of the flamingos' unusual habitats with the Phoenix motif in order to stimulate reflection on the circle of life. Written in an accessible style that combines science, biological information and the author's own travels and fieldwork, the book also includes a wealth of captivating images. As such, it offers a unique resource for biologists and nature-loving Africa and Asia enthusiasts alike.

    Contents:
    Part I. The Actors
    Chapter 1. The Lesser Flamingo
    Chapter 2. The algae
    Chapter 3. The Firebird Phoenix
    Chapter 4. The Human
    Part II. The Scenes
    Chapter 5. East Africa
    Hub of the Unresting Lesser Flamingo
    Chapter 6. Southern Africa
    Call of the Flamingo Feather
    Chapter 7. India
    Flamingo Bridgework to Asia.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Rakesh K. Chandra, Kevin C. Welch, editors.
    Summary: Despite meticulous attention to details and expert technique, complications resulting from rhinologic procedures can occur doing one's professional career. This book discusses real-life complications and why these unfortunate events occurred, as well as how best to manage the consequent issues. The text also provides thoughtful strategies to prevent such situations going forward. The book is organized as a series of case-based chapters, each illustrating a complication involving the orbit, the skull base, unexpected bleeding, poor healing, or those relating to intraoperative decision making, and how each was managed by the authors. Each chapter begins with bullet points highlighting key clinical pearls illustrated by that particular case. Written by leaders in the field with decades of experience in sino-nasal procedures, the analysis complements expert opinions with evidence-based published literature and shares experiences related to the most current techniques, devices, and instrumentation. Every otolaryngologist practicing rhinologic procedures will appreciate the candid nature of the discussion and will find enrichment in this shared wisdom. Lessons Learned from Rhinologic Procedure Complications: A Case-Based Review serves practitioners of general otolaryngology as well as resident trainees in this field, explaining how best to identify, diagnose, and resolve a complication during rhinology procedures.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: The Orbit
    Chapter 1: Orbital Hematoma
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    References
    Chapter 2: Management of Orbital Hematoma in Endoscopic Sinus Surgery
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    Anatomy of the Orbit and the Anterior Ethmoid Artery
    Intraoperative Management of Anterior Ethmoid Artery Injury
    Summary
    References
    Chapter 3: Extraocular Muscle Injury
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis Lessons Learned
    References
    Chapter 4: Lacrimal Injury During Endoscopic Sinus Surgery: Avoidance and Management
    Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    Avoidance
    Assessment and Management of NLD Injury
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: Orbital Complications: Nasolacrimal Duct Injury After Endoscopic Sinus Surgery
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    References
    Chapter 6: Silent Sinus Syndrome
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    References Chapter 7: Unusual Orbital Complications of Endoscopic Sinus Surgery
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentations
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    References
    Chapter 8: Brown Syndrome Following Endoscopic Modified Lothrop Procedure
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    References
    Part II: The Skull Base
    Chapter 9: Ethmoid CSF Cerebrospinal Fluid Leak
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Avoidance of Intraoperative CSF Leaks
    Management of Intraoperative CSF Leaks
    Lessons Learned
    References Chapter 10: Sphenoid Cerebrospinal Fluid Leak
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 11: Cerebrospinal Fluid Leak and Pneumocephalus after FESS
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    Management of Iatrogenic Cerebrospinal Fluid Leak
    How to Prevent Iatrogenic Skull Base Defects
    References
    Chapter 12: Tension Pneumocephalus
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    References Chapter 13: A Cerebrospinal Fluid Leak Following Endoscopic Resection of a Frontal Sinus Osteoma
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Presentation
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 14: Skull Base Injury and Intracranial Complication from Office Sinus Surgery
    Clinical Pearls
    Case Report
    Root Cause Analysis
    Lessons Learned
    In-Office Management of Sinonasal Disease
    Balloon Sinus Ostial Dilation
    Timely Identification and Repair of Skull Base Injury
    Summary
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kwan Kew Lai, MD, DMD.
    Summary: In 2014 after fighting through yards of bureaucratic red tape, leaving her family, and putting her own health at risk in order to help suffering strangers, Kwan Kew Lai finally arrived in Africa to volunteer as an infectious disease specialist in the heart of the largest Ebola outbreak in history. What she found was not only blistering heat, inadequate working conditions, and deadly, unrelenting illness, but hope, resilience, and incredible courage.
    Digital Access 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
  • Digital
    Gretchen LaSalle.
    Summary: "Engaging, accessible, and filled with practical communication advice, Let's Talk Vaccines helps you educate patients on the importance of life-saving vaccines using a patient-centered and empathetic approach. Covering everything from the science of vaccine safety to the psychology of risk communication, this essential guide includes real-life examples and thoughtful, evidence-based techniques that will help patients understand vaccines and make informed decisions. Ideal for primary care providers, pediatricians, family physicians, nurse practitioners, and public health advocates, it provides an excellent framework for how to approach difficult discussions, with the goal of improving the health of each patient as well as the community at large. Directly addresses the increasing trend of parents choosing not to vaccinate their children, including the history and psychology of the anti-vaccine movement. Examines the issues underlying vaccine hesitancy, answering the common questions and concerns that vaccine-hesitant patients may raise during office visits. Helps you dispel myths and fears that many patients have, with particular attention paid to misinformation and skepticism on social media. Covers the anti-vaccine movement's assertions about autism, autoimmune illnesses and allergies, toxic ingredients, overwhelming the immune system, conspiracies, and more - bringing you up to date with the most common issues and effective approaches to the vaccine discussion. Provides practical tips on approaching the vaccine-hesitant parent and how anti-vaccine patients change their minds, with a focus on remaining a positive partner in your patients' care and finding greater success in your vaccination efforts."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Through the lens of history : a look at vaccine-preventable disease and the origin of vaccines
    What's old is new again : genesis of the anti-vaccine movement
    Psychology of the anti-vaccine movement
    There and back again : how anti-vaxxers change their minds
    Who's minding the shop? Ensuring vaccine safety and efficacy
    Catching flies : approach matters
    A risk worth taking
    The lie that started it all
    Addressing your patients' vaccine doubts : point-counterpoint, part 1
    Vaccine concerns in specific populations : point-counterpoint, part 2
    Influenza and HPV : a closer look at two "Controversial" vaccines, point-counterpoint, part 3
    Vaccine ingredients : what is all that stuff anyway?
    It's a jungle out there : navigating vaccine advice in the news and on the World Wide Web
    Making your clinic a lean, mean, vaccinating machine
    A call to action
    Appendix A. Vaccine-preventable diseases information
    Appendix B. Fast facts about vaccines for patients and clinic staff
    Appendix C. Vaccine topics explained (videos)
    Appendix D. Evaluating graphical data
    Appendix E. Journal articles addressing specific vaccine concerns
    Appendix F. Navigating information on the Internet and social media.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Barbara J. Bain.
    Contents:
    The nature of leukaemia, cytology, cytochemistry and the morphological classification
    Immunophenotyping and cytogenetic/molecular genetic analysis
    Acute myeloid leukaemia, integration of morphological, immunophenotypic and genetic information and the WHO classification
    Acute lymphoblastic leukaemia and acute leukaemia of ambiguous lineage
    The myelodysplastic syndromes and the myelodysplastic/myeloproliferative neoplasms
    Chronic myeloid leukaemias
    Lymphoid leukaemias of mature T, B, and natural killer cells
    Leukaemia diagnosis in resource-poor countries.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    Rich, Marvin A.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC643 .L652
    1
  • Digital
    Haojian Zhang, Shaoguang Li, editors.
    Summary: This book introduces readers to the biology of leukemia stem cells (LSCs) and emphasizes the necessity and importance of targeting LSCs in the treatment of hematopoietic malignancies. It addresses the role of leukemia stem cells in different leukemia diseases and molecular signatures, as well as the metabolic and epigenetic regulation of leukemia stem cell function. With regard to solid tumors, a significant number of blood cancers are believed to be derived from leukemia stem cells (LSCs), which are responsible for disease progression, relapse and drug resistance. Consequently, new therapeutic strategies need to be developed by focusing on the complete eradication of LSCs. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable asset for graduate students and scientists in the fields of cell biology and cancer research etc.

    Contents:
    Role of leukemia stem cells in pathogenesis of hematologic malignancies
    Leukemia stem cells in chronic myeloid leukemia
    Leukmeia stem cells in MLL-rearranged acute myeloid leukemia
    Interaction between leukmeia stem cells and bone marrow environment
    Molecular signatures of leukemia stem cells
    Metabolic regulation of leukemia stem cell function
    Epigenetic regulation of leukmeia stem cell function
    DNA instability and leukemia stem cell function
    Tumor suppressor genes in leukemia stem cells
    Targeting leukemia stem cells
    Leukemia stem cells and drug resistance
    Hypoxia and leukemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor in chief, David E. Elder, MD, CHB, FRCPA, Professor of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania ; associate editors, Rosalie Elenitsas, MD, Director of Dermatology, Director of Dermatopathology, Department of Dermatology, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Misha Rosenbach, MD, Assistant Professor of Dermatology & Internal Medicine, Associate Program Director, Dermatology Residency, Director, Dermatology Inpatient Consult Service, Director Cutaneous Sarcidosis Clinic, Perelman School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, George F. Murphy, MD, Professor of Pathology, Harvard Medical School, Director, Program in Dermatopathology, Department of Pathology, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Adam I. Rubin, MD, Assistant Professor of Dermatology, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, The Children's Hospital, Perelman School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Xiaowei Xu, MD, PhD, Associate Professor, Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Summary: "Lever's Histopathology of the Skin, first published in 1949, is a classic work that has been used by dermatopathologists, pathologists, and dermatologists in their own training, in their current practices, and in the training of students. The organization used in the book is based on Walter Lever's original scheme, which is centered on general attributes of the diseases including pathophysiological and etiological considerations"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2015
  • Print
    Peter Chin-Hong, Elizabeth A. Joyce, Manjiree Karandikar, Mehrdad Matloubian, Luis Alberto Rubio, Brian S. Schwartz, Warren Levinson.
    Summary: "This trusted, popular guide provides a high-yield review of the most important aspects of microbiology and immunology in a concise yet comprehensive style. Levinson's Review of Medical Microbiology and Immunology covers both basic and clinical aspects of bacteriology, virology, mycology, parasitology, and immunology. Important infectious diseases are discussed using an organ system approach. The effective mix of engaging narrative text, color images, tables, figures, Q&As, and clinical vignettes make this an invaluable, proven one-stop guide to mastering the application of microbiology and immunology to infectious diseases. This updated edition reflects the latest research, treatment, and developments, new cases, and more."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part I: Basic bacteriology. Bacteria compared with other microorganisms
    Structure of bacterial cells
    Growth
    Genetics
    Classification of medically important bacteria
    The human microbiome
    Pathogenesis
    Host defenses
    Laboratory diagnosis
    Antibacterial drugs: mechanism of action
    Antibacterial drugs: resistance
    Bacterial vaccines
    Sterilization & disinfection
    Part II: Clinical bacteriology. Overview of the major pathogens & introduction to anaerobic bacteria
    Gram-positive cocci
    Gram-negative cocci
    Gram-positive rods
    Gram-negative rods related to the enteric tract
    Gram-negative rods related to the respiratory tract
    Gram-negative rods related to animal sources (zoonotic organisms)
    Mycobacteria
    Actinomycetes
    Mycoplasmas
    Spirochetes
    Chlamydiae
    Rickettsiae
    Minor bacterial pathogens
    Part III: Basic virology. Introduction
    Structure
    Replication
    Genetics & gene therapy
    Classification of medically important viruses
    Pathogenesis
    Host defenses
    Laboratory diagnosis
    Antiviral drugs
    Viral vaccines
    Part IV: Clinical virology. Introduction
    Herpesviruses, poxviruses, & human papilloma virus
    Respiratory viruses
    Important childhood viruses
    Viruses that infect the enteric tract
    Hepatitis viruses
    Arboviruses, rabies virus, & Ebola virus
    Tumor viruses
    Slow viruses & prions
    Human immunodeficiency virus
    Minor viral pathogens
    Part V: Mycology. Basic mycology
    Cutaneous & subcutaneous mycoses
    Systemic mycoses
    Opportunistic mycoses
    Part VI: Parasitology. Introduction
    Intestinal & urogenital: protozoa
    Blood & tissue protozoa
    Minor protozoan pathogens
    Cestodes
    Trematodes
    Nematodes
    Part VII: Immunology. Overview of immunity
    Innate immunity
    Adaptive immunity: lymphocyte antigen receptors
    Adaptive immunity: T-cell-mediated immunity
    Adaptive immunity: B cells & antibodies
    Major histocompatibility complex & transplantation
    Complement
    Antigen-antibody reactions in the laboratory
    Hypersensitivity (allergy)
    Tolerance & autoimmune disease
    Tumor immunity
    Immunodeficiency
    Part VIII: Ectoparasites. Ectoparasites that cause human disease
    Part IX: Infectious diseases. Bone & joint infections
    Cardiac infections
    Central nervous system infections
    Gastrointestinal tract infections
    Pelvic infections
    Upper respiratory tract infections
    Lower respiratory tract infections
    Infections of the skin & skin structures
    Urinary tract infections
    Sepsis & septic shock
    Eye infections
    Part X: Brief summaries of medically important organisms
    Part XI: Clinical cases
    Part XII: Pearls for the USMLE
    Part XIII: USMLE (National Board) practice questions
    Part XIV: USMLE (National Board) practice examination.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine Study Tools
  • Digital
    Susan H. Fox, Jonathan M. Brotchie, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide a single reference source on levodopa-induced dyskinesias (LID) from ?bench to bedside?. Initial chapters review the clinical features and phenomenology of LID with video examples; epidemiology and genetic risk factors for LID are covered as a background to understanding risk factors for developing LID. The following chapters cover the latest preclinical studies aiming to understand the pathophysiology of LID at the cellular, neurochemical, neurophysiological and circuitry level with detailed discussion of mechanisms and future directions to take the field forward; clinical studies from phase II to phase IV; ongoing RCTs in LID; and evidence-based medicine reviews of treatment options. Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia in Parkinson?s Disease is aimed at an international audience of movement disorder neurologists; neuroscientists; trainees; and graduate and post-graduate students.

    Contents:
    Phenomenology of Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Dyskinesia Rating Scales in Parkinson's Disease
    Epidemiology of Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Risk Factors for Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Pharmacological Treatment Options for Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Surgical Options for Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia in Parkinson?s Disease
    Basal Ganglia Circuitry Models of L-DOPA-Induced Dyskinesia
    Basal Ganglia Circuitry Models of L-DOPA-Induced Dyskinesia
    Pharmacological Properties of Levodopa
    Dopamine Receptors and LID
    The Serotonergic System In Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    The Opioid System in Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Glutamate Receptors and Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Cannabinoids and Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    The Role of the Noradrenergic System and its Receptors In Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Involvement of the Cholinergic System in Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    New Clinical Trials for Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Preclinical Models of Levodopa-Induced Dyskinesia
    Final Thoughts: Summary and Future Therapeutic Strategies in LID.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Jocelyn E. Krebs, University of Alaska, Anchorage, Elliott S. Goldstein, Arizona State University, Stephen T. Kilpatrick, University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown.
    Summary: Long considered the quintessential molecular biology textbook, for decades Lewin's Genes has provided the most modern presentation to this transformative and dynamic science. Now in its twelfth edition, this classic text continues to lead with new information and cutting-edge developments, covering gene structure, sequencing, organization, and expression. Leading scientists provide revisions and updates in their respective areas of study offering readers current research and relevant information on the rapidly changing subjects in molecular biology. No other text offers a broader understanding of this exciting and vital science or does so with higher quality art and illustrations. Lewin's Genes XII continues to be the clear choice for molecular biology and genetics.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QH430 .L487 2018
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Andrés Martin, Michael H. Bloch, Fred R. Volkmar.
    Contents:
    SECTION I. AN APPROACH TO THE DISCIPLINE
    1.1 The Art of the Science: A Child, Family and Systems-Centered Approach / Kyle D. Pruett
    1.2 Ethics / Adrian Sondheimer
    1.3 A History of Child Psychaitry / Deborah Blythe Doroshow
    1.4 Education and Training / Dorothy E. Stubbe and Eugene V. Beresin
    1.5 Global Child and Adolescent Mental Health / Myron L. Belfer, Hesham M. Hamoda, and Maurice Eisenbruch
    1.6 Child and Family Policy: a Role for Child Psychiatry and Allied Disciplines / Walter S. Gilliam, Matia Finn-Stevenson, Liane Taylor, and Edward F. Zigler
    1.7 Money Matters: Funding Care / Martin Knapp, David McDaid, and Emma Wilson. SECTION II. A DEVELOPMENTAL FRAMEWORK
    2.1 Normal Development
    2.1.1 The Infant and Toddler / Linda C. Mayes, Walter S. Gilliam, and Laura Stout Sosinsky
    2.1.2 The Preschool Child / Laura Stout Sosinsky, Walter S. Gilliam, and Linda C. Mayes
    2.1.3. Development of School-Age Children / Lee Combrinck-Graham and Geraldine S. Fox
    2.1.4 Adoescence / Robert A. King and Helena J. V. Rutherford
    2.2 DIVERSE POPULATIONS
    2.2.1 Cultural Child and Adolescent Psychiatry / G. Pirooz Sholevar and Shashank V. Joshi
    2.2.2 Psychiatric Care of the Deaf, Blind, or Deaf-Blind Child / Karen A. Goldberg and Jana K. Dreyzehner
    2.2.3 Sexual Minority Youth: Identity, Role, and Orientation / Cynthia J. Tellingator, Eric N. Boyum, and Peter T. Daniolos
    2.3 Developmental Psychopathology / Suniya S. Luthar. SECTION III. A DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORK
    3.1 Research Methodology
    3.1.1. Understanding Research Methods and Statistics: a Primer for Clinicians / George A. Morgan, Jeffrey A. Gliner, and Robert J. Harmon
    3.1.2 Evidence-Based Practice as a Conceptual Framework / John Hamilton
    3.1.3 Respect for Children as Research Subjects / Robert J. Levine
    3.2. Epidemiology / Eric Fombonne
    3.2.2 Health Promotion and Prevention in Child and Adolescent Psychiatry / Kerry O'Loughlin, Robert R. Althoff, and James J. Hudziak
    3.3 Neurobiology and Genetics
    3.3.1. From Genes to Brain: Developmental Neurobiology / Hanna E. Stevens, James F. Leckman, Paul J. Lombroso, and Flora M. Vaccarino
    3.3.2. Assessing Risk: Gene Discovery / Thomas V. Fernandez, Abha R. Gupta, and Ellen J. Hoffman
    3.3.3 Molecular Basis of Select Childhood Psychiatric Disorders / Simone Tomasi , Jessica B. Lennington, James F. Leckman, and Paul J. Lombroso. SECTION IV. CLINICAL ASSESSMENT AND NOSOLOGY
    SECTION V. SPECIFIC DISORDERS AND SYNDROMES
    SECTION VI. TREATMENT
    SECTION VII. INTERFACE AREAS OF CHILD AND ADOLESCENT PSYCHIATRY
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Print
    von Josef Maherhöfer.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    Q121 .L49
    1
  • Digital
    K. Bryant Smalley, Jacob C. Warren, K. Nikki Barefoot, editors.
    Contents:
    Gender and sexual minority health : history, current state, and terminology / K. Bryant Smalley, Jacob C. Warren, and K. Nikki Barefoot
    Sociocultural and systemic barriers to health for gender and sexual minority populations / Zachary McClain, Rosemary Thomas, and Baligh Yehia
    Health risk behaviors in the gender and sexual minority population / Nathaniel Kralik and Daniel Skinner
    Obesity in gender and sexual minority groups / Tyler B. Mason, Robin J. Lewis, and Kristin Heron
    Cancer in gender and sexual minority groups / Gwendolyn P. Quinn, Janella N. Hudson, Michelle T. Aihe, Lauren E. Wilson, and Matthew B. Schabath
    Chronic illnesses and conditions in gender and sexual minority individuals / Jane A. McElroy and Maria T Brown
    Reproductive health and parenting in gender and sexual minority populations / K. Nikki Barefoot, K. Bryant Smalley, and Jacob C. Warren
    Intimate partner violence among gender and sexual minority groups / Rita M. Melendez and Jillian Salazar
    The needs of gender and sexual minority persons living with disabilities / Franco Dispenza, Tameeka Hunter, and Asha Kumar
    The mental health of gender and sexual minority groups in context / Tracy J. Cohn, Stephen P. Casazza, and Elizabeth M. Cottrell
    Suicide and self-injury in gender and sexual minority populations / Kimberly H.M. O'Brien, Richard T. Liu, Jennifer M. Putney, Taylor A. Burke, and Laika D. Aguinaldo. Substance use among gender and sexual minority youth and adults / Genevieve Weber and Ashby Dodge
    HIV and other sexually transmitted infections within the gender and sexual minority community / Keith J. Horvath, Nicholas Yared, Sara Lammert, Alan Lifson, and Shalini Kulasingam
    Gender minority health : affirmative care for the community / Lore M. Dickey and Colt Keo-Meier
    The health of racial and ethnic minority gender and sexual minority populations / Jacob C. Warren, K. Bryant Smalley, and K. Nikki Barefoot
    Bisexual health / Jacob C. Warren, K. Bryant Smalley, and K. Nikki Barefoot
    Advances in research with gender and sexual minority youth in the 21st century / Nicholas C. Heck, Lucas A. Mirabito, and Juan P. Zapata
    Rural gender and sexual minority health / K. Bryant Smalley, Jacob C. Warren, Amanda Rickard, and K. Nikki Barefoot
    Gender and sexual minority military personnel and veterans / Nicholas Grant and Jeri Muse
    Aging, resilience, and health in gender and sexual minority populations / Lake Dziengel and K. Abel Knochel
    Evidence-based approaches to improving gender and sexual minority health by reducing minority stress / Melvin C. Hampton and John E. Pachankis
    Recommendations for practitioners for providing competent care to gender and sexual minority individuals / Matthew R. Capriotti and Annesa Flentje
    Future directions in gender and sexual minority health research / K. Bryant Smalley, Jacob C. Warren, and K. Nikki Barefoot.
  • Digital
    Michele J. Eliason, Peggy L. Chinn.
    Summary: Drawn from real-world experience and current research, the fully updated LGBTQ Cultures, 3rd Edition paves the way for healthcare professionals to provide well-informed, culturally sensitive healthcare to lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender, and queer (LGBTQ) patients. vital guide fills the LGBTQ awareness gaps, including replacing myths and stereotypes with facts, and measuring the effects of social stigma on health. Vital for all nursing specialties, this is the seminal guide to actively providing appropriate, culturally sensitive care to persons of all sexual orientations and gender identities. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Overview and theoretical framework
    What's in a word? concepts related to sex/gender and sexuality
    The deadly effects of stigma
    Myths and facts about sexual orientation and gender identity
    Developmental transitions
    Cultures within cultures : diversity and LGBTQ communities
    The effects of stigma on health
    Substance abuse and mental health
    Physical health disorders
    Provider attitudes and knowledge
    LGBTQ healthcare professionals
    Structural barriers to quality care
    Conclusions and a call to action.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Ron Stall, Brian Dodge, José A. Bauermeister, Tonia Poteat, Chris Beyrer.
    Summary: Over the last 30 years, the health needs of lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender, and queer Americans have become increasingly recognized, in particular for the ways in which they are distinct from those typically assessed and addressed in society. Universities and researchers are paying greater attention to LGBTQ public health issues and how they might adapt existing methods to research marginalized communities, but until now there has been no authoritative resource to guide their education or practice. Developed for graduate students in public health and health sciences but perfect for anyone interested in this topic. This book will fill that gap and provide the necessary public health tools to teach about and study LGBTQ populations effectively. Divided into three sections and edited by top scholars, LGBTQ Health Research explains research methods important to descriptive epidemiology that are needed to document health disparities among LGBTQ populations. The book also examines research methods that help explain the driving forces of these disparities. Focusing on real-world experience in developing and testing interventions to mitigate health disparities in LGBTQ populations, it also breaks down issues that challenge the direct application of standard research methods with these communities, including those related to sampling, measurement, choice of theoretical variables to explain the distribution of health and illness, cultural competence in intervention design, and community participation. Promoting the creation and diffusion of effective interventions, the book takes a holistic approach to address longstanding research gaps regarding important marginalized communities. It also documents profound health disparities in many LBGTQ populations across a wide range of health conditions and explains why future development of the field must be based on inclusive science and rigorous research methods. LGBTQ Health Research is an essential textbook for any courses that deal with the intersection of marginalization, health, sexuality, and gender. -- Provided by publisher. "This edited collection is a course book intended for graduate students of public health or health sciences who want to learn research methods for studying the health of LGBTQ populations. The book is divided into three sections and is edited by top scholars in the field. The book will fill a niche that no existing course book occupies"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Human Rights and LGBTQ Health : Inseparable Challenges / Chris Beyrer
    Global Health/LGBTQ Health / Tonia Poteat and Shauna Stahlman
    A Love Note to Future Generations of LGBTQ Health Researchers / Ron Stall, Chris Beyrer, Tonia Poteat, Brian Dodge, and José Bauermeister
    Straight, That Is Not Gay or Lesbian / Randall Sell and Kerith Conron
    Sampling Considerations for LGBTQ Health Research / Christopher Owens, Ron Stall, and Brian Dodge
    Theory as a Practical Tool in Research and Intervention / Ilan H. Meyer, with the Generations Study Investigators
    Creating and Adapting LGBTQ-Specific Measures to Explain Disparities / Joshua Rosenberger
    Multi-Level Approaches to Understanding LGBTQ Health Disparities / Mark L. Hatzenbuehler
    Social Network Approaches to HIV Prevention and Care / Carl Latkin and Karin Tobin
    Why Focus on Gay Couples in HIV Prevention Research? / Colleen Hoff
    Engaging Populations in LGBTQ Health Interventions / Rob Stephenson and Erin Riley
    Finding the Right Approach for Interventions with LGBTQ Populations / Stephen L. Forssell, Peter Gamache, and Rita Dwan
    Program Development Considerations for LGBTQ Health Interventions / José A. Bauermeister, Ryan C. Tingler, and Gary W. Harper
    From Discovery to Application : Challenges in Effectiveness and Implementation Research for the Promotion of LGBTQ Health and Wellness / Robin Lin Miller and Angulique Y. Outlaw
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
  • Digital
    guest editors, Michelle Forcier, Joanna D. Brown, Robert T. Brown.
    Contents:
    Primary care for lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender, and questioning youth
    Mental health and well-being of transgender youth : clinical considerations
    Sexually transmitted infections in lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender, and questioning youth
    Substance involvement in sexual and gender minority youth
    Hot topics and fresh paradigms in gender, diversity, and care
    Medical management updates for gender minority youth and difficult cases
    Surgical options in transgender youth
    Transgender youth, medical professionals, and the law : what you should know
    Partnering with schools, sports teams, religious organizations, and other community-based organizations
    The impact of narrative medicine on gender care : learning to "see: our patients stories
    Looking to the future for LGBTQ youth.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2018
  • Print
    Chittell, Edith; Mitchell, Margaret; Sutcliffe, John Hamer.
    Contents:
    [v. 1] Library and museum catalogue / compiled and edited by John H. Sutcliffe ; assisted by Margaret Mitchell, Edith Chittell. 1932
    v. 2. Library and museum catalogue / compiled and edited by John H. Sutcliffe. 1935
    v. 3. British Optical Association Library catalogue / compiled and edited by Margaret Mitchell. 1957.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    RE941 .B86
    2
  • Digital
    Branislav Ranković, editor.
    Summary: This revised and extended edition provides in-depth insights into the benefits and untapped potential of lichen-derived bioactive compounds. The whole spectrum of these compounds' biological and medical functions, from antibiotic to antiviral and anti-carcinogenic properties, is presented. In addition, a new chapter discusses the anti-neurodegenerative and anti-diabetic activities of lichenic secondary metabolites. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable asset for students and researchers in this field.

    Contents:
    Lichens as a potential source of bioactive secondary metabolites
    Lichens used in traditional medicine
    Lichen secondary metabolites as potential antibiotic agents
    Studies on antioxidant properties of lichen secondary metabolites
    Investigations of lichen secondary metabolites with potential anticancer activity
    Antigenotoxic effect of some lichen metabolites
    Lichen secondary metabolites as possible antiviral agents
    Future directions in the study of pharmaceutical potential of lichens.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Marshall A. Lichtman, M.D., Jean A. Shafer, M.S., Raymond E. Felgar, M.D. Ph.D., Nancy Wang, Ph.D.
    Contents:
    Part I. Red cells
    Part II. White cells
    Part III. Microorganisms
    Part IV. Platelets
    Part V. Marrow
    Part VI. Clonal myeloid diseases
    Part VII. Lymphomas, lymphoid leukemias, and myelomas
    Part VIII. Cytogenetic patterns
    Part IX. Flow cytometric patterns
    Part X. Cytochemistry and immunostains
    Part XI. External manifestations.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessHemOnc
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Claire A. Kirchhoff.
    Summary: This book addresses how skeletons can inform us about behavior by describing skeletal lesions in the Gombe chimpanzees, relating them to known life histories whenever possible, and analyzing demographic patterns in the sample. This is of particular interest to both primatologists and skeletal analysts who have benefited from published data on a smaller, earlier skeletal sample from Gombe. The Gombe skeletal collection is the largest collection of wild chimpanzees with known life histories in existence, and this work significantly expands the skeletal sample from this long-term research site (49 chimpanzees). The book explores topics of general interest to skeletal analysts such as demographic patterns, which injuries leave signs on the skeleton, and rates of healing, and discusses both qualitative and quantitative analysis of the patterning of lesions. The book presents the data in a narrative style similar to that employed in Dr. Goodall's seminal work The Chimpanzees of Gombe. Readers already familiar with the Gombe chimpanzees are likely to appreciate summaries of life events correlated to observable skeletal features. The book is especially relevant at this time to remind primate conservationists of the importance of the isolated chimpanzee population at Gombe National Park as well as the availability of the skeletons for study, both within the park itself as well as at the University of Minnesota.

    Contents:
    1. The Gombe skeletal sample and case studies
    2. Analysis of skeletal lesions
    3. Discussion.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rina Meidan, editor.
    Summary: This book describes the life cycle of a unique endocrine gland that is absolutely essential for the establishment and maintenance of pregnancy in all mammalian species. The corpus luteum is unique because it is formed and destroyed every (non-fertile) reproductive cycle. When fertilization occurs, the corpus luteum is rescued or maintained. The processes that control corpus luteum formation, demise (luteolysis), or maintenance are just beginning to be unraveled in recent years; they involve diverse cell types and mechanisms. Some of these processes resemble tumor development--angiogenesis, for instance--but interestingly enough, this resemblance is only up to a point. The corpus luteum uses mechanisms that allow its normal, physiological growth and disappearance. Pulling together key research on the corpus luteum, this volume is of interest to both reproductive endocrinologists and comparative physiologists, with clinical relevance spanning comparative animal studies to women's health.

    Contents:
    Luteal Angiogenesis
    Roles of Hypoxia in Corpus Luteum Formation
    Luteal Steroidogenesis
    Lipid Droplets and Metabolic Pathways Regulate Steroidogenesis in the Corpus Luteum
    Steroid Hormone Receptors in the Corpus Luteum
    Immune Cells and their Effects on the Bovine Corpus Luteum
    The Rodent Corpus Luteum
    Regulation of corpus luteum function in the domestic dog (Canis familiaris) and comparative aspects of luteal function in the domestic cat (Felis catus)
    Luteolysis in Ruminants: Past Concepts, New Insights, and Persisting Challenges
    Corpus Luteum Rescue in Nonhuman Primates and Women
    Corpus Luteum and Early Pregnancy in Ruminants
    Corpus Luteum Regression and Early Pregnancy Maintenance in Pigs
    The Corpus Luteum and Women's Health.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    poem by Maya Angelou ; paintings by Jean-Michel Basquiat ; edited by Sara Jane Boyers.
    Summary: Presents Maya Angelou's poem illustrated by paintings and drawings of jean-Michel Basquiat. Features biographies of both the author and the artist. "Maya Angelou's brave, defiant poem celebrates the courage within each of us, young and old. From the scary thought of panthers in the park to the unsettling scene of a new classroom, fearsome images are summoned and dispelled by the power of faith in ourselves. Angelou's strong verse is matched by the daring vision of artist Jean-Michel Basquiat, whose childlike style reveals the powerful emotions and fanciful imaginings of youth. Together, Angelou's words and Basquiat's paintings create a place where every child--indeed every person--may experience his or her own fearlessness"-- Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3551.N464 L54 2018
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Guido di Prisco, National Research Council of Italy, Howell G.M. Edwards, University of Bradford, Josef Elster, University of South Bohemia, Czech Republic, Ad H.L. Huiskes, Royal Netherlands Institute of Sea Research.
    Summary: "From deep ocean trenches and the geographical poles to outer space, organisms can be found living in remarkably extreme conditions. This book provides a captivating account of these systems and their extraordinary inhabitants, 'extremophiles'. A diverse, multidisciplinary group of experts discuss responses and adaptations to change; biodiversity, bioenergetic processes, and biotic and abiotic interactions; polar environments; and life and habitability, including searching for biosignatures in the extraterrestrial environment. The editors emphasize that understanding these systems is important for increasing our knowledge and utilizing their potential, but this remains an understudied area. Given the threat to these environments and their biota caused by climate change and human impact, this timely book also addresses the urgency to document these systems. It will help graduate students and researchers in conservation, marine biology, evolutionary biology, environmental change and astrobiology better understand how life exists in these environments and their susceptibility or resilience to change"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Carl Zimmer.
    Summary: "We all assume we know what life is, but the more scientists learn about the living world-from protocells to brains, from zygotes to pandemic viruses-the harder they find it is to locate life's edge"-- Provided by publisher. What is life? The power seems obvious until you try to seriously answer it. Zimmer journeys through experiments that have attempted to recreate life; shows how coronaviruses have altered the course of history; and even tries his own had at evolving life in a test tube... with unnerving results. -- adapted from jacket

    Contents:
    Introduction: The borderland
    The quickening. The way the spirit comes to the bones ; Death is resisted
    The hallmarks. Dinner ; Decisive matter ; Preserving constant the conditions of life ; Copy/Paste ; Darwin's lung
    A series of dark questions. This astonishing multiplication ; Irritations ; The sect ; This mud was actually alive ; A play of water ; Scripts
    Return to the borderland. Half life ; Data needed for a blueprint ; No obvious bushes ; Four blue droplets.
    Digital Access 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
  • Digital
    Enkui Duan, Mian Long, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the life science experiments in a space microgravity environment conducted on board the SJ-10 recoverable satellite, which was launched on April 6th 2016 and recovered on April 18th 2016. It covers 10 scientific projects in radiation biology, gravitational biology and biotechnology that were selected from ~100 proposals from various institutions in China and around the world. Primarily exploring the rhythm of life in a space microgravity environment, all of the experiments - conducted on nine payloads of the SJ-10 satellite - have never been previously conducted in the respective fields. In addition, the book provides extensive information on the missions execution, data collection, and scientific outcomes.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Life Sciences experiments operated in SJ-10 Recoverable Satellite
    Space Radiation Systems Biology Research in SJ-10 satellite
    Effect of space environment on genome stability
    Effects of space environment on silkworm development and gene mutation
    Effects of Gravity on Growth of Plant Cells
    Flowering in space
    Cell growth and mass transportation under microgravity
    The maintaining and directed differentiation of hematopoietic stem cells under microgravity
    Three-dimensional cell culture and tissue restoration of neural stem cells under microgravity
    Advances of mammalian reproduction and embryonic development under microgravity
    Osteogenic differentiation of human mesenchymal stem cells and its molecular mechanism in microgravity
    Facilities and techniques of space life science
    Medulloculture payload, radiation gene payload and comprehensive control payload.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Maureen McMichael, Ryan Fries.
    Summary: "Life-Threatening Cardiac Emergencies for the Small Animal Practitioner offers a quick reference to recognizing and treating common cardiac arrhythmias and emergent cardiac conditions in canine and feline patients. Designed for fast access during an emergency, the book provides ECGs, radiographs, and echocardiograms for easy comparison in the clinic alongside clear instructions for emergency treatment. This practical resource streamlines the process of treating emergent cardiac patients, putting the most clinically relevant information about cardiac emergencies and drugs at the clinician's fingertips. Information is logically organized by heart rate and condition, making it easy to look up and apply information. Life-Threatening Cardiac Emergencies for the Small Animal Practitioner is a useful patient-side resource for general practitioners, emergency vets, and veterinary students"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Emily Rose, editor.
    Summary: This book is a visually focused and clinically relevant volume detailing pearls and practical points regarding acute life-threatening rashes. Each chapter covers life-threatening causes of rash or their significant mimics, including Steven Johnson Syndrome, Kawasaki Disease, and HIV. The authors discuss the classic presentation of rashes along with associated symptoms. Additionally, they examine atypical presentations of the rash and key physical exam findings to confirm or exclude the life-threatening diagnosis. The chapters are highly visual with multiple color photos as well as tables to aid the clinician in differentiating between other mimicking conditions and causes of rashes. Coverage continues beyond diagnosis to include management and potential complications. Each chapter concludes with clinical pearls or take-away points that clinicians can easily memorize for quick decision making. This is an ideal reference for all clinicians who encounter patients with rashes, particularly emergency medicine providers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jeffrey I. Mechanick, Robert F. Kushner, editors.
    Contents:
    Why Lifestyle Medicine?.- The importance of Healthy Living and Defining Lifestyle Medicine
    Communication and Behavioral Change Tools: A Primer for Lifestyle Medicine Counseling
    Paradigms of Lifestyle Medicine and Wellness.- Composite Risk Scores.- Clinical Assessment of Lifestyle and Behavioral Factors During Weight Loss Treatment.- Anthropometrics and Body Composition.- Physical Activity Measures.- Metabolic Profiles
    Based on the 2013 Prevention Guidelines.- The Chronic Care Model and the Transformation of Primary Care
    Guidelines for Healthy Eating.- A Review of Commercial and Proprietary Weight Loss Programs
    Physical Activity Programs.- Behavior Modification and Cognitive Therapy.- Treating Tobacco Use in Clinical Practice.- Alcohol Use and Management
    Sleep Management.- Integrative Medicine.- Transcultural Applications to Lifestyle Medicine.- Community Engagement and Networks: Leveraging Partnerships to Improve Lifestyle
    Lifestyle Therapy as Medicine for the Treatment of Obesity.- Lifestyle Therapy for Diabetes Mellitus
    Lifestyle Therapy in the Management of Cardiometabolic Risk: Diabetes Prevention, Hypertension, and Dyslipidemia.- Cancer.- LIFESTYLE MEDICINE FOR THE PREVENTION AND TREATMENT OF DEPRESSION.- Promoting Healthy Lifestyle Behaviors in Patients with Persistent Pain.- Forestalling Age-Related Brain Disorders.- Chronic Kidney Disease.- Non-alcoholic fatty liver disease and steatohepatitis
    Gastroenterology Disease and Lifestyle Medicine.- Lifestyle Medicine and Chronic Pulmonary Disease
    Lifestyle Medicine and HIV-infected patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Garry Egger, Andrew Binns, Stephan Rössner, Michael Sagner.
    Summary: Introductions to the role of lifestyle factors in medicine / Garry Egger, Andrew Binns, Stephan Rössner and Michael Sagner -- The epidemiology of chronic disease / Maximillian de Courten, Barbora de Courten, Garry Egger and Michael Sagner -- A "germ theory" approach for lifestyle medicine / Garry Egger -- structure for lifestyle medicine / Garry Egger, Michael Sagner, Hamish Meldrum, David Katz and Rob Lawson -- Everything you wanted to know about motivation (but weren't intrinsically motivated enough to ask) / John Litt, Rosanne Coutts and Garry Egger -- Self-management in lifestyle medicine / Malcolm Battersby, Garry Egger and John Litt -- Overweight and obesity / Stephan Rössner, Garry Egger, Andrew Binns and Michael Sagner -- Nutrition for the nondietician / Joanna McMillan Price and Garry Egger -- Fluids, fitness and fatness / Garry Egger and Suzanne Pearson -- Behavioral aspects of nutrition / Neil King and Garry Egger -- Physical activity / Mike Climstein and Garry Egger -- Physical activity / Mike Climstein and Garry Egger -- Stress / Gary Egger and Robert Reznick -- Dealing with worry and anxiety / Andrew Binns, Garry Egger and Robert Reznick -- Depression / Robert Reznick, Andrew Binns and Garry Egger -- Happiness and mental health / Julia Anwar-McHenry, Rob Donovan and Garry Egger -- Technology-induced pathology / John Stevens and Garry Egger -- To sleep, perchance to ... get everything else right / Caroline West and Garry Egger -- Health and the environment / Garry Egger, Andrew Binns and Stephan Rössner -- Meaningless, alienation and loss of culture/identity (MAL) as determinants of chronic disease / John Stevens, Andrew Binns, Bob Morgan and Garry Egger -- Preventing and managing injury at the clinical level / Kevin Wolfenden and Garry Egger - Rethinking chronic pain in a lifestyle medicine context / Chris Hayes, Caroline West and Garry Egger -- Understanding addictions / John Litt and Caroline West -- Medicines / Julian Henwood, Stephan Rössner and Andrew Binns -- Relationships, social inequity and distal factors in lifestyle medicine / Garry Egger, Andrew Binns, Stephan Rössner and Maximillian De Couten -- Sex and lifestyle / Michael Gillman and Garry Egger -- Lifestyle and oral health / Bernadette Drummond and Garry Egger -- Lifestyle and environmental influences on skin / Hugh Molloy and Garry Egger -- Lifestyle-related aspects of gastrointestinal health / Ross Hansen -- The next chapter / Michael Sagner, Amy McNeil and Ross Arena.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Print
    Patricia Hruby Powell, R. Gregory Christie.
    Summary: "A picture book about the life of civil rights activist Ella Baker"--Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E185.97.B214 P68 2020
    1
  • Print
    Vaughn A. Booker.
    Summary: "Explores the role of jazz celebrities like Ella Fitzgerald, Cab Calloway, Duke Ellington, and Mary Lou Williams as representatives of African American religion in the twentieth century. Beginning in the 1920s, the Jazz Age propelled Black swing artists into national celebrity. Many took on the role of race representatives, and were able to leverage their popularity toward achieving social progress for other African Americans. In Lift Every Voice and Swing, Vaughn A. Booker argues that with the emergence of these popular jazz figures, who came from a culture shaped by Black Protestantism, religious authority for African Americans found a place and spokespeople outside of traditional Afro-Protestant institutions and religious life. Popular Black jazz professionals--such as Ella Fitzgerald, Cab Calloway, Duke Ellington, and Mary Lou Williams--inherited religious authority though they were not official religious leaders. Some of these artists put forward a religious culture in the mid-twentieth century by releasing religious recordings and putting on religious concerts, and their work came to be seen as integral to the Black religious ethos. Booker documents this transformative era in religious expression, in which jazz musicians embodied religious beliefs and practices that echoed and diverged from the predominant African American religious culture. He draws on the heretofore unexamined private religious writings of Duke Ellington and Mary Lou Williams, and showcases the careers of female jazz artists alongside those of men, expanding our understanding of African American religious expression and decentering the Black church as the sole concept for understanding Black Protestant religiosity"--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I. Representations of religion and race. "Jazzing religion" ; "Get happy, all you sinners" ; "Tears of joy" ; "Royal ancestry"
    Part II. Missions and legacies. God's messenger boy ; "Is God a three-letter word for love?" ; Jazz communion ; Accounting for the vulnerable ; Virtuoso ancestors
    Conclusion: Black artistry and religious culture.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    ML3918.J39 B65 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Pieter D'Hooghe, Kenneth J. Hunt, Jeremy J. McCormick, editors.
    Summary: Aimed at sports medicine and foot and ankle clinicians globally who see and treat ligamentous injuries to the foot and ankle, the focus of this comprehensive text is on cutting-edge techniques in both non-surgical and surgical treatment, rehabilitation, and safe and expeditious return to sport. Techniques and technology move very rapidly in this space, and this book serves as a ready resource on current surgical and rehabilitation techniques for these conditions. Opening with a review of the relevant anatomy and biomechanics of the foot and ankle, as well as current imaging techniques, the text then turns to the diagnosis, management and rehabilitation of specific ligamentous injuries and conditions. Multiple management techniques are presented for lateral ankle sprains and instability, syndesmotic injuries, deltoid and spring ligament injuries, Lisfranc injuries, and plantar plate and sesamoid injuries. Generous clinical photographs and illustrations highlight current techniques and diagnostic algorithms, and selected chapter-associated video segments are included, demonstrating surgical and rehabilitation techniques and equipment. Written and edited by experts in the field who routinely manage these injuries using the most effective techniques, Ligamentous Injuries of the Foot and Ankle is a terrific resource for orthopedic and sports medicine clinicians and rehabilitation providers at all levels.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword: Land of Ligaments Text
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: Introduction
    Biology of Ligament Healing
    Treatment Decision-Making
    The Role of the Orthopedic Surgeon
    The Role of the Physical Therapist
    References
    2: Anatomy and Biomechanics of the Foot and Ankle
    Introduction
    Distal Tibiofibular Syndesmosis
    Lateral Collateral Ligaments of the Ankle
    Medial Collateral Ligaments of the Ankle
    Subtalar Joint Ligaments
    Chopart Joint Ligamentous Complex
    Lisfranc Ligamentous Complex
    References 3: Imaging of Ligamentous Injuries in the Foot and Ankle
    Introduction
    Imaging Modalities
    Conventional Radiography
    Computed Tomography (CT)
    Ultrasound
    Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI)
    MR Arthrogram (MRA) (Fig. 3.3)
    Ankle
    Imaging Anatomy of the Ankle Ligaments
    Syndesmotic Ligaments
    Lateral Ankle Ligaments
    Medial Ankle Ligaments
    Imaging Findings of Ligamentous Injury to the Ankle
    Syndesmotic Injuries
    Lateral Ankle Ligamentous Injuries
    Medial Ankle Ligamentous Injuries
    Foot
    Imaging Anatomy of the Foot Ligaments
    Lisfranc Joint Complex Plantar Plate
    Imaging Findings of Ligamentous Injury of the Foot
    Lisfranc Joint Complex
    Plantar Plate
    Conclusion
    References
    4: Alignment and Instability: Managing Mechanical Contributors to Recurrent Ligament Injury and Instability
    Introduction
    Biomechanical Evaluation of the Foot and Ankle
    Physical Examination
    Imaging Studies
    Nonoperative Management
    Indications for Surgical Management
    Operative Technique
    Outcomes
    Conclusion
    References
    5: Rehabilitating the Elite Athlete with Ligamentous Injury of the Foot and Ankle
    References 6: Lateral Ankle Sprains: Injury Epidemiology and Nonoperative Treatment
    Introduction
    Overview and Incidence of Acute Ankle Sprains in the General Population
    Incidence of Acute Ankle Sprains in the Athletic Population
    Epidemiology of Ankle Sprain Reinjury Risk
    Epidemiology Related to Chronic Ankle Sprains
    Injury Prevention
    Nonoperative Management of Acute Ankle Sprains
    Conclusion
    References
    7: Lateral Ankle Sprains: Subtalar Instability
    Introduction
    Etiology of Subtalar Joint Instability
    Acute Subtalar Dislocation Clinical Assessment of Subtalar Instability
    Radiographic Assessment of Subtalar Joint Instability
    Conservative Treatment of SJI
    Operative Treatment of Subtalar Joint Instability
    Conclusions
    References
    8: Lateral Ankle Instability: The Modified Brostrom
    Introduction
    Diagnosis
    Management
    Modified Brostrom Surgical Technique
    Rehabilitation
    References
    9: Lateral Ankle Instability: Arthroscopic Broström and Minimally Invasive Techniques
    Introduction
    Arthroscopy in Lateral Ligament Repair
    Lateral Ligamentous Complex Anatomy
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editor, Tim Storr.
    Contents:
    Introduction to ligand design in medicinal inorganic chemistry
    Platinum-based anticancer agents
    Coordination chemistry and ligand design in the development of metal based radiopharmaceuticals
    Ligand design in D-block optical imaging agents and sensors
    Luminescent lanthanoid probes
    Metal complexes of carbohydrate-targeted ligands in medicinal inorganic chemistry
    Design of Schiff base-derived ligands: applications in therapeutics and medical diagnosis
    Metal-based antimalarial agents
    Therapeutic gold compounds
    Ligand design to target and modulate metal-protein interactions in neurodegenerative diseases
    Rational design of copper and iron chelators to treat Wilson's disease and hemochromatosis
    MRI contrast agents
    Photoactivatable metal complexes and their use in biology and medicine
    Metalloprotein inhibitors
    Ruthenium anticancer compounds with biologically-derived ligands.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Print
    Ida B. Wells ; edited with an introduction and notes by Mia Bay ; general editor, Henry Louis Gates, Jr.
    Summary: "The broadest and most comprehensive collection of writings available by an early civil and women's rights pioneer . Seventy-one years before Rosa Parks's courageous act of resistance, police dragged a young Black journalist named Ida B. Wells off a train for refusing to give up her seat. The experience shaped Wells's career, and--when hate crimes touched her life personally--she mounted what was to become her life's work: an anti-lynching crusade that captured international attention. This volume covers the entire scope of Wells's remarkable career, collecting her early writings, articles exposing the horrors of lynching, essays from her travels abroad, and her later journalism. The Light of Truth is both an invaluable resource for study and a testament to Wells' long career as a civil rights activist"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    What is an African American classic? / Henry Louis Gates Jr.
    Introduction / Mia Bay
    The light of truth
    I. "Iola, the Princess of the Press" : Wells's Early Writings
    Stick to the race (1885)
    Functions of leadership 1885)
    Freedom of political action (1885)
    Woman's mission (1885)
    A story of 1900 (1886)
    Our women (1887)
    "Iola" on discrimination (1887)
    The model woman (1888)
    All things considered (1891)
    The Jim Crow car (1891)
    The lynchers wince (1891)
    The requisites of true leadership (1892)
    II. To call a thing by its true name : Wells's crusade against lynching
    Afro-Americans and Africa (1892)
    Bishop Tanner's "ray of light" (1892)
    Southern horrors : Lynch Law in all its phases (1892)
    Iola's southern field (1892)
    The requirements of Southern journalism (1893)
    Lynch Law in all its phases (1893)
    The reign of mob law (1893)
    Lynch Law and the color line (1893)
    To tole with watermelons (1893)
    Selections from The Reason Why the Colored American Is Not in the world's Columbian Exposition (1893)
    III. Ida B. Wells Abroad
    Two Christmas days : a holiday story (1894)
    Liverpool slave traditions and present practices (1894)
    The bitter cry of Black America : a new "Uncle Tom's Cabin" (1894)
    Ida B. Wells abroad (1864)
    The English speak (1894)
    The scoundrel (1894)
    IV. The Crusade Continues
    She pleads for her race : Miss Ida B. Wells talks about her anti-lynching campaign (1894)
    A red record
    Lynch Law in Georgia (1899)
    V. Twentieth-Century Journalism and Letters
    Mob rule in New Orleans : Robert Charles and his fight to the death (1900)
    Lynch Law in America (1900)
    The Negro's case in equity (1900)
    Lynching and the excuse for it (1901)
    Booker T. Washington and his critics (1904)
    How enfranchisement stops lynchings (1940)
    The Northern Negro woman's social and moral condition (1910)
    Slayer, in grip of law, fights return to South (1910)
    Mrs. Ida Wells Barnett on Why Mrs. Jack Johnson Suicided (1912)
    Our country's lynching record (1913)
    The ordeal of the "solitary" (1915)
    The East St. Louis massacre : the greatest outrage of the century (1917)
    The Arkansas Race Riot (1920)
    Articles on the Mississippi flood (1927).
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    HV6457 .B362 2014
    1
  • Digital
    authors: Deepansh Sharma, Anita Saini.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of the multi-dimensional approach for the production of ethanol from lignocellulosic biomass. The sustainability of this biofuel, the current and future status of the technology and its role in waste valorization are also addressed. Bioethanol from lignocellulosic material has emerged as an alternative to the traditional first-generation bioethanol. The book also discusses various pretreatment methods for effective separation of the various components of lignocellulosic feedstock as well as their advantages, and limitations. It describes the valorization of lignocellulosic waste through the production of bioethanol and emphasizes the significance of waste utilization in managing the production cost of the fuel. Finally, the utilization of genetically engineered plants and microorganisms to increase the conversion efficiency is reviewed.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    About the Authors
    1: Introduction to Lignocellulosic Ethanol
    Need for Renewable Fuels/General Background
    Bioethanol as a Fuel
    Classification of Bioethanol Fuel
    First-Generation Bioethanol
    Second-Generation Bioethanol
    Third-Generation Bioethanol
    Waste Valorization Through Cellulosic Ethanol Production
    References
    2: Cellulosic Ethanol Feedstock: Diversity and Potential
    Introduction
    Lignocellulose
    Cellulose
    Hemicellulose
    Lignin
    Cell Wall Organization
    Feedstock for Cellulosic Ethanol Agricultural Wastes as Bioethanol Feedstock
    Rice Feedstock Residues
    Wheat Straw
    Sugarcane Bagasse
    Others
    Industrial Waste as Bioethanol Feedstock
    Forest Waste as Bioethanol Feedstock
    Municipal Solid Waste as Bioethanol Feedstock
    Dedicated Energy Crops as Bioethanol Feedstock
    Switchgrass
    Miscanthus
    Napier Grass (Pennisetum Purpureum)
    Others
    Weed Biomass as Bioethanol Feedstock
    Water Hyacinth (Eichhornia Crassipes)
    Parthenium Hysterophorus
    Others
    References
    3: Pretreatment Technologies for Biomass Deconstruction
    Need for Biomass Pretreatment Enzymatic Hydrolysis
    Cost of Cellulases: An Impediment in Bioethanol Production
    Strategies for Improving Cellulases
    Fermentation
    Microbes for Ethanol Fermentation
    Modes of Fermentation
    Factors Affecting Fermentation
    Process Integration for Second-Generation Ethanol
    Separate Hydrolysis and Fermentation (SHF)
    Separate Hydrolysis and Co-Fermentation (SHCF)
    Simultaneous Saccharification and Fermentation (SSF)
    Simultaneous Saccharification and Co-Fermentation (SSCF)
    Consolidated Bioprocessing (CBP)
    Ethanol Production from High Biomass Loading Methods for Biomass Pretreatment
    Physical Pretreatment
    Mechanical Comminution
    Extrusion
    Microwave Irradiation
    Ultrasonication
    Electron Beam Irradiation
    Physicochemical Pretreatment
    Alkali Pretreatment
    Acid Pretreatment
    Organosolv Pretreatment
    Wet Oxidation
    Steam Explosion
    Ammonia Fiber Explosion Method (AFEX)
    Supercritical CO2 (or CO2 Explosion)
    SO2 Explosion
    Alkaline Peroxide Pretreatment
    Ionic Liquids
    Biological Pretreatment
    References
    4: Saccharification Fermentation and Process Integration
    Biomass Hydrolysis
    Acid Hydrolysis On-Site Cellulase Production for Enzyme Cost Reduction
    References
    5: Microbial and Plant Genetic Engineering for Efficient Conversions
    Introduction
    Engineered Yeast to Produce Cellulosic Biofuels
    Engineering of Cell for Efficient Conversions
    Engineering of Substrate Utilization
    Tolerance Against Inhibitors, Temperature, and Solvents
    Genetic Modification of Plants for Bioethanol Production
    Reduction and Modification of Lignin
    Increase in Cellulose Content
    Increase in Biomass Content
    Synthesis of Cell Wall Hydrolytic Enzymes by Transgenic Plants
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    S. Robert Rozbruch, Reggie C. Hamdy, editors.
    Contents:
    Adult deformity / S. Robert Rozbruch
    Tumor / Levent Eralp
    Upper extremity / John E. Herzenberg.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Reggie C. Hamdy and Christopher Iobst [volume editors] ; S. Robert Rozbruch, Reggie C. Hamdy, editors.
    Summary: Consisting of case studies contributed by both domestic and international leaders in the field, this is an invaluable resource for all orthopedic surgeons and researchers and practitioners of limb lengthening, deformity correction and the Ilizarov method. Comprehensive yet accessible, this volume covers pediatric deformity correction, from congenital deformities to growth plate injuries. Each of the unique cases includes color photographs and radiographs from before, during and after surgery and will follow a consistent chapter structure which outlines a brief clinical history of the case, preoperative problem list, treatment strategy, basic principles, technical pearls and how to avoid and manage complications and subsequent problems. Suggested readings round out each case. A comprehensive presentation of techniques is featured, including external fixation, internal fixation, combination approaches and fully implantable limb lengthening nails. This case-based approach is an efficient and thorough way to learn this exciting new frontier in orthopedic surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    S. Robert Rozbruch, Reggie C. Hamdy, editors.
    Summary: Consisting of case studies contributed by both domestic and international leaders in the field, this is an invaluable resource for all orthopedic surgeons and researchers and practitioners of limb lengthening, deformity correction and the Ilizarov method. Comprehensive yet accessible, this volume covers injuries to the foot and ankle as well as orthopedic trauma, from foot and ankle fusions and clubfoot correction to femoral and tibial reconstruction. Each of the unique cases includes color photographs and radiographs from before, during and after surgery and will follow a consistent chapter structure which outlines a brief clinical history of the case, preoperative problem list, treatment strategy, basic principles, technical pearls and how to avoid and manage complications and subsequent problems. Suggested readings round out each case. A comprehensive presentation of techniques is featured, including external fixation, internal fixation, combination approaches and fully implantable limb lengthening nails. This case-based approach is an efficient and thorough way to learn this exciting new frontier in orthopedic surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Michael E. Edmonds, Bauer E. Sumpio, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Abbreviations;
    Chapter 1: Assessment, Classification, Staging and Intervention; 1.1 Assessment of the Diabetic Foot; 1.1.1 History; 1.1.2 Examination; 1.1.2.1 Skin Breakdown; 1.1.2.2 Infection; 1.1.2.3 Necrosis; 1.1.2.4 Ischaemia; 1.1.2.5 Grading Regarding Wound, Ischaemia and foot Infection in WIfI; 1.1.2.6 Neuropathy; Motor Neuropathy; Autonomic Neuropathy; Sensory Neuropathy; 1.1.2.7 Deformity; 1.1.2.8 Callus; 1.1.2.9 Oedema; Unilateral Oedema; Bilateral Oedema; 1.2 Classification of the Diabetic Foot; 1.2.1 The Neuropathic Foot 1.2.2 The Ischaemic Foot1.2.3 Neuroischaemic Foot; 1.2.4 Critically Ischaemic Foot; 1.2.5 Acutely Ischaemic Foot; 1.3 Staging of the Diabetic Foot; 1.3.1 Stage 1; 1.3.2 Stage 2; 1.3.3 Stage 3; 1.3.4 Stage 4; 1.3.5 Stage 5; 1.3.6 Stage 6; 1.4 Intervention; 1.5 Conclusion; References; Part I: Neuropathic Foot;
    Chapter 2: Introduction to the Neuropathic Foot: Limb Salvage Pathway and Algorithm; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Management of Neuropathic Ulceration; 2.2.1 Step 1. Wound Control: Debridement and Standard Wound Care; 2.2.2 Step 2. Mechanical Control: Off loading 2.2.3 Step 3. Advanced Wound Therapy with Evidence-Based Adjunctive Therapies2.2.4 Step 4. Soft Tissue Coverage; 2.3 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 3: Diabetic Neuropathy; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Definitions of Diabetic Neuropathy; 3.3 Type of Nerve Fibres; 3.4 Classification of Diabetic Neuropathy; 3.5 Epidemiology; 3.6 Risk Factors for Diabetic Neuropathy; 3.7 Pathogenesis of DN; 3.8 Clinical Features; 3.8.1 Typical DN: Diabetic Sensorimotor Peripheral Neuropathy (DSPN); 3.8.2 Atypical DN; 3.8.2.1 Diabetic Painful Peripheral Neuropathy (DPPN); 3.8.2.2 Focal or Multifocal Neuropathies 3.8.2.3 Diabetic Autonomic Neuropathy (DAN)3.9 Diagnosis; 3.10 Differential Diagnosis; 3.11 Management of Diabetic Neuropathy; 3.11.1 Glycaemic Control; 3.11.2 Management of Neuropathic Pain; 3.11.3 Management of Autonomic Neuropathy; 3.11.4 Control of Cardiovascular Risk Factors; 3.11.5 Disease Modifying Treatments; 3.11.6 Diabetic Foot Risk Assessment; 3.12 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 4: Neuropathic Diabetic Foot Ulceration; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Diabetic Foot Ulceration; 4.3 Epidemiology and Risk Factors for Neuropathic DFU; 4.3.1 Presence of Neuropathy in DFU 4.3.2 Risk Factors for Development of Neuropathic DFU4.3.3 Risk Factors for Delayed Healing in Neuropathic DFU; 4.3.4 Risk Factors for Recurrence of Neuropathic DFU; 4.3.5 Risk Factors for Amputation in Neuropathic DFU; 4.4 Pathway to Ulceration if Neuropathic DFU; 4.5 Clinical Features; 4.6 Investigations and Assessments; 4.6.1 Confirmation of Neuropathy; 4.6.2 Identification of Infection; 4.6.3 Imaging; 4.6.4 Laboratory Blood Panel; 4.6.5 Assessment of Foot Deformities and Abnormal Pressure; 4.6.6 Assessment of Comorbidities; 4.7 Management of Neuropathic DFU; 4.7.1 Wound Control
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    translation by B.S. Levine.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I576 .R48
    3
  • Digital
    J. Jesus Céron-Rojas, José Crossa.
    Summary: This open access book focuses on the linear selection index (LSI) theory and its statistical properties. It addresses the single-stage LSI theory by assuming that economic weights are fixed and known - or fixed, but unknown - to predict the net genetic merit in the phenotypic, marker and genomic context. Further, it shows how to combine the LSI theory with the independent culling method to develop the multistage selection index theory. The final two chapters present simulation results and SAS and R codes, respectively, to estimate the parameters and make selections using some of the LSIs described. It is essential reading for plant quantitative geneticists, but is also a valuable resource for animal breeders.

    Contents:
    General introduction
    The linear phenotypic selection index theory
    Constrained linear phenotypic selection indices
    Constrained linear phenotypic selection indices
    Linear marker and genomic selection indices
    Linear genomic selection indices
    Constrained linear genomic selection indices
    Linear phenotypic eigen selection index methods
    Linear molecular and genomic eigen selection index methods
    Multistage linear selection indices
    Stochastic simulation of four linear phenotypic selection indices
    RIndSel: Selection indices with R.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Maarten Merkx.
    Contents:
    Preface / Maarten Merkx
    1.Understanding and applications of Ser/Gly linkers in protein engineering / Eric Ceballos-Alcantarilla and Maarten Merkx
    2.Design and construction of chimeric linker linkers with controllable flexibilities for precision protein engineering / Ziliang Huang, Chong Zhang and Xin-Hui Xing
    3.Engineering crowding sensitivity into protein linkers / Theodoros Pittas, Weiyan Zuo and Arnold J. Boersma
    4.protaTETHER: A method for the incorporation of linkers in biomacromolecules / Anna I. Wurz, Collin T. O'Bryant and Robert M. Hughes
    5.Optimizing the linker length for fusing an alcohol dehydrogenase with a cyclohexanone monooxygenase Alejandro Gran-Scheuch, Friso Aalbers, Yannick Woudstra, Loreto Parra and Marco W. Fraaije
    6.Predicting the effect of disordered linkers on effective concentrations and avidity with the Ceff calculator app / Magnus Kjaergaard, Juliana Glavina and Lucia Beatriz Chemes
    7.ER/K-link—Leveraging a native protein linker to probe dynamic cellular interactions / Tejas M. Gupte, Michael Ritt and Sivaraj Sivaramakrishnan
    8.Design of helical linkers for fusion proteins and protein-based nanostructures / Ryoichi Arai
    9.Synthetic protein switches: Combinatorial linker engineering with iFLink / C Alexander Gräwe, Jan Ranglack, Anastasia Weyrich and Viktor Stein
    10.Enzyme-DNA chimeras: Construction, allostery, applications / Chiao-Yu Tseng, Yong Wang and Giovanni Zocchi
    11.The Spy that links: Creation of nonlinear protein architectures and materials using SpyTag/SpyCatcher chemistry / Ri Wang and Fei Sun.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Nadine Finigan-Carr.
    Contents:
    A dream deferred : how trauma impacts the academic achievement of African-American youth / Larry J. Walker & Ramon Goings
    Addressing racism's effects on African American males from womb to classroom / Roland J. Thorpe, Jr, Derek M. Griffith, Marino A. Bruce & Lawrence Brown
    Drinking and learning while black : the effect of family problem drinking on children's later educational attainment / Stacey Houston
    Anxiety and grade retention among African American and Caribbean black adolescents / Theda Rose, Nadine M. Finigan-Carr & Sean Joe
    Community violence, adolescent aggression and academic achievement / Nadine M. Finigan-Carr & Tanya L. Sharpe
    Schools as re-traumatizing environments / Wendy E. Shaia & Shanda C. Crowder
    Peace, be still : black educators coping with constant school reforms in Philadelphia / Camika Royal
    Promoting culturally responsive practice to reduce disparities in school discipline among African American students / Katrina J. Debnam, Jessika H. Bottiani & Catherine Bradshaw
    On some types and consequences of afterschool activities in low-Income neighborhoods / Brad Lian.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Scott Cloutier, Sara El-Sayed, Allison Ross, Melanie Weaver, editors.
    Summary: The book offers critical discussion, constructive insights and informed guidance for future research and applied work that can move us closer towards a sustainable society. This is the first comprehensive edited book linking sustainability and happiness. By doing so, it frames modern society's pursuit of happiness as the ultimate wicked problem challenging sustainable life on earth. Chapters in the book focus on topics such as food systems, neighbourhood developments, project facilitated gathering and dialogue, beauty, and the happiness movement as an alternative to GDP. This book is of great importance to both academics and practitioners working at the intersection of sustainability and happiness.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Introduction
    Part 2: Theoretical Perspectives
    Chapter 1. Beauty and Happiness (John de Graaf)
    Chapter 2. Sustainable Happiness (Catherine O'Brien)
    Chapter 3. Is Happiness Sustainable? (Sonja Lyubomirsky)
    Chapter 4. The Sustainability and Happiness Hypothesis (Jonathan Haidt)
    Chapter 5. Sustainability and Happiness: A Spiritual Perspective (M. Joshanloo)
    Chapter 6. Sustainability and Happiness: A Biological Perspective (M. Angilletta)
    Part 3: Applied Perspectives/Case Studies
    Chapter 7. The Sustainability and Happiness Research Lab (S. Cloutier)
    Chapter 8. Shifting Societal Happiness (Meik Wiking)
    Chapter 9. The Happy City through Transformative Urban Design (Charles Montgomery)
    Chapter 10. Bristol as the Happy City (Liz Zeidler)
    Chapter 11. Promoting Happiness as a Sustainable Alternative to GDP (Laura Musikanski)
    Part 4: Outro as a summary of presented works
    Reference.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Antonia Kolokythas.
    Summary: The lip is the most common site of malignancy in the head and neck region. Although high cure rates can be achieved by early treatment, a significant percentage of lip cancers demonstrate aggressive behaviour, posing management difficulties. Given the aesthetic and functional significance of the lip, reconstruction post surgery is also extremely important, yet this, too, can be challenging. This textbook is intended as a comprehensive reference that will provide easy-to-follow and well-organized guidance on the management of lip cancer, from diagnosis to treatment and reconstruction. After discussion of anatomy and premalignant conditions, detailed attention is paid to squamous cell carcinoma of the lip. Surgical management is explained, and the roles of radiation therapy and chemotherapy, discussed. Reconstruction techniques following ablative surgery are then described in depth, with reference to defect size and complexity. In addition, the potential complications of treatment and reconstruction are presented, with advice on their management. The closing chapter considers other malignant lesions of the lip. The informative text is complemented by high-quality illustrations and clinical and radiographic material. The contributors all have extensive experience and in-depth knowledge of the topics they address.

    Contents:
    General Considerations
    Anatomic Considerations
    Premalignant Conditions of the Lip
    Squamous Cell Carcinoma of the Lip
    Squamous Cell Carcinoma-Surgical Management
    Squamous Cell Carcinoma-Radiation Therapy
    Squamous Cell Carcinoma-Chemotherapy
    Reconstruction of Full-Thickness Defects of the Lip
    Reconstruction Considerations Based on Size of Defect
    Reconstruction of Complex Defects
    Vascularized Flap Reconstruction
    Complications Associated with Treatment of Lip Cancer
    Complications Associated with Reconstruction of Lip Defects
    Complications Associated with Radiotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Zaher Jandali, Lucian P. Jiga, Corrado Campisi, editors.
    Summary: This book is written as a guide for patients suffering from lipedema. Known as a common, painful fat distribution disorder characterised by a disproportional fat accumulation, lipedema represents an unmet medical need where scientific evidence on both pathophysiology and its treatment is still lacking. As the number of affected patients is increasing, besides striving to map the conundrum of clinical signs and relate these to their underlying mechanisms, developing standardised approaches addressing both fat mass reduction and body contouring are key issues able to warrant therapeutic success. In this book, our intention was to look at this complex disease from all its actual perspectives and provide a concise summary of the actual state of knowledge for all those affected. After looking into the most actual data on the aetiology, pathophysiology and course of the disease, the book then focuses on our complex treatment protocols wherecurrent conservative and surgical treatment options are systematically analyzed, considering their long-term chances of success as well as associated risks and side effects. We propose a three step treatment approach. 1st step initiates with weight control and addresses obesity, if present. 2nd step is an individual liposuction therapy plan to treat all lipedema areas, and more. 3rd step includes body contouring surgery, only in patients with massive skin laxity after liposuction and / or massive weight loss. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Yoji Kato, editor.
    Summary: This volume focusses on oxidative modifications of lipid molecules and the successive generation of singlet oxygen. The book also covers the secondary adductions of these reactive species with proteins and aminophospholipids. During lipid peroxidation, the initial event is the formation of lipid hydroperoxide, which is followed by an oxidation event that starts a chain-reaction. The formed lipid hydroperoxide gradually decomposes into harmful aldehydes, which are the advanced end-products of lipid peroxidation.

    Contents:
    Lipid hydroperoxides as a source of singlet molecular oxygen
    The formation of lipid hydroperoxide-derived amide-type lysine adducts on proteins: a review of current knowledge
    Lipid hydroperoxide-derived adduction to amino-phospholipid in biomembrane
    Amide-type adduct of dopamine : Plausible cause of Parkinson diseases
    Determination of HEL (hexanoyl-lysine adduct): a novel biomarker for omega-6 PUFA oxidation
    Hexanoyl-lysine as a deterioration marker for rice during storage
    Cholesterol hydroperoxides and their degradation mechanism
    Amide-adducts in atherosclerosis
    Oxidative Modification of Lipoproteins
    Immunochemical Detection of Lipid Hydroperoxide- and Aldehyde-Modified Proteins in Diseases
    Role of Lipid Peroxide in the Neurodegenerative Disorders
    Lipid Hydroperoxide-Derived Modification of Proteins in Gastrointestinal Tract
    Low-cost and easy-to-use "on-chip ELISA" for developing health-promoting foods
    Hexanoyl-lysine as an oxidative-injured marker - application of development of functional food
    Potential role of oxidative protein modification in energy metabolism in exercise
    Suppressive effects of cacao polyphenols on the development of atherosclerosis in apolipoprotein E-deficient mice.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Hussein Yassine, editor.
    Summary: This timely, concise title provides an important update on clinical lipid management. Using information from recent clinical trials and in special populations, the book begins by offering an easy-to-read overview of LDL, HDL, and triglyceride metabolism and the genetics of lipid disorders. The link between inflammation and lipids, and how this relates to atherosclerosis development, is also addressed, as are the measures of subclinical atherosclerosis in patients with abnormal lipid levels. Lipid abnormalities in children, with a particular focus on vulnerable populations (with an emphasis on ethnicity and childhood obesity), are covered. The treatment goals and approaches for managing lipids in the clinic are thoroughly discussed, emphasizing the important role of statin use and addressing controversies of lipid management in special populations such as heart failure, end stage kidney disease and fatty liver disease. Of special note, an important update on how new HIV medications impact lipid levels is provided. In all, Lipid Management: From Basics to Clinic, is an invaluable, handy resource for understanding changes in lipids in different populations and for sharpening the clinical approach to managing complicated lipid cases.

    Contents:
    Basics of Lipoprotein Metabolism
    Genetics of Lipid Disorders
    Lipid and Inflammation in Atherosclerosis
    Dyslipidemia: Relationship to Insulin Resistance, Fatty Liver, and Sub-clinical atherosclerosis
    Is low HDL cholesterol a marker of a mediator of cardiovascular disease?
    Approach to the patient with lipid disorders
    The Effects of Diet in Hyperlipidemia
    Statins
    Non-alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD): The Lipid Disease of the Liver and the Effect of Statins
    Statins in Heart Failure
    Statins in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Non-statin therapies
    LDL Apheresis
    Dyslipidemia in HIV
    New and Emerging Lipid Therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Yongsheng Li, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on lipid metabolism in tumor immunity, covering the application of lipidomics in tumor immunity and all aspects of lipid metabolism in tumor microenvironment. During the progression of tumors, tumor cells and immune cells interact in a dynamic microenvironment. Targeting the immune system has a high potential for treating cancer. However, due to the high heterogeneity of the tumor microenvironment, only a small percentage of patients experience such clinical benefits of tumor immunotherapy. Therefore, understanding the tumor microenvironment is crucial for tumor immunity. Recently, lipid metabolism is an emerging research direction and contributes to cell survival and biofunctions in tumor microenvironment, which is of great interest and significance to be elucidated. This book provides the doctors, researchers, and scientists with a cutting-edge overview of the lipid metabolism and its role in tumor immunity. It also yields benefits for pharmaceutical companies regarding drug discovery.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction: Introduction of lipids, lipid metabolism and tumor immunity
    2. Lipid metabolism and lipidomics
    3. Applications of lipidomics in tumour immunity.-4. Overview: Lipid metabolism in tumour microenvironment
    5. Lipid metabolism in cancer cells
    6. Lipid metabolism in tumour-associated NK
    7. Lipid metabolism in tumour-associated macrophages
    8. Lipid metabolism in tumour-associated MDSCs
    9. Lipid metabolism in tumour-associated fibroblasts
    10. Lipid metabolism in tumour-associated B cells
    11. Lipid metabolism in tumour-infiltrating T cells
    12. Lipid metabolism and angiogenesis
    13. Lipid metabolism and tumor antigen-presenting
    14. Lipid metabolism and immune checkpoints.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Edited by Alexandru Mihai Grumezescu.
    Summary: Lipid Nanocarriers for Drug Targeting presents recent advances in the area of lipid nanocarriers. The book focuses on cationic lipid nanocarriers, solid lipid nanocarriers, liposomes, thermosensitive vesicles, and cubosomes, with applications in phototherapy, cosmetic and others. As the first book related to lipid nanocarriers and their direct implication in pharmaceutical nanotechnology, this important reference resource is ideal for biomaterials scientists and those working in the medical and pharmaceutical industries that want to learn more on how lipids can be used to create more effective drug delivery systems.

    Contents:
    1. Lipid nanocarriers
    2. Lipid nanoparticulate systems: modern versatile drug carriers
    3. Nanotechnology in phytotherapy: current challenges of lipid-based nanocarriers for the delivery of natural products
    4. Innovative vesicles for dermal and transdermal drug delivery
    5. Engineering of bacterial outer membrane vesicles: potential applications for the development of vaccines
    6. Plasmid-DNA lipid nanovaccines: an innovative approach for a better world health
    7. Ocular delivery of solid lipid nanoparticles
    8. Lipid-based nanoparticles for cancer treatment
    9. Developing liposomal nanomedicines for treatment of patients with neuroblastoma
    10. Lipid nanoparticles for tropical and transdermal delivery of pharmaceuticals and cosmeceuticals: a glorious victory
    11. Cosmetic lipid nanocarriers
    12. Self-nanoemulsifying drug delivery systems (SNEDDS) and self-microemulsifying drug delivery systems (SMEDDS) as lipid nanocarriers for improving dissolution rate and bioavailability of poorly soluble drugs
    13. Lipid-based nanomedicines: current clinical status and future perspectives
    14. Structure and kinetics of synthetic, lipid-based nucleic acid carriers: lipoplexes
    15. In vitro and in vivo characterization of pharmaceutical topical nanocarriers containing anticancer drugs for skin cancer treatment
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Lipid Metabolism Branch, Division of Heart and Vascular Diseases, National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute.
    Contents:

    v. 1. The prevalence study, aggregate distribution of lipids, lipoproteins and selected variables in 11 North American populations.
    Digital Access Google Books 1980-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC632.L5 L76
    1
  • Digital
    Julian Gomez-Cambronero, Michael A. Frohman, editors.
    Summary: Lipids are an integral part of cell membrane architecture, are intermediaries in cell metabolism, and are involved in transmitting cell signals from hormones, growth factors and nutrients. A number of lipases and phospholipases, lipid kinases, lipid phosphatases, sphingosine kinases, and their reaction products have been implicated in fundamental cellular processes including cell proliferation, division and migration. These enzymes and their products underlie the molecular mechanisms of numerous human diseases, in particular metabolic disease (diabetes), cancer, neurodegenerative disease and cardiovascular disease. Over the last decade, studies have advanced to the point that a number of inhibitors for these enzymes have been developed to attempt to ameliorate these conditions; some of the inhibitors are currently in human clinical trial. The need for this book is to review the current status of this field and the prospect for the inhibitors to be clinically important. .

    Contents:
    Part 1. New Roles for Sphingolipid Signaling and Cell Function
    1. Role of Sphingosine Kinase 1 and Sphingosine-1-Phosphate Axis in Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    2. Exploring the Therapeutic Landscape of Sphingomyelinases
    3. Sphingosine kinases as druggable targets
    Part 2. Phospholipase D and Mitogen Phosphatidic Acid in Human Disease
    4. Prospects for PLD inhibition in cancer and thrombotic disease
    5. Phospholipase D and the Mitogen Phosphatidic Acid in Human Disease: Inhibitors of PLD at the Crossroads of Phospholipid Biology and Cancer
    6. Role of Phospholipase D-Derived Phosphatidic Acid in Regulated Exocytosis and Neurological Disease
    Part 3. Lipid Kinases and Novel Regulatory Pathways
    7. Diacylglycerol Kinase Malfunction in Human Disease and the Search for Specific Inhibitors
    8. Functions of Nuclear Polyphosphoinositides
    Part 4. Bioactive Lipids in Health and Disease
    9. Platelet-Activating Factor as an Effector for Environmental Stressors
    10. Phospholipase D and Choline Metabolism
    Part 5- Lipids and Membrane Microdomains
    11. Regulation of Inositol Biosynthesis: Balancing Health and Pathophysiology
    12. Lipids and Membrane Microdomains: The Glycerolipid and Alkylphosphocholine Class of Cancer Chemotherapeutic Drugs
    Part 6. Nuclear Trafficking of Lipids
    13. Inositide-Dependent Nuclear Signalling in Health and Disease
    14. Lipids in Exosome Biology.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Mark Waugh.
    Contents:
    Method for assaying the lipid kinase phosphatidylinositol-5-phosphate 4-kinase α in quantitative high-throughput screening (qHTS) bioluminescent format / Mindy I. Davis, Atsuo T. Sasaki, and Anton Simeonov
    Assaying ceramide synthase activity in vitro and in living cells using liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry / Xin Ying Lim, Russell Pickford, and Anthony S. Don
    Fluorescent assays for ceramide synthase activity / Timothy A. Couttas and Anthony S. Don
    Identification of the interactome of a palmitoylated membrane protein, phosphatidylinositol 4-kinase type II alpha / Avanti Gokhale ... [et al.]
    Measurement of long-chain fatty Acyl-CoA synthetase activity / Joachim Füllekrug and Margarete Poppelreuther
    Qualitative and quantitative in vitro analysis of phosphatidylinositol phosphatase substrate specificity / Laura Ren Huey Ip and Christina Anja Gewinner
    Luciferase reporter assays to assess liver X receptor transcriptional activity / Matthew C. Gage, Benoit Pourcet, and Inés Pineda-Torra
    Metabolically biotinylated reporters for electron microscopic imaging of cytoplasmic membrane microdomains / Kimberly J. Krager and John G. Koland
    Fluorescence recovery after photobleaching analysis of the diffusional mobility of plasma membrane proteins : HER3 mobility in breast cancer cell membranes / Mitul Sarkar and John G. Koland
    Isolation and analysis of detergent-resistant membrane fractions / Massimo Aureli ... [et al.]
    Detection of isolated mitochondria-associated ER membranes using the sigma-1 receptor / Abasha Lewis, Shang-Yi Tsai, and Tsung-Ping Su
    Using surface plasmon resonance to quantitatively assess lipid-protein interactions / Kathryn Del Vecchio and Robert V. Stahelin
    Analyzing protein-phosphoinositide interactions with liposome flotation assays / Ricarda A. Busse ... [et al.]
    High-throughput fluorometric assay for membrane-protein interaction / Wonhwa Cho, Hyunjin Kim, and Yusi Hu
    Guidelines for the use of protein domains in acidic phospholipid imaging / Matthieu Pierre Platre and Yvon Jaillais
    Analysis of sphingolipid synthesis and transport by metabolic labeling of cultured cells with [3H]serine / Neale D. Ridgway
    Determination and characterization of tetraspanin-associated phosphoinositide-4 kinases in primary and neoplastic liver cells / Krista Rombouts and Vinicio Carloni
    Analysis of the phosphoinositide composition of subcellular membrane fractions / Deborah A. Sarkes and Lucia E. Rameh
    Single-molecule imaging of signal transduction via GPI- anchored receptors / Kenichi G. N. Suzuki
    Measuring phosphatidylinositol generation on biological membranes / Mark Waugh
    Assay for CDP-diacylglycerol generation by CDS in membrane fractions / Mark Waugh.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Xian-Cheng Jiang, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date review of the fundamentals of lipid metabolism and its role in cardiovascular diseases. Focusing on lipid transfer proteins in the circulation and cells, the role of important lipid transporters, the effect of recently discovered lipid binding proteins, and the link between lipid metabolism disorders and cardiovascular diseases, it covers phospholipid transfer protein, cholesteryl ester transfer protein, lipopolysaccharide binding protein, microsomal triglyceride transfer protein, ABC binding cassette members, and more. The book offers graduate students and researchers a coherent overview of lipid transfer and transport, as well as the limitations of current research in the field, and promotes further studies on cardiovascular diseases, as well as pharmaceutical research on drug discovery based on lipid transfer, transport, and binding.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Impact of Phospholipid Transfer Protein in Lipid Metabolism and Cardiovascular Diseases
    1.1 Phospholipid Transfer Protein (PLTP)
    1.2 PLTP and Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein (CETP)
    1.3 Regulation of PLTP
    1.4 PLTP and HDL
    1.5 PLTP and Reverse Cholesterol Transport (RCT)
    1.6 PLTP and ApoB-Containing-Triglyceride-Rich Lipoprotein (BLp) Secretion
    1.7 PLTP and Obesity/Insulin Resistance
    1.8 PLTP and Thrombosis
    1.9 PLTP and Inflammation
    1.10 PLTP and Cardiovascular Diseases
    1.11 Conclusion
    References Chapter 2: Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein and Lipid Metabolism and Cardiovascular Diseases
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Reverse Cholesterol Transport
    2.3 Human Genetic Studies
    2.4 Possible New Function of CETP: Anti-inflammatory
    2.5 Does CETP Have an Intracellular Function?
    2.6 CETP Inhibition as a Target to Decrease Cardiovascular Diseases
    Box 2.1 Main CETP Inhibitor Trials
    2.6.1 Torcetrapib
    2.6.2 Dalcetrapib
    2.6.3 Evacetrapib
    2.6.4 Anacetrapib
    2.6.5 TA-8995 (Obicetrapib)
    2.7 Concluding Remarks
    References Chapter 3: Lipopolysaccharide-Binding Protein and Bactericidal/Permeability-Increasing Protein in Lipid Metabolism and Cardiov...
    3.1 The Gene Loci and Expression of BPI and LBP
    3.2 Structures and Functions of LBP and BPI
    3.3 LBP and BPI in Lipid Metabolism and Cardiovascular Research
    3.3.1 LBP
    3.3.2 BPI
    References
    Chapter 4: Microsomal Triglyceride Transfer Protein: From Lipid Metabolism to Metabolic Diseases
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Role of Microsomal Triglyceride Transfer Protein in Lipid and Lipoprotein Metabolism 4.3 Regulation of Microsomal Triglyceride Transfer Protein
    4.4 Lipids and Lipoproteins in Metabolic Syndrome
    4.5 Therapeutic Intervention of MTP to Alleviate Dyslipidemia in Metabolic Syndrome
    4.6 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: Circadian Clock Regulation on Lipid Metabolism and Metabolic Diseases
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Origins of the Mammalian Clock
    5.3 Physiological Functions of Circadian Clock
    5.4 Preclinical Studies on Diurnal Rhythm in Phospholipid Metabolism
    5.5 Clinical Studies on Circadian Clocks ́Role in Phospholipid Metabolism
    5.6 Conclusion 6.8 Role of ABCA1- and ABCG1-Mediated Cholesterol Efflux Pathways in Inflammasome Activation
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Yuki Nakamura, Yonghua Li-Beisson editors.
    Contents:
    Lipids: from chemical structures, biosynthesis, and analyses to industrial applications
    Roles of lipids in photosynthesis
    DGDG and glycolipids in plants and algae
    Thylakoid development and galactolipid synthesis cyanobacteria
    Role of lipids in chloroplast biogenesis
    Role of MGDG and non-bilayer lipid phases in the structure and dynamics of chloroplast thylakoid membranes
    Chemical genetics in dissecting membrane glycerolipid functions
    Triacylglycerol accumulation in photosynthetic cells in plants and algae
    Cellular organization of triacylglycerol biosynthesis in microalgae
    High-throughput genetics strategies for identifying new components of lipid metabolism in the green alga Chlamydomonas reinhardtii
    Plant sphingolipid meatbolism and function
    Plant surface lipids and epidermis development
    Role of lipid metabolism in plant pollen exine development
    Long-distance lipid signaling and its role in plant development and stress response
    Acyl-CoA-biinding proteins (ACBPs) in plant development
    The rise and fall of Jasmonate biological activities
    Green leaf volatiles in plant signaling and response
    Omics in Chlamydomonas for biofuel production
    Microalgae as a source for VLC-PUFA production
    Understanding sugar catabolism in unicellular cyanobacteria toward the application in biofuel and biomaterial production.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Olga Gursky, editor.
    Contents:
    Role of Lipids in Folding, Misfolding and Function of Integral Membrane Proteins
    Protein Misfolding in Lipid-Mimetic Environments.- Lipids in Amyloid-[beta] Processing, Aggregation, and Toxicity
    Role of Cholesterol and Phospholipids in Amylin Misfolding, Aggregation and Etiology of Islet Amyloidosis
    Stability, Oligomerization, and Amyloidogenicity of Apo Serum Amyloid A
    Interactions of Lipid Membranes with Fibrillar Protein Aggregates
    The Role of Lipid in Misfolding and Amyloid Fibril Formation by Apolipoprotein C-II
    Amyloid-Forming Properties of Human Apolipoproteins: Sequence Analyses and Structural Insights
    Computational Approaches to Identification of Aggregation Sites and the Mechanism of Amyloid Growth
    Role of Syndecans in Lipid Metabolism and Human Diseases
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Alicia J. Jenkins, Peter P. Toth, Timothy J. Lyons, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Abdus Samad, Sarwar Beg and Iram Nazish.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Future Med
    Future Med
  • Digital
    Melvin A. Shiffman, Alberto Di Giuseppe, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Anesthesia
    Part II. Histology, pathology, biochemistry, and physiology
    Part III. Preoperative
    Part IV. Cannulas, equipment
    Part V. Techniques
    Part VI. Lipedema (lipoedema) and lymphedema
    Part VII. Complications
    Part VIII. Postoperative
    Part IX. Outcomes and patient satisfaction
    Part X. Medical legal, commentary
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Dieter Steinhilber, editor.
    Summary: Oxidation of polyunsaturated fatty acids by lipoxygenases leads to a variety of fatty acid metabolites which play important roles in physiology but also in pathophysiology. Data accumulated during the last decade point to the fact that lipoxygenase metabolites are involved in host defence reactions, cardiovascular system and contribute to the development of inflammatory and allergic diseases, cardiovascular disease and cancer. This PIR volume summarizes the physiological and pathophysiological functions of lipoxygenases.

    Contents:
    Introduction into lipoxygenases
    5-Lipoxygenase
    Leukotriene A4 hydrolase and LTC4 synthase
    Catalytic multiplicity of 15-lipoxygenase-1 orthologs (ALOX15) of different species
    Platelets and lipoxygenases
    Lipoxygenases and cardiovascular diseases
    Role of lipoxygenases in pathogenesis of cancer
    The physiology and pathophysiology of lipoxygenases in the skin
    5-Oxo-ETE and inflammation
    Lipoxins, resolvins, and the resolution of inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP603.L56 L57 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Thomas R. Gest, PhD (Professor of Anatomy, Foundational Sciences Discipline, Central Michigan University College of Medicine, Mount Pleasant, Michigan) ; In Memoriam, Patrick W. Tank, PhD (1950-2012) (coauthor of the first edition, Professor of Anatomy (1978-2012), Course Director, Gross Anatomy; Director, Anatomical Gift Program (1985-2011), also served as Director of Education and Director of Anatomical Education, Department of Neurobiology and Developmental Sciences, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, Arkansas).
    Summary: Resource added for the Physical Therapist Assistant program 105241. Resource added for the Nursing-Associate Degree 105431, Practical Nursing 315431, and Nursing Assistant 305431 programs.

    Contents:
    The Back
    The Upper Limb
    The Lower Limb
    The Thorax
    Thew Abdomen
    The Pelvis and Perineum
    The Head and Neck
    The Autonomic Nervous System.
  • Digital
    Andrea M. Kline-Tilford, MS, CPNP-AC/PC, FCCM, Pediatric Nurse Practitioner, Children's Hospital of Michigan, Department of Cardiovascular Surgery, Detroit, Michigan, Catherine Haut, DNP, CPNP-AC/PC, CCRN, Specialty Director, Pediatric Nurse Practitioner Program, University of Maryland School of Nursing, Baltimore, Maryland, Pediatric Nurse Practitioner, Pediatrix Medical Group and Beacon Pediatrics.
    Summary: "Lippincott Certification Review: Pediatric Acute Care Nurse Practitioner is the ideal companion while preparing for the Acute Care CPNP(r) exam administered by the Pediatric Nursing Certification Review Board, or for anyone who seeks to perform at a higher level of practice for children who are acutely, chronically, and critically ill. The AC PNP (Acute Care Pediatric Nurse Practitioner) program is designed to prepare experienced pediatric nurses to meet the specialized physiologic and psychological needs of infants, children, adolescents and young adults with complex acute, critical and chronic health conditions. The focus of AC PNP care includes complex monitoring and ongoing management of intensive therapies in a variety of settings, including but not limited to, inpatient and outpatient hospital settings, emergency departments and home care settings. Specialty areas of practice are varied and continue to emerge. AC PNPs collaborate with an interprofessional team to provide optimal patient care. The Certified Pediatric Nurse Practitioner: Acute Care (CPNP-AC) certification exam was developed by the Pediatric Nursing Certification board nearly 10 years ago. Since that time, there has not been a review book specific to this exam, and students have been seeking preparation materials for the exam. For the (approximately) 26 programs in the United States offered to complete pediatric certification, this book is the only available certification review material for the exam. Organized in a simple, bulleted format, this invaluable resource includes multiple choice self-assessment questions with rationales at the end of every chapter, plus two self-assessment exams with rationales - totaling more than 750 questions. Content focuses on the diagnosis and management of pediatric acute care problems typically treated in the emergency department or an inpatient setting._ Certification must be renewed every five years._"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part 1. The Pediatric Patient and Family: General pediatric considerations, development, nutrition, and sleep
    Communication, family-centered care, transitional care, and health care home
    Part 2. System-Based Problems: Pulmonary disorders
    Respiratory support modalities
    Cardiac disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Endocrine disorders
    Fluid and electrolytes
    Metabolic disorders
    Hematology and oncology disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Trauma
    Toxicology
    Sedation and analgesia
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Kidney and genitourinary disorders
    Immunologic and rheumatologic disorders
    Heent
    Musculoskeletal
    Genetics
    Dermatologic disorders
    Palliative care, complementary and alternative therapies
    Disaster medicine
    Part 3. Professional Issues: Research, evidence, quality improvement, safety, diversity, and health policy
    Preparation for practice: interprofessional practice: certification, licensure, credentialing, documentation, billing, and coding
    Part 4. Test-Taking Strategies
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Denise R. Ferrier, PhD, Professor, Department of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, Drexel University College of Medicine, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Summary: "Lippincott Illustrated Reviews: Biochemistry is the long-established, first-and-best resource for the essentials of biochemistry. Students rely on this text to help them quickly review, assimilate, and integrate large amounts of critical and complex information. For more than two decades, faculty and students have praised this best-selling biochemistry textbook for its matchless illustrations that make concepts come to life. Master all the latest biochemistry knowledge, thanks to extensive revisions and updated content throughout, including an expanded chapter on macronutrients, a completely new chapter on micronutrients, and much more. A bonus chapter on blood clotting with new, additional questions is included online. See how biochemistry applies to everyday healthcare through integrative, chapter-based cases as well as "Clinical" boxes throughout. Learn and study effortlessly with a concise outline format, abundant full-color artwork, and chapter overviews and summaries."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Unit I. Protein structure and function
    Unit II. Bioenergetics and carbohydrate metabolism
    Unit III. Lipid metabolism
    Unit IV. Nitrogen metabolism
    Unit V. Integration of metabolism
    Unit VI. Medical nutrition
    Unit VII. Storage and expression of genetic information.
  • Digital
    Emine Ercikan Abali, Susan D. Cline, David S. Franklin, Susan M. Viselli.
    Summary: "Biochemistry is the study of how our bodies utilize the nutritional substances in our diet to make building blocks, fuels, and communication molecules for our cells. It also includes the processes by which we convert chemicals within our bodies and eliminate chemicals from our bodies"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Amino Acids and the Role of PH
    Protein Structure
    Globular Proteins
    Fibrous Proteins
    Enzymes
    Bioenergetics and Oxidative Phosphorylation
    Introduction to Carbohydrates
    Introduction to Metabolism and Glycolysis
    Tricarboxylic Acid Cycle and Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Complex
    Gluconeogenesis
    Glycogen Metabolism
    Monosaccharide and Disaccharide Metabolism
    Pentose Phosphate Pathway and Nicotinamide Adenine Dinucleotide Phosphate
    Glycosaminoglycans, Proteoglycans, and Glycoproteins
    Dietary Lipid Metabolism
    Fatty Acid, Triacylglycerol, and Ketone Body Metabolism
    Phospholipid, Glycosphingolipid, and Eicosanoid Metabolism
    Cholesterol, Lipoprotein, and Steroid Metabolism
    Amino Acids : Nitrogen Disposal
    Amino Acids : Degradation and Synthesis
    Amino Acids : Conversion to Specialized Products
    Nucleotide Metabolism
    Metabolic Effects of Insulin and Glucagon
    The Feed-Fast Cycle
    Diabetes Mellitus
    Obesity
    Nutrition : Overview and Macronutrients
    Micronutrients : Vitamins
    Micronutrients : Minerals
    DNA Structure, Replication, and Repair
    RNA Structure, Synthesis, and Processing
    Protein Synthesis
    Regulation of Gene Expression
    Biotechnology and Human Disease
    Blood Clotting.
  • Digital
    Sandra K. Leeper-Woodford, MS, PhD, Associate Professor of Basic Medical Sciences and Physiology, Mercer University School of Medicine, Macon, Georgia, Linda R. Adkison, Associate Dean for Curricular Affairs, Professor of Genetics, Kansas City University of Medicine and Biosciences, Kansas City, Missouri.
    Contents:
    Cellular and molecular basis for human systems
    Cellular and neuroscience aspects of human systems
    Musculoskeletal system
    Cardiovascular system
    Pulmonary system
    Neurologic system
    Gastrointestinal and hepatobiliary systems
    Endocrine system
    Reproductive system.
  • Digital
    Claudia Krebs, Joanne Weinberg, Elizabeth Akesson, Esma Dilli.
    Contents:
    Introduction to the nervous system and basic neurophysiology
    Overview of the central nervous system
    Overview of the peripheral nervous system
    Overview of the visceral nervous system
    The spinal cord
    Overview and organization of the brainstem
    Ascending sensory tracts
    Descending motor tracts
    Control of eye movements
    Sensory and motor innervation of the head and neck
    Hearing and balance
    Brainstem systems and review
    The cerebral cortex
    The thalamus
    The visual system
    The basal ganglia
    The cerebellum
    The integration of motor control.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Karen Whalen ; collaborating editors, Richard Finkel, Thomas A. Panavelil.
    Summary: Lippincott Illustrated Reviews: Pharmacology, Sixth Edition, is the updated, enhanced version of the student-favorite resource for essentials of medical pharmacology. The first-and-best resource, the Lippincott Illustrated Reviews series features clear, effective writing and hundreds of illustrations for ideal rapid review and the assimilation of complex information. Clear, sequential images present mechanisms of action and focus on showing rather than telling students how drugs work.

    Contents:
    Unit I: Principles of drug therapy
    Unit II: Drugs affecting the autonomic nervous system
    Unit III: Drugs affecting the central nervous system
    Unit IV: Drugs affecting the cardiovascular system
    Unit V: Drugs affecting the endocrine system
    Unit VI: Drugs for other disorders
    Unit VII: Chemotherapeutic drugs
    Unit VIII: Toxicology.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Karen Whalen, PharmD, BCPS, FAPhA (Clinical Professor, Department of Pharmacotherapy and Translational Research, College of Pharmacy, University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida) ; collaborating editors, Carinda Feild, PharmD, FCCM (Clinical Associate Professor, Department of Pharmacotherapy and Translational Research, College of Pharmacy, University of Florida, St. Petersburg, Florida), Rajan Radhakrishnan, Pharm, MSc, PhD (Professor of Pharmacology, College of Medicine, Mohammed Bin Rashid University of Medicine and Health Sciences, Dubai, United Arab Emirates).
    Summary: "Lippincott Illustrated Reviews: Pharmacology, Seventh Edition, is the updated, enhanced version of the student-favorite resource for essentials of medical pharmacology. The first-and-best resource, the Lippincott Illustrated Reviews series features clear, effective writing and hundreds of illustrations for ideal rapid review and the assimilation of complex information. Clear, sequential images present mechanisms of action and focus on showing rather than telling students how drugs work. Nearly 600 annotated, full-color illustrations visually explain complex processes! Outline format ideal for concise review and foundational learning"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    I: Principles of drug therapy
    II: Drugs affecting the autonomic nervous system
    III: Drugs affecting the central nervous system
    IV: Drug affecting the cardiovascular system
    V: Drugs affecting the endocrine system
    VI: Chemotherapeutic drugs
    VII: Special topics in pharmacology
  • Digital
    [edited by] Karen L. Whalen ; collaborating editors, Sarah M. Lerchenfeldt, Chris R. Giordano.
    Summary: "Students' favorite review resource for studying the essentials of medical pharmacology, Lippincott® Illustrated Reviews: Pharmacology, 8th Edition, presents up-to-date drug information in an accessible format ideal for effective review.Part of the popular Lippincott® Illustrated Reviews series, this concise resource features clear writing and hundreds of illustrations that break down complex pharmacological information, so it is understandable and accessible. Sequential images present mechanisms of action and focus on showing rather than telling students how drugs work, and review questions with answers deliver powerful, practical exam preparation. NEW! Pharmacogenomics chapter familiarizes students with this topical area of clinical pharmacology. NEW! Clinical Application boxes emphasize the practical application of pharmacology concepts with real-world clinical examples. NEW! Chapter Summaries facilitate quick review for better student comprehension. Updated drug information reflects the most current, clinically relevant pharmacology material. Approachable outline format distills complex information for easier review. High-quality illustrations reinforce understanding in vibrant detail. Enhanced review questions with answers provide valuable self-assessment and prepare students for their Board reviews"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2023
  • Digital
    Robin R. Preston, Thad E. Wilson.
    Summary: "Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews: Physiology brings physiology clearly into focus, telling the story of who we are, how we live, and, ultimately, how we die. By first identifying organ function and then showing how cells and tissues are designed to fulfill that function, Lippincott Illustrated Reviews: Physiology decodes this discipline like no other text or review book. Each element was tailored for ease of use and fast content absorption, all combining to bring this story to life for readers. Visionary artwork, Clinical Applications, and Unit Review Questions teach and reinforce the most essential concepts in physiology--perfect for classroom learning and test/boards preparation"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Principles of physiologic function
    Sensory and motor systems
    Musculoskeletal and integumentary physiology
    Cardiovascular system
    Respiratory system
    Urinary system
    Gastrointestinal system
    Endocrine system
    Living and dying
    Appendices: A. Normal physiological values; B. Reference equations.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Sandra M. Nettina.
    Summary: "A classic text since it was first published in 1974, the Lippincott Manual for Nursing Practice has provided essential nursing knowledge and up-to-date information on patient care for nearly 40 years. Organized into five major parts, covering the Nursing Process and Practice; Medical-Surgical Nursing; Maternity & Neonatal Nursing; Pediatric Nursing; and Psychiatric Nursing. Written in an easy-to-read outline format, content is evidence-based and filled with procedure guidelines, Nursing Care Plans, Patient Education boxes, Standards of Care, and Assessments"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part One: Nursing process and practice
    Part Two: Medical-surgical nursing
    Unit I: General health considerations
    Unit II: Respiratory health
    Unit III: Cardiovascular health
    Unit IV: Neurological and sensory health
    Unit V: Gastrointestinal and nutritional health
    Unit VI: Renal, genitourinary, and reproductive health
    Unit VII: Metabolic and endocrine health
    Unit VIII: Hematologic health
    Unit IX: Immunologic health
    Unit X: Musculoskeletal health
    Unit XI: Integumentary health
    Unit XII: Emergency nursing
    Part Three: Maternity and neonatal nursing
    Part Four: Pediatric nursing
    Unit XIII: General practice considerations
    Unit XIV: Pediatric health
    Part Five: Psychiatric nursing.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    Summary: "Publisher's Note: Products purchased from 3rd Party sellers are not guaranteed by the Publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product. This start-to-finish guide includes over 400 nursing procedures--from basic to advanced. Every entry lists equipment, details each step to perform right at the bedside, and provides rationales and cautions to ensure patient safety and positive outcomes. Organized alphabetically for fast, easy access,the 8th Edition of Lippincott Nursing Procedures addresses what the nurse needs to know and do to perform best-practice procedures concerning infection control, specimen collection, physical assessment, drug administration, IV therapy, and hemodynamic monitoring, as well as procedures related to body systems, such as chest tube insertion, peripheral nerve stimulation, and intra-abdominal pressure monitoring. Thoroughly updated, this edition also includes new evidence-based entries on synchronized cardioversion, gait belt use, intermittent infusion device flushing and locking, isolation garb use, nasal bridal insertion and removal, pneumatic antishock garment application and removal, self-medication administration practice, and weaning a patient from a ventilator. With clear, step-by-step guidelines and hundreds of sidebars, photos, illustrations, and eye-catching alerts (Nursing Alerts, Pediatric, Elder, Hospital-Acquired Condition Alerts), you'll find the level of detail required to provide optimal hands-on patient care. Packed with pre- and postprocedure nursing considerations, warnings about potential complications, troubleshooting tips, and other helpful advice, this go-to reference provides everything you need to do your job confidently and well, whether you are beginning your nursing career, learning a new skill, or brushing up on a familiar technique"-- Provided by publisher. "Newly updated with the latest evidence-based research, this eighth edition of Lippincott Nursing Procedures provides step-by-step guidance on the most commonly performed nursing procedures you need to know, making it the ideal resource for providing the professional, hands-on care your patients deserve"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Mark D. Duncan, MD, Resident Physician, Department of Medicine, UCLA Medical Center, Los Angeles, California, Lance W. Chapman, MD, MBA, Resident Physician, Department of Dermatology, UC Irvine Medical Center, Irvine, California, Minesh P. Shah, MD, MPH, Assistant Professor, Division of General Internal Medicine, University of Illinois at Chicago, Chicago, Illinois.
    Contents:
    Cardiology
    Pulmonology
    Nephrology
    Gastroenterology
    Endocrine and metabolic disorders
    Infectious diseases
    Hematology and oncology
    Neurology
    Rheumatology
    Dermatology
    General medicine
    Practice examination
    Shelf pearls.
  • Digital
    Denise R. Ferrier.
    Summary: This is a resource for the essentials of biochemistry. Students will use this text to help them quickly review, assimilate, and integrate large amounts of complex information. For more than two decades, faculty and students have praised LiR biochemistry's matchless illustrations that make critical concepts come to life.

    Contents:
    Unit I. Protein structure and function. Amino acids ; Structure of proteins ; Globular proteins ; Fibrous proteins ; Enzymes
    Unit II. Bioenergetics and carbohydrate metabolism. Bioenergetics and oxidative phosphorylation ; Introduction to carbohydrates ; Introduction to metabolism and glycolysis ; Tricarboxylic acid cycle and pyruvate dehydrogenase complex ; Gluconeogenesis ; Glycogen metabolism ; Metabolism of monosaccharides and disaccharides ; Pentose phosphate pathway and nicotinamide adenine dinucleitide phosphate ; Glycosaminoglycans, proteoglycans, and glycoproteins
    Unit III. Lipid metabolism. Dietary lipid metabolism ; Fatty acid, ketone body, and triacylglycerol metabolism ; Phospholipid, glycosphingolipid, and eicosanoid metabolism
    Unit IV. Nitrogen metabolism. Amino acids : Disposal of nitrogen ; Amino acid degradation and synthesis ; Conversion of amino acids to specialized products ; Nucleotide metabolism
    Unit V. Integration of metabolism. Metabolic effects of insulin and glucagon ; The feed-fast cycle ; Diabetes mellitus ; Obesity ; Nutrition ; Vitamins
    Unit VI. Storage and expression of genetic information. DNA structure, replication, and repair ; RNA structure, synthesis, and processing ; Protein synthesis ; Regulation of gene expression ; Biotechnology and human disease
    Appendix: Clinical cases.
  • Digital
    Cynthia Nau Cornelissen, Marcia Metzgar Hobbs.
    Summary: Enables rapid review and assimilation of large amounts of complex information about medical microbiology. The book has the hallmark features for which Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews volumes are so popular: an outline format, full-color illustrations, end-of-chapter summaries, review questions, plus an entire section of clinical case studies with full-color illustrations.

    Contents:
    Unit I: The microbial world :
    Introduction to microbiology
    Normal flora
    Pathogenicity of mciroogranisms
    Diagnostic microbiology
    Vaccines and antimicrobial agents
    Unit II: Bacteria :
    Bacterial structure, growth, and metabolism
    Bacterial genetics
    Staphlococci
    Streptococci
    Gram-positive rods
    Neisseriae
    Gastrointestinal gram-negative rods
    Other gram-negative rods
    Clostridia and other anaerobic rods
    Spirochetes
    Mycoplasma
    Chlamydiae
    Mycobacteria and actinomycetes
    Rickettsia, ehrlichia, anaplasma, and coxiella
    Unit III: Fungi and parasites :
    Fungi
    Protozoa
    Helminths
    Unit IV: Introduction to the viruses :
    Nonenveloped DNA viruses
    Enveloped DNA viruses
    Hepatitis B and hepatitis D (Delta) viruses
    Positive-strand RNA viruses
    Retroviruses
    Negative-strand RNA viruses
    Double-stranded RNA viruses: reoviridae
    Unconventional infectious agents
    Unit V: Clinical microbiology review :
    Quick review of clinically important microogranisms
    Disease summaries
    Illustrated case studies.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2020
  • Digital
    Amy M. Karch.
    Contents:
    Patient Safety and Medication Administration
    Nursing Process Guidelines
    Pharmacologic Classes
    Alphabetical Listing of Drugs by Generic Name.
    Digital Access Ovid 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Paul Lotke, Joseph Abboud, Jack Ende.
    Summary: Part of the Primary Care Series, this 2nd edition of Lippincott's Primary Care Orthopaedics provides family practitioners, internists, nurse practitioners, physician assistants and osteopathic and chiropractic physicians with the reference source they need to confidently diagnose and treat the most common musculoskeletal patient injuries seen in an office setting. This full-color, highly illustrated volume is designed to deliver the most useful information in a consistent and easy-to-reference format. Each chapter opens with a quick synopsis of the problem, followed by treatment recommendations and clinical pearls. Important sections like "Clinical Points", "Not to be Missed", and "When to Refer" are highlighted to better guide the busy physician in making treatment decisions.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2014
  • Digital
    clinical editor, Debra P. Kantor.
    Summary: For an image-rich guide to the clinical concepts and on-the-unit skills needed to treat the major common diseases, look no further than the fully updated Lippincott Visual Nursing, 3rd Edition. Using clear, concise definitions backed by abundant images, this vital text explains disease pathophysiology, with expert guidance on anatomy, symptoms, assessment skills, and hands-on patient care. Ideal for students, new nurses, and experienced nurses needing a review, this is a must-have guide to providing appropriate, effective patient care. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Basic assessment skills / Debra Kantor
    Cardiovascular care / Celia Wells
    Respiratory care / Kathleen Lamaute
    Neurologic care / Heather Givens
    Gastrointestinal care / Angela Starkweather
    Musculoskeletal care / Maureen Cardoza
    Renal and urologic care / Debra Swenson
    Hematologic and immunologic care / Zelda Suzan
    Endocrine care / Anabel Quintanar
    Integumentary care / Angela Starkweather
    Female reproductive care / Abby Howe-Heyman
    Male reproductive care / Alaine Stadelman.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Massimo Cristofanilli, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Blood-Based Diagnostics in Solid Tumors : An Overview / Angela Toss and Massimo Cristofanilli
    2. Circulating Tumour Cells in Primary Disease : The Seed for Metastasis / Noam Falbel Ponde' and Michail Ignatiadis
    3. Enumeration and Molecular Analysis of CTCs in Metastatic Disease : The Breast Cancer Model / Cleo Parisi and Evi Lianidou
    4. Epithelial-Mesenchymal Transition (EMT) and Cancer Stem Cells (CSC's) : The Traveling Metastasis / Michal Mego, James Reuben, and Sendurai A. Mani
    5. Detecting and Monitoring Circulating Stromal Cells from Solid Tumors Using Blood-Based Biopsies in the Twenty-First Century : Have Circulating Stromal Cells Come of Age? / Daniel L. Adams and Massimo Cristofanilli
    6. Circulating Free Tumor DNA (ctDNA) : The Real-Time Liquid Biopsy / Kelly Kyker-Snowman and Ben Ho Park
    7. CTCs and ctDNA : Two Tales of a Complex Biology / Paul W. Dempsey
    8. Exosomes : The Next Small Thing / Vincent J. O'Neill.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Antonio Russo, Antonio Giordano, Christian Rolfo, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Christine D. Keating.
    Summary: Methods in Enzymology, Volume 646, continues the legacy of this premier serial with quality chapters authored by leaders in the field. Chapters in this new release include Methods for Studying RNA condensation/granules in vitro, RNA Dynamics in Intracellular Condensates, Methods for Viscoelastic Characterization of Liquid and Gel Condensates, Incorporating Proteins into Complex Coacervates, Methods for Study of Liquid-Liquid Phase Coexistence in Proximity to Lipid Membranes, Preparation of and Solute Partitioning in Multiphase Coacervates, Reversible photocontrol of DNA coacervation, Enzymatic Control over Coacervation, and much more.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Army Medical Library.
    Digital Access Google Books [1931]
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    H100 .U61 1931
    1
  • Digital/Print
    by the committee on standardization appointed by the Council of Natonal Defense.
    Digital Access Google Books 1917-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L973 .A29
    1
  • Digital
    by Saul J. Weiner, Alan Schwartz.
    Summary: Effective health care requires physicians tailor care to patients' individual life contexts, including their financial situation, social support, competing responsibilities, and cognitive abilities. Physicians, however, are poorly prepared to consider patients' lives when planning their care. The result is measurably harmful to individuals and costly to society. 'Listening for What Matters' covers 10 years of empirical research based on hundreds of recorded doctor visits by patients and undercover actors alike, which revealed a widespread disregard of patients' individual circumstances and needs resulting in inappropriate care. This book tells the stories of patients whose care was compromised by inattention to individual context, and introduces novel methods for assessing the magnitude of the problem.

    Contents:
    Observing the problem
    Measuring the problem
    The problem is everywhere
    What we hear that physicians don't
    Causes
    Better teaching, better doctors
    Is lasting change possible?
    What we can't measure that matters
    Bringing context back into care.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Kieran Jordan, Edward M. Fox, Martin Wagner.
    Summary: Listeria monocytogenes is still a major threat to public health. A new book in the Methods in Molecular Biology series, Listeria monocytogenes: Methods and Protocols addresses its titular pathogen with protocols and methodologies used in research to gain a better understanding of Listeria at a molecular level. The topics covered include sampling in order to isolate Listeria, methods for their identification and characterization, methods for gene manipulation, and, finally, methods for control of the organism. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective subjects, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Vital and authoritative, Listeria monocytogenes: Methods and Protocols aims to contribute to the harmonization of the methods used in the field and will therefore benefit all those interested in Listeria research.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Susan W. Buchholz, Kirsten A. Dickins.
    Summary: "This book is written to be used by healthcare undergraduate and graduate students, as well as nurses and other healthcare and health policy professionals to easily follow towards completing one's own literature review and synthesis. We attempt to include the many types of literature reviews that commonly provide information for healthcare professionals. While systematic reviews are imperative to clinical decision making, we highlight other types of literature reviews that are essential to holistically incorporating multiple study types and diverse forms of information. We provide references to well-known, as well as lesser-known resources that inform the literature review and synthesis process"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to literature review and synthesis
    Literature review and synthesis typology
    Preparing for the literature review and synthesis
    Searching the literature
    Screening, appraising, and extracting the literature
    Synthesizing the literature
    Publishing your literature review
    Literature review and synthesis implications on healthcare research, practice, policy, and public messaging.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    Jean Anderson Eloy, Peter F. Svider, Soly Baredes, Shawn P. Kelly, editors.
    Summary: This text, edited by experienced academic and private otolaryngologists at different points in their careers, as well as an attorney, reviews the current literature related to otolaryngology malpractice litigation, and discusses strategies to decrease liability and enhance patient safety. It examines the most recent trial decisions in otolaryngology and determines which procedures are most commonly litigated in the current medicolegal environment. The text provides otolaryngologists with tips and pearls on how to prevent malpractice litigation, and discusses key actions to take when faced with malpractice litigation. Strategies for minimizing liability as well as the factors brought up in malpractice litigation related to otolaryngology head and neck surgery are also discussed. Litigation in Otolaryngology will be a useful resource for all involved in the care of otolaryngologic patients (physicians, nurse practitioners, physician assistants, etc.), those concerned with the legal aspect of such care (including malpractice attorneys), and healthcare policy makers.

    Contents:
    Section I: General Considerations
    Overview of Malpractice
    History of Malpractice
    Pearls for Preventing Litigation
    Informed Consent
    Differences Based on Practice Setting
    Understanding your Malpractice Insurance Policy
    Section II: Considerations Specific to Otolaryngology-Head and Neck Surgery
    Malpractice in Outpatient Otolaryngology
    Malpractice in Otology/Ear Surgery
    Malpractice in Skull Base Surgery
    Malpractice in Laryngology and Voice Disorders
    Malpractice in Rhinology and Nasal Surgery
    Malpractice in Pediatric Otolaryngology
    Malpractice in Sleep Surgery
    Malpractice in Reconstructive Surgery
    Malpractice in Aesthetic Surgery and Procedures
    Anesthesia-Related Considerations
    Section III: Miscellaneous Topics
    Expert Witness Testimony
    Malpractice as it Relates to Veterans Administration Hospitals
    Litigation as it Relates to Trainee Participation
    Surviving a Malpractice Case
    Illustrative Examples of Some Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ronald S. Litman, Aditee Ambardekar.
    Summary: Written in clear, concise language for superb readability, Litman's Basics of Pediatric Anesthesia, 3rd Edition, provides a solid foundation of essential knowledge in this complex field. It covers everything from general pediatric physiology and pharmacology principles through important pediatric diseases; preoperative, intraoperative, and postoperative care; anesthesia for a full range of specific surgical procedures; pain management; and critical care. An excellent resource for learners of pediatric anesthesia, this tightly focused, user-friendly handbook is a well-regarded resource that has been used to train pediatric residents throughout the world. Covers new topics such as the current research on neurotoxicity and health care disparities in pediatric anesthesia and pain. Contains new "Deep Dive boxes with more detailed information on key topics throughout the book. Features a helpful introductory chapter on congenital heart disease. Includes carefully chosen seminal articles from the pediatric anesthesia literature. Highlights key concepts with photographs, diagrams, and radiographic images in print, as well as videos. Ideal for rotations in pediatric anesthesia, board certification or recertification review in pediatric anesthesia, and as a reference for everyday clinical practice.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Kerr, A. Ross; Falace, Donald A.; Little, James W.; Little, James W.; Miller, Craig S.; Rhodus, Nelson L.; Stoopler, Eric T.; Treister, Nathaniel S.
    Summary: "Little and Falace’s Dental Management of the Medically Compromised Patient, 10th Edition, is thoroughly revised to provide the information needed to assess common problems and make safe dental management decisions. This new edition contains revised content on Cancer and Women’s Health and includes an enhanced ebook plus patient-based practice questions with print purchase. Also, each chapter features informative illustrations and well-organized tables to provide you with in-depth details and overall summaries required for understanding and applying medical concepts in dentistry." -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    edited by Osama O. Zaidat, Alan J. Lerner, J.Douglas Miles.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Lora D. Delwiche and Susan J. Slaughter.
    Summary: A classic that just keeps getting better, The Little SAS Book is essential for anyone learning SAS programming. Lora Delwiche and Susan Slaughter offer a user-friendly approach so that readers can quickly and easily learn the most commonly used features of the SAS language. Each topic is presented in a self-contained, two-page layout complete with examples and graphics. Nearly every section has been revised to ensure that the sixth edition is fully up-to-date. This edition is also interface-independent, written for all SAS programmers whether they use SAS Studio, SAS Enterprise Guide, or the S.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; Acknowledgments; Introducing SAS Software; About This Book; About These Authors; Getting Started Using SAS Software; 1.1 The SAS Language; 1.2 SAS Data Sets; 1.3 DATA and PROC Steps; 1.4 The DATA Step's Built-in Loop; 1.5 Choosing a Method for Running SAS; 1.6 Reading the SAS Log; 1.7 Using SAS System Options; Accessing Your Data; 2.1 Methods for Getting Your Data into SAS; 2.2 SAS Data Libraries and Data Sets; 2.3 Listing the Contents of a SAS Data Set; 2.4 Reading Excel Files with the IMPORT Procedure; 2.5 Accessing Excel Files Using the XLSX LIBNAME Engine 2.6 Reading Delimited Files with the IMPORT Procedure2.7 Telling SAS Where to Find Your Raw Data; 2.8 Reading Raw Data Separated by Spaces; 2.9 Reading Raw Data Arranged in Columns; 2.10 Reading Raw Data Not in Standard Format; 2.11 Selected Informats; 2.12 Mixing Input Styles; 2.13 Reading Messy Raw Data; 2.14 Reading Multiple Lines of Raw Data per Observation; 2.15 Reading Multiple Observations per Line of Raw Data; 2.16 Reading Part of a Raw Data File; 2.17 Controlling Input with Options in the INFILE Statement; 2.18 Reading Delimited Files with the DATA Step; Working with Your Data 3.1 Using the DATA Step to Modify Data3.2 Creating and Modifying Variables; 3.3 Using SAS Functions; 3.4 Selected SAS Character Functions; 3.5 Selected SAS Numeric Functions; 3.6 Using IF-THEN and DO Statements; 3.7 Grouping Observations with IF-THEN/ELSE Statements; 3.8 Subsetting Your Data in a DATA Step; 3.9 Subsetting Your Data using PROC SQL; 3.10 Writing Multiple Data Sets Using OUTPUT Statements; 3.11 Making Several Observations from One Using OUTPUT Statements; 3.12 Using Iterative DO, DO WHILE, and DO UNTIL Statements; 3.13 Working with SAS Dates 3.14 Selected Date Informats, Functions, and Formats3.15 Using RETAIN and Sum Statements; 3.16 Simplifying Programs with Arrays; 3.17 Using Shortcuts for Lists of Variable Names; 3.18 Using Variable Names with Special Characters; Sorting, Printing, and Summarizing Your Data; 4.1 Using SAS Procedures; 4.2 Subsetting in Procedures with the WHERE Statement; 4.3 Sorting Your Data with PROC SORT; 4.4 Changing the Sort Order for Character Data; 4.5 Printing Your Data with PROC PRINT; 4.6 Changing the Appearance of Data Values with Formats; 4.7 Selected Standard Formats 4.8 Creating Your Own Formats with PROC FORMAT4.9 Writing a Report to a Text File; 4.10 Summarizing Your Data Using PROC MEANS; 4.11 Writing Summary Statistics to a SAS Data Set; 4.12 Producing One-Way Frequencies with PROC FREQ; 4.13 Producing Crosstabulations with PROC FREQ; 4.14 Grouping Data with User-Defined Formats; 4.15 Producing Tabular Reports with PROC TABULATE; 4.16 Adding Statistics to PROC TABULATE Output; 4.17 Enhancing the Appearance of PROC TABULATE Output; 4.18 Changing Headers in PROC TABULATE Output; 4.19 Producing Simple Output with PROC REPORT
    Digital Access O'Reilly 2019
  • Digital
    Susan J. Slaughter and Lora D. Delwiche.
    Summary: Whether you are using SAS Enterprise Guide for the first time, or are looking to expand your skills, this book provides a series of carefully designed tutorials to help you master the basics of the tasks you'll want to do most frequently. -- Edited summary from book.

    Contents:
    Tutorial A: Getting started with SAS Enterprise Guide
    Tutorial B: Creating reports
    Tutorial C: Working with data in the query builder
    Tutorial D: Joining two data tables together
    Ch. 1: SAS Enterprise Guide basics
    Ch. 2: Bringing data into a project
    Ch. 3: Working with tasks
    Ch. 4: Producing complex reports in summary tables
    Ch. 5: Modifying data using the query builder
    Ch. 6: Sorting and filtering data
    Ch. 7: Combining data tables
    Ch. 8: Working with SAS programs.
    Digital Access Ebsco 2017
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Grant T. Liu, Nicholas L. Volpe, Steven L. Galetta.
    Summary: "Liu, Volpe, and Galetta's Neuro-Ophthalmology: Diagnosis and Management, 3rd Edition remains unique in its complete, authoritative coverage of the diagnosis and treatment of neurological disorders affecting the eye. Bridging the gap between a handbook and an encyclopedic resource, it distills a vast amount of information into a single, concise, superbly illustrated volume. User-friendly and thoroughly up to date, this highly renowned reference is a one-stop resource for current information in this growing area. Combines over 1,000 illustrations and cross references with tables, outlines, and flow-diagrams to provide you with everything you need to understand the underlying presentation, pathophysiology, neuroimaging, and diagnostic studies in neuro-ophthalmology, along with the ideal diagnostic, treatment, and ongoing management tools for all neuro-ophthalmic conditions. Covers the neurological examination and the bedside neuro-ophthalmic evaluation of comatose patients that demonstrates how the examination can be used to confirm a diagnosis arrived at from the patient history. Includes the expertise and knowledge of a small, hand-picked contributor team that ensure the latest advances are incorporated into each chapter. Contains increased coverage on the use of optical coherence tomography (OCT) and its role in revolutionizing the ability to make more accurate neuro-ophthalmic diagnoses. Provides all-new information on gaze disorders, nystagmus, and neuro-ophthalmic manifestations of demyelinating disease. Presents current knowledge on vestibular disease and the neuro-ophthalmic manifestations of head trauma, as well as brainstem, cerebellar, and degenerative diseases"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    I. History and examination. The neuro-ophthalmic history
    The neuro-ophthalmic examination
    II. Visual loss and other disorders of the afferent visual pathway. Visual loss: overview, visual field testing and topical diagnosis
    Visual loss: retinal disorders of neuro-ophthalmic interest
    Visual loss: optic neuropathies
    Optic disc swelling: papillederma and other causes
    Visual loss: chiasmal disorders
    Retrochiasmal disorders
    Disorders of higher cortical visual function
    Transient visual loss or blurring
    Functional visual loss
    Visual hallucinations and illusions
    III. Efferent neuro-ophthalmic disorders. Pupillary disorders
    Eyelid and facial nerve disorders
    Eye movement disorders: third, fourth and sixth nerve palsies and other causes of diplopia and ocular misalignment
    Eye movement disorders: gaze abnormalities
    Eye movement disoders: nystagmus and nystagmoid eye movements
    Orbital disease in neuro-ophthalmology
    IV. Other topics. Headache, facial pain and disorders of facial sensation.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Vinood B. Patel, Rajkumar Rajendram, Victor R. Preedy.
    Summary: "The Liver: Oxidative Stress and Dietary Antioxidants takes a novel approach to the science of oxidative stress in liver disease by recognizing that diseases are multifactorial and oxidative stress is a single component. It highlights oxidative stress in relation to other processes, such as apoptosis, cell signaling and receptor mediated responses, and includes the therapeutic usage of natural antioxidants in the diet and food matrix, along with coverage of pharmacological and natural agents designed to counteract oxidative stress. Written for research scientists, gastroenterologists, food scientists, hepatologists and physicians, this trans-disciplinary guide will help advance medical sciences and enable new preventative and treatment strategies.Provides a framework for in-depth analysis of the basic processes of oxidative stress, from molecular biology, to whole organs in relation to the liver. Bridges the trans-disciplinary divide between the basic science and mechanisms of liver disease and oxidative stress to advance medical sciences and enable preventative and treatment strategies. Contains contributions from leading national and international experts, including those from world renowned institutions"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Oxidative Stress in Hepatitis C Infection / Alexander V. Ivanov, Olga A. Khomich, Birke Bartosch
    2. Role of Paraoxonase 1 as an Antioxidant in Nonalcoholic Steatohepatitis / Sarita Singhal, Susan S. Baker, Robert D. Baker, Lixin Zhu
    3. Alterations in Nucleocytoplasmic Localization of the Methionine Cycle Induced by Oxidative Stress During Liver Disease / Dolores Pérez-Sala, Óscar H. Martínez-Costa, Juan J. Aragón, María A. Pajares
    4. Oxidative Stress in Iron Toxicity of the Liver / Kosha Mehta
    5. Cardiac Glycosides and Oxidative Stress in Liver Cancer / Rengul Cetin Atalay, Irem Durmaz
    6. Acetaldehyde Effects on Cellular Redox State / Arturo Simoni-Nieves, Denise Clavijo-Cornejo, María C. Gutiérrez-Ruiz, Luis E. Gomez-Quiroz
    7. The Role of Glyoxalase-I in Oxidant Stress of Liver Damage / Marcus Hollenbach, Alexander Zipprich
    8. Reactive Oxygen and Nitrogen Species and Liver Ischemia-Reperfusion Injury: An Overview / Fabienne T.E. Alban, Daniel Gyamfi, Rowan F. van Golen, Michal Heger
    9. Reactive Oxygen and Nitrogen Species and Liver Ischemia- Reperfusion Injury: Role of Glutamine / Fabienne T.E. Alban, Daniel Gyamfi, Rowan F. van Golen, Michal Heger
    10. Reactive Oxygen and Nitrogen Species and Liver Ischemia-Reperfusion Injury: Role of Lipoic Acid / Fabienne T.E. Alban, Daniel Gyamfi, Rowan F. van Golen, Michal Heger
    11. Oxidative Stress as a Crucial Factor in Liver Associated Disorders: Potential Therapeutic Effect of Antioxidants / Hanaa A. Hassan
    12. l-NAME as a Synthetic Antioxidant in Liver Injuries / Adnan Ayhancı, Sıla Appak, Mustafa Cengiz
    13. Chemoprotective Role of Vitamin C in Liver Diseases / Jose J.G. Marin, Maria J. Perez, Maria A. Serrano, Rocio I.R. Macias
    14. Protective Role of Lycopene Against Oxidative Stress in Liver / Kazim Sahin, Hasan Gencoglu, Birdal Bilir, Omer Kucuk
    15. Vitamin E Protection Against Hyperthyroidism-Induced Liver Oxidative Stress / Venditti Paola, Daniela Barone, Napolitano Gaetana
    16. Citric Acid an Antioxidant in Liver / Omar M.E. Abdel-Salam, Nermeen M. Shaffie, Enayat A. Omara, Noha N. Yassen
    17. Resveratrol and Protection in Hepatic Steatosis: Antioxidant Effects / Alfredo Fernández-Quintela, Marcela González, Leixuri Aguirre, Iñaki Milton-Laskibar, Asier Léniz, Maria P. Portillo
    18. Astaxanthin, a Marine Carotenoid Against Hepatic Oxidative Stress: a Systematic Review / Carani V. Anuradha
    19. Effect of Melatonin as an Antioxidant in the Liver / Vijay K. Bharti, Arup Giri, Rajendra S. Srivastava
    20. The Liver: Oxidative Stress and Dietary Antioxidants / G. Smilin Bell Aseervatham, D. Arul Ananth, T. Sivasudha
    21. Endogenous Mitochondrial Aldehyde Dehydrogenase-2 as an Antioxidant in Liver / Yanfeng Wang, Weiyang He
    22. Comparing Antioxidants in Liver Disease: l-Carnitine, N-Acetylcysteine, and Genistein / Kaan Demiroren
    23. The Hepatoprotective Effects of Coenzyme Q10 Against Oxidative Stress / Farnaz Farsi, Pezhman Alavi Nezhad, Nava Morshedzadeh
    24. Carnosine as a Putative Antioxidant in Usage Against Liver Disease / Semra Doğru-Abbasoğlu, Necla Koçak-Toker, Müjdat Uysal --25. Dioscin as a Natural Saponin and Protection in Oxidative Stress in Hepatic Fibrosis / Jinyong Peng, Xufeng Tao
    26. Gallic Acid as a Putative Antioxidant in Usage Against Liver Disease / Mayela Govea-Salas, Ana M. Rivas-Estilla, Juan Ascacio-Valdés, Alejandro Zugasti-Cruz, Raul Rodríguez-Herrera, Ruth Belmares-Cerda, Jesus Morlett-Chávez
    27. Oleuropein as an Antioxidant and Liver Protect / Seung K. Yoon
    28. Garlic and Liver Diseases / Liangliang Zou, Rui Zhang, Hao Gao, Jia Xiao, George L. Tipoe
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Gebhard Wagener, editor.
    Summary: Providing anesthesiology for liver surgery and especially liver transplantation is highly complex and requires profound expertise in the physiology and pathophysiology of liver disease. This new edition incorporates the latest information in the field and remains the only available book on the topic. It focuses on the practical aspect of liver anesthesiology and critical care, while providing a comprehensive and in depth summary of the knowledge in this field. Most liver transplant centers now have dedicated teams providing anesthesia care during liver transplantations. In the last years there has been a substantial increase in knowledge and improvement in techniques in anesthesiology and critical care of patients undergoing liver surgery and transplant patients. Liver Anesthesiology and Critical Care Medicine, 2nd Edition includes new chapters on chronic liver failure and hepatic cirrhosis, preoperative risk assessment, evidence in liver anesthesiology, the splanchnic and systemic circulation in liver disease and a special focus on analgesia for liver resection including regional techniques. Written for anesthesiologists and critical care physicians caring for patients undergoing liver surgery and transplantation, this book proves to be an essential companion and review book as the number of liver surgeries with higher complexity continue to increase.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Brian I. Carr, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to illuminate the causes, incidence, and treatments of Hepatocellular Carcinoma(HCC) or liver cancer in the politically important and societally diverse region of the Middle East. Taking a flexible and inclusive view, it examines the influences of geography, crops and diet, ethnicity, and local behavior on both diagnosis and outcomes of this disease. Understanding the different causes of liver cancer enables effective strategies for both prevention and early diagnosis while knowledge of the different treatment modalities, their uses and limitations, availability and costs, works to inform rational treatment provision and selection. Divided into four sections, this book considers the causes and clinical syndromes associated with HCC, provides a detailed overview of clinical HCC and treatment modalities, describes country-specific clinical HCC experience and practice, and considers future needs and the potential for HCC collaborations across the region. Liver Cancer in the Middle East is a useful resource for clinicians seeking insight into the second highest cause of death from cancer worldwide, governments planning social and medical services for their peoples, as well as for international aid agencies prioritizing donations.

    Contents:
    Biological Aspects of HCC
    Changing Etiology and Epidemiology of Human Liver Cancer
    Hepatocarcinogenesis Induced by Environmental
    Exposures in the Middle East
    Obesity and Hepatocellular Carcinoma : Epidemiology and Mechanisms
    Epidemiology of Hepatitis B Virus in the Middle East
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma in the United Arab Emirates
    Overview of Clinical HCC and its Management
    Cost Effective
    Therapies for HCC: Resection and Ablation
    Transarterial Radioembolization in Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Intra-arterial Chemotherapy and
    Transarterial Chemoembolization in Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Radiotherapy for Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Liver Transplantation in Middle East
    Individual Patient Assessment and Therapy Decision-Making in a Live Donor-Based Liver Transplant Institute
    Hepatocellular Cancer in Iran
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma In Kuwait
    Insights on Hepatocellular carcinoma in Saudi Arabia
    Hepatitis C induced Hepatocellular Carcinoma in the Middle East
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma in the Middle East: An Overview
    Current HCC Clinical and Research in Egypt
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma in Turkey - A Review of Disease Epidemiology and Treatment Outcomes
    Targeting c-Met and AXL Crosstalk for the Treatment of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma in Morocco
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma in Lebanon and its Association with Thalassemia
    An Overview of Hepatocellular Carcinoma (HCC) in Lebanon: a focus on hepatitis B and thalassemia-related HCC
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma in Pakistan: An Update
    Future Directions
    The Need for Region-Wide HCC Collaborations.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Stanley Martin Cohen, Perica Davitkov, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nedim Hadžić, Marianne Samyn, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the clinical management of adolescents with liver disease bridging the gap between pediatric and adult hepatology patient management. Expert views on liver disease in adolescence are discussed and specific differences for this patient subset are highlighted and examined in depth. The reader will gain the specific knowledge required on pathophysiology and treatment, but also about additional aspects such as psychological difficulties and cultural differences including use of social media. Information is presented in a manner relevant to clinical practice, and is fully up-to-date in terms of development and integration of new communication technologies in the society. This book offers a fresh insight to this transitional period which will be a great benefit to hepatologists both in pediatric and adult setting. Edited by two experts in the field and authored by international experts in the area using a multidisciplinary approach, this book is a helpful tool in managing these complex patients and will help minimise their complication rates and improve outcomes by the end of their transition periods.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The impact of liver disease on adolescent development
    a. Adolescent development
    b. Impact of liver disease on adolescent development
    i. Biological impact including growth and nutrition
    ii. Psycho-social impact
    Specific liver diseases
    a. Biliary atresia
    b. Alagille syndrome
    c. Alpha 1 antitrypsin deficiency
    d. Genetic cholestatic disorders
    e. Autoimmune hepatitis and sclerosing cholangitis
    f. Wilson disease
    g. Non-alcoholic fatty liver disease
    h. Portal hypertension
    i. Cystic fibrosis
    j. Sickle cell disease
    Liver transplantation in adolescence
    a. Listing for liver transplantation: criteria, timing and waitlist, Re-transplantation
    b. Long-term patient and graft outcome
    Challenges for adolescents and young adults with liver disease
    a. Adherence to treatment
    b. Mental health problems
    c. Health related quality of life
    d. Education and employment
    e. Alcohol and recreational drugs
    f. Fertility and pregnancy
    Provision of youth friendly liver services beyond transition
    a. Engaging young people: communication skills
    b. Development of self-management skills
    c. Peer support
    d. Models of care for adolescents and young adults including transition from paediatric to adult care
    What is it like to .
    a. be young and have a liver disease?
    b. be a parent of a young person with liver disease
    c. look after a young person with liver disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Frederick J. Suchy, Ronald J. Sokol, William F. Balistreri, Jorge A. Bezerra, Cara L. Mack, Benjamin L. Shneider.
    Summary: "The essential liver endocrine and exocrine functions require a precise spatial arrangement of the repeated hepatic lobule consisting of the central vein, portal vein, hepatic artery, intrahepatic bile duct system, and hepatocyte zonation. This allows 1. blood to be carried through the liver parenchyma and sampled by all hepatocytes, 2. hepatocytes to uptake metabolites and toxins from the blood for metabolizing and detoxification from their basal sinusoidal side, and 3. hepatocytes to produce and secrete bile from their apical canalicular side to be carried out of the liver through the biliary (i.e., intrahepatic bile duct) system composed of biliary epithelial cells (i.e., cholangiocytes)"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    Tim Cross, editor.
    Summary: This pocket guide covers the common manifestations of liver disease, how to treat them and when to refer patients on to specialist centers. The book outlines the common clinical liver diseases such as fatty liver disease and hepatitis, among others, and their current up to date management. Written by experts in the field and containing figures and tables, as well as case histories and questions, this is an enjoyable and reader-friendly book for the busy physician. With its authoritative, didactic style and short chapters, it covers the common presentations and complications of liver disease, and how to deal with them. Given the increasing prevalence of liver disease in the UK and throughout Western Europe, this is an ideal reference book for primary care physicians, doctors in specialist training, clinical nurse specialists and for gastroenterologists, who see patients with liver disease in their working lives.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Clinical manifestations and approach to liver disease
    Assessment of liver function
    Liver Decompensation and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Portal hypertension
    Hepatic encephalopathy
    Nutritional management of end-stage liver disease
    Part 2: Liver diseases of lifestyle, genes and metabolism
    Alcoholic liver disease
    Non-alcoholic fatty liver disease
    Genetic haemochromatosis
    The Orphan Liver Diseases
    Part 3: Viral liver disease
    Chronic hepatitis B
    Chronic hepatitis C
    Part 4: Immune mediated liver disease
    Autoimmune hepatitis and cross-over syndromes
    Primary biliary cholangitis
    Primary sclerosing cholangitis
    Section 5: Areas of special consideration
    Pregnancy and liver disease
    Hepatocellular carcinoma
    Liver transplantation
    The hepatological curiosities
    End of life care for patients with liver disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Tim Cross, editor.
    Summary: The new edition of this pocket guide has been fully updated to cover the common manifestations of liver disease, how to treat them and when to refer patients on to specialist centers. New chapters on Acute Liver Failure, Nutrition and Congenital Heart Disease have been added to reflect the key issues in management of liver diseases. The book outlines the common clinical liver diseases such as fatty liver disease and viral hepatitis, among others, and their current up to date management. Written by experts in the field and containing figures and tables, as well as case histories and questions, this is an enjoyable and reader-friendly book for the busy physician. With its authoritative, didactic style and short chapters, it covers the common presentations and complications of liver disease, and how to deal with them. Given the increasing prevalence of liver disease in the UK and Worldwide, this is an ideal reference book for primary care physicians, doctors in specialist training, clinical nurse specialists and for gastroenterologists, who see patients with liver disease in their working lives.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Assessment of Liver Function
    Chapter 2. Acute Liver Failure
    Chapter 3. Drug-induced Liver Injury
    Chapter 4. Liver Decompensation and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Chapter 5. Portal Hypertension: Varices
    Chapter 6. Frailty and Sarcopenia in Cirrhosis
    Chapter 7. Non-Alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease
    Chapter 8. Chronic hepatitis B
    Chapter 9. Chronic Hepatitis C
    Chapter 10. Autoimmune Hepatitis and Overlap Syndromes
    Chapter 11. IgG4 related hepato-pancreato-biliary disease
    Chapter 12. Hereditary Haemochromatosis
    Chapter 13. Pregnancy and Liver Disease
    Chapter 14. The Orphan Liver Disease
    Chapter 15. Fontan Associated Liver Disease (FALD)
    Chapter 16. Diagnosis and Management of Hepatocellular carcinoma
    Chapter 17. Liver transplantation
    Chapter 18. The Hepatological Curiosities.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Florentina Radu-Ionita, Nikolaos T. Pyrsopoulos, Mariana Jinga, Ion C. Tintoiu, Zhonghua Sun, Ecaterina Bontas, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth coverage not only of liver pathology but also of diagnosis of the numerous types of liver disease , placing specific emphasis on current treatments of liver pathology including the most up-to-date information on liver transplantation. The first part of provides an in-depth account of the liver pathology in different conditions such as Hepatits, liver ischaemia reperfusion injury, Lyme disease, cirrhotic cardiomyopathy and hepatocellular carcinoma. The second part provides a comprehensive overview of diagnostic methods. Of particular interest are chapters on the latest techniques in Patient-specific 3D printing and transient elastography (FibroScan). The final part focuses on treatment and provides a step-by step guide to the therapeutic management of liver diseases starting with pharmacological treatment and techniques including surgery and liver transplantation. This is an invaluable book for clinicians, practitioners including academics, scientists/researchers and postgraduates to provide the newest knowledge in the field of liver pathogenesis. It is written by a multidisciplinary team of experts in hepathology, gastroenterology, and surgery especially from liver transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Philippe Jouvet, Fernando Alvarez, editors.
    Summary: In recent years, substantial progress has been made in the approaches to diagnosis and treatment of severe liver diseases in the pediatric ICU, from various forms of liver failure and hepatitis to acute and chronic liver disease. New techniques and tools are being utilized to prevent patients from experiencing complications and for patients in recovery from operations on the native or donor liver. This book describes the clinical presentation and management of liver diseases in the intensive care unit with the pediatric patient in mind. In addition, advances in bone marrow transplantation, cardiac-generated liver disorders and new therapeutic approaches, such as artificial liver support, are discussed in detail. Presenting the current available knowledge in a compelling form, Liver Diseases in the Pediatric Intensive Care Unit is a valuable resource for pediatric gastroenterologists and hepatologists, pediatricians and intensivists.

    Contents:
    Liver injury and failure in critically ill children
    Acute liver failure
    Acute-on-chronic liver disease
    Liver failure and the brain
    Liver failure and the kidneys
    Liver failure and extracorporeal therapies
    Liver failure and the lungs
    Liver failure and the heart
    Liver failure and hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    Liver transplantation in critically children.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Nikolaos Pyrsopoulos, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive overview of liver failure including Epidemiology, mechanism of the disease, and its clinical manifestations. The diagnosis of numerous types of liver disease leading to liver failure; with specific emphasis on the current and future treatment modalities including up-to-date and extensive information on liver transplantation. It provides the most up-to-date information on liver failure for clinicians, practitioners including GPs, scientists/researchers, postgraduates and allied health professionals. It features an overview of the relevant classification and epidemiologic aspects of acute liver failure along with a thorough review of the mechanisms associated with acute liver failure and multisystemic involvement. Detailed guidance is also provided on the latest treatment techniques including those available for liver transplantation and potential future approaches, enabling the reader to develop a detailed understanding of the topic. Liver Failure: Acute and Acute on Chronic provides a practically applicable guide to the epidemiology and management of liver failure. It features contributions from an outstanding panel of experts in hepatology, gastroenterology and surgery making it a vital up-to-date reference for trainee and practicing medical professionals in a variety of disciplines who encounter these patients.

    Contents:
    Preface: Acute Liver Failure and Acute on Chronic
    Classification and Epidemiologic Aspects of Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure: Mechanisms of Disease and Multisystemic Involvement
    The Pathology of Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Liver Regeneration in the Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure Patient
    Viral Hepatitis and Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure: Still a Problem
    Nonacetaminophen Drug-Induced Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Acetaminophen (APAP or N-Acetyl-p-Aminophenol) and Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Nonviral or Drug-Induced Etiologies of Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure: Alcoholic Hepatitis
    The Clinical Spectrum and Manifestations of Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Prognostic Models in Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Non-Intensive Care Unit Management of Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Management of Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure in the Intensive Care Unit Setting
    Liver Transplantation for Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure
    Future Approaches and Therapeutic Modalities for Acute and Acute on Chronic Liver Failure.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    M. Eric Gershwin, John M. Vierling and Michael P. Manns, editors.
    Summary: Liver Immunology: Principles and Practice, Second Editionbegins with important information about the epidemiology and mortality of liver disease worldwide. This information is followed by chapters related to basic immunology, application of liver immunology for diagnosis, and several excellent chapters thatprovide a solid foundation for understanding immune-mediated liver disease, including those associated with the biliary tree. A chapter on non-hepatic manifestations of immune mediatedliver disease helps provide context for how these diseases affect the patient overall. In addition, chapters discuss various discrete immunologically-mediated infectious liver disorders including those related to bacteria, parasites, and all of the classic viruses. Chapters on the traditional autoimmune liver diseases -- primary biliary cirrhosis, autoimmune hepatitis, primary sclerosing cholangitis as well as overlap syndrome are also included. The breadth of this comprehensive second edition is highlighted by chapters on alcoholic liver disease, non-alcoholic fatty liver disease, and drug-induced liver disease, among others. This invaluable new edition ends with a forward-looking view of future directions and how the field might meet the challenge of refractory patients. Developed by a renowned group of authors, Liver Immunology: Principles and Practice, Second Editionwill again serve as a comprehensive textbook by providing an excellent overview for this rapidly evolving field. It greatly adds to the understanding of the pathogenesis of these diseases, while also providing novel insights that can be harnessed into helping improve the care of patients afflicted with various immune-mediated diseases. This volume will again be a must-read for clinicians at all levels, investigators and students.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Hiromasa Ohira.
    Contents:
    Part I. Basics
    Chapter 1. Innate Immunity and Liver
    Chapter 2. Microbiota and Liver
    Chapter 3. Spleen and Liver
    Chapter 4. The Brain and Liver
    Chapter 5. Glucose Metabolism and Liver
    Chapter 6. Lipid Metabolism and the Liver
    Chapter 7. Metal Metabolism and Liver
    Part II. Clinical Research
    Chapter 8. Metabolic Syndrome and Liver
    Chapter 9. Heart Diseases and Liver
    Chapter 10. Respiratoly Diseases and Liver
    Chapter 11 Physiological and Pathological Interactions Between Liver and Kidney
    Chapter 12. Endocrine Diseases and Liver
    Chapter 13. Rheumatic Diseases and the Liver
    Chapter 14. Hematologic Diseases and Liver
    Chapter 15. IgG4-related Diseases and the Liver
    Chapter 16. Infectious Diseases (Non-hepatitis Virus Infection) and Liver.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Georgios S. Limouris, editor.
    Summary: This book describes in detail a clinical project that reveals the tumoricidal efficacy of Auger and internal conversion electrons, emitted from n.c.a. 111In and implemented in oncology as a treating armamentarium for peptide receptor radionuclide therapy (PRRT), targeting small size (² d"20 mm) tumors and micro-metastases. The keen interest in n.c.a. 111In began when it was observed that its Auger electron emission could be highly radiotoxic, due to its high LET when it decayed in the vicinity of cellular DNA. The somatostatin analog octreotide, labeled with [111In-diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA0-D-Phe1)] is an established diagnostic agent for the imaging of somatostatin receptor-positive neuro- (or non-neuro) endocrine tumors. It relies on receptor-mediated binding, internalization and installation in the lysosomes in the proximity of the nucleus; administered in large doses, loco-regionally, via the feeding artery of solid tumors, can be highly radiotoxic if they over-express somatostatin receptors, mainly of the sst2 histotype. The book compares the results between i.v. and i.a. implementation in more than 80 patients after over 800 i.a. infusions in neuroendocrine tumors, meningiomas, paragangliomas and colorectal carcinomas in a single Institute (Aretaieion University Hospital) and encourages the i.a. way, leading to tumor melting while minimizing the toxicity to healthy peritumoral liver tissue and critical organs (kidneys and bone marrow). The volume is an invaluable tool for nuclear medicine physicians, interventional radiologists and oncologists dealing with radiopeptide therapies.

    Contents:
    The efficacy of auger and internal conversion electron emission 0f in-111 to treat neuroendocrine tumors
    Somatostatin
    Gastro-entero-pancreatic neuroendocrine tumors
    [111in-dtpa0-d-phe1] - octreotide: the ligand -the receptor-label
    Regulations and requirements of hospitals performing radio-infusions
    Intravenous radio-peptide infusion with in-octreotide
    Intra-arterial radio-peptide infusion
    Radio-peptide infusions after implementation of an intra-arterial port system
    US, CT and MRI for the evaluation of patients with neuroendocrine tumors
    Angiographic anatomy on the course of liver intra-arterial infusion
    Liver radio-infusions: identifying anatomic variants
    Dosimetry and dose calculation: its necessity in radio-peptide therapy
    Evaluation and assessment of the radio-peptide treatment efficacy
    Intra-venous radio-peptide infusions with in-octreotide for the treatment of bronchial carcinoids
    Intra-arterial radio - peptide infusions for the treatment of colorectal carcinomas
    Intra-arterial radio-peptide infusions for the treatment of paragangliomas
    Intra-arterial radio-peptide infusions for the treatment of brain meningiomas
    Surgery in neuroendocrine tumors
    Cytoreductive surgery combined with intraperitoneal [111in-dtpa0 d-phe1]-octreotide infusions in neuroendocrine character metastases
    Patients survival followed intra-arterial versus intravenous infusions
    Complications and side effects on the course of liver-radio-infusions
    Progression free survival and response rate in neuroendocrine liver metastasized patients, treated with in-111 octreotide
    Therapy response vs variability of tumor size, absorbed dose, and ki-67 index after in-111 octreotide intra-arterial infusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Shahid M. Hussain, Michael F. Sorrell ; forewords by Willis C. Maddrey and Richard C. Semelka.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Maura O'Neil, Ivan Damjanov, Ryan M. Taylor.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Pablo Muriel.
    Contents:
    Section I. Introduction
    Section II. Liver pathophysiology
    Section III. Liver metabolism
    Section IV. Cirrhosis and its complications
    Section V. Methods in liver disease
    Section VI. Therapies in liver disease.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by José Ignacio Bilbao, Maximilian F. Reiser.
    Summary: This is the second edition of a very well received book devoted specifically to the treatment of liver tumors by radioembolization with 90Y microspheres. The success of the first edition was based on the provision of all the fundamental information required for successful use of this therapeutic modality in clinical practice. The new edition has been fully updated to cover the most recent advances and includes additional chapters on regulations and emerging trends. Detailed information is provided on the full range of relevant topics, including hepatic vascular anatomy (including variants), dosimetry, assessment of tumor response, and the results achieved using radioembolization alone and in combination with other treatments in patients with primary or metastatic disease. Complications and side-effects are also fully discussed. This book will prove immensely valuable for both beginners and practitioners.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by James Neuberger, James Ferguson, Philip N. Newsome, Michael Ronan Lucey.
    Summary: "Welcome to the second edition of Liver Transplantation. Since the first edition, there have been many changes in the management of patients with liver disease, both before and after transplantation and this new edition reflects this. As with the first edition, the aim of the volume is to provide a concise, practical and authoritative guide for junior medical staff and other health professionals working in liver transplant units, for health care professionals looking after those patients with liver disease who are or may become liver transplant candidates and those following liver transplantation. We have expanded both the number and reach of authors, with consequent increase in chapters. We have sought to represent the breadth of liver transplant medicine across Europe and North America, while recognizing also the role of liver transplantation in the rest of the world. We appreciate that this means some duplication and occasional divergence of views. We have intentionally retained these so that each chapter is entire of itself and the reader understands where there is uncertainty. We are very grateful to the authors who have written and revised their contributions during the height of the Covid pandemic. We are grateful to those at Wiley Blackwell, especially Jennifer Seward and Pri Gibbons, for the help and patience and, most importantly to our partners and children who have been patient with us during the preparation of this second edition"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ernesto P. Molmenti, Martin de Santibañes, Eduardo de Santibañes.
    Summary: "A concise illustrated guide to operative techniques and medical management of liver transplantation for surgical trainees and practicing professionals"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessSurgery 2021
  • Digital
    Umberto Cillo, Luciano De Carlis, editors ; foreword by Paolo De Paolis.
    Summary: In the past, liver resections and liver transplantations were performed by different surgical teams, with very little interplay between the two. However, the evolution toward more complex operations called for an increasingly intense interaction between these surgical techniques: split liver and living donor liver transplantation have become popular in the transplant community, utilizing the Coinaud segmental anatomy in a very sophisticated way, while portal and arterial resection and reconstruction have become indispensable methods for treating Klatskin tumors infiltrating the hepatic hilum. This book offers a complete overview of the connections between liver transplantation and hepatobiliary surgery. It focuses on ex situ techniques for resection of tumors at the suprahepatic confluence, with or without venous reconstruction, and on total vascular exclusion of the liver with the aid of a venovenous bypass that should be a surgical option for referral centers in hepatopancreatobiliary surgery. By taking into consideration the development of minimally invasive liver surgery, it will introduce readers to a variety of new perspectives such as: vascular exclusion techniques with or without extracorporeal circulation, hemodynamic implications and lessons learned from liver transplant surgery, and technical details on pediatric transplantation and its informative role in modern biliary tract surgery. .

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Cross training and didactic interplay
    3 Preoperatory assessment of comorbidities in liver transplantation and HBP surgery
    4 Vascular exclusion
    5 Cooling technique
    6 Machine perfusions
    7 Chirurgia Ex situ
    8 Vascular reconstructions
    9 Biliary reconstruction
    10 LDLT
    11 Pediatric LDLT
    12 Left Split Liver
    13 Right Split Liver
    14 Full-left Full-righr Slit Liver Transplantation
    15 Outflow liver obstruction
    16 Small for Size Syndrome
    17 Regeneration techniques
    18 Combined cardiothoracic and abdominal approach
    19 Portal thrombosis
    20 Bridging and downstaging: the role of Minimally-invasive surgery
    21 Robotic surgery in liver transplantation and resection
    22 Other "bridge" therapies
    23 General Surgery in Liver transplant recipient
    24 Anesthesia and resuscitation: from transplantation to major HPB interventions
    25 Multimodal treatments for liver metastatic NeuroEndocrine Tumors: from resection to transplantation. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    S. Robbert Gradstein.
    Summary: This book provides keys, descriptions and illustrations for about 850 species of liverworts and hornworts, in 148 genera and 47 families, of Colombia and Ecuador. The largest genera are Lejeunea (66 spp.), Plagiochila (65), Frullania (54), Radula (33), Metzgeria (33), Cololejeunea (32), Cheilolejeunea (30), Bazzania (26), Drepanolejeunea (25), Ceratolejeunea (18), Diplasiolejeunea (18), and Syzygiella (18). Species descriptions include brief morphological characterization and discussion with emphasis on characters for identification, world range as well as distribution and habitat in Colombia and Ecuador. Classes, orders, families and genera are also described and the main features for recognition of the genera are briefly discussed. The introduction includes chapters on history of exploration, diversity and endemism, and classification. A glossary, bibliography and index to scientific names are also provided.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Diversity and Endemism
    Classification
    Keys and Descriptions
    Glossary.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jennifer Steel, editor.
    Summary: The inadequate supply of organs in the United States and other countries continues to drive the reliance on living donor transplantation. Representatives of the transplant community convened for a meeting on living donation in an effort to provide guidelines to promote the welfare of living donors. The consensus statement that resulted from this meeting recommended that transplant centers retain an Independent Living Donor Advocate (ILDA) to focus on the best interest of the donor. Over a decade later, nearly every transplant center in the United States, performing living donor surgeries, has incorporated an ILDA into their living donor screening and/or evaluation process, however there are no guidelines with regard to the ILDA's qualifications, clinical practice, or how address ethical challenges.

    Contents:
    Part I: Living Donation: Chapter 1: The Medical Selection of Live Donors,- Chapter 2: Kidney Paired Donation Programs for Incompatible Living Kidney Donors and Recipients
    Chapter 3: Living Donor Liver Transplantation
    Chapter 4: Intestinal Transplantation from Living Donors
    Chapter 5: Living Donor Lung Transplantation
    Chapter 6: Live Donor Pancreas Transplantation
    Part II: Living Donor Advocacy: Chapter 7: The History of Living Donor Advocacy in Living Donor Transplantation
    Chapter 8: Findings from a National Survey of Living Donor Advocates
    Chapter 9: The Independent Donor Advocate and the Independent Donor Advocate Team
    Chapter 10: Clasification of Living Organ Donors
    Chapter 11: Unrelated Donors
    Chapter 12: Education of the Donor by the ILDA (Psychosocial Aspects)
    Chapter 13: Components and Timing of the ILDA Evaluation
    Chapter 14: Contraindications to Living Donation from an ILDA Perspective
    Chapter 15: Management of Conflict Between the Independent Living Donor Advocate and the Transplant Team
    Chapter 16: Story Behind the Story
    Chapter 17: Living Donor Experience
    Part III: Living Donor Ethics: Chapter 18: Informed Consent for Living Organ Donation
    Chapter 19: Pressure and Coercion
    Chapter 20: Financial Considerations
    Chapter 21: Autonomy, Agency, and Responsibility: Ethical Concerns for Living Donor Advocates
    Chapter 22: A Practical Guide: Role of the Independent Living Donor Advocate: Protect or Advocate or Is It Both/And?
    Chapter 23: Racial Disparities in Kidney Transplant and Living Donation
    Chapter 24: The Evolution of the Role of the Independent Living Donor Advocates: Recommendations for Practice Guidelines.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Adnan Sharif, Graham Lipkin, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a guide to the principles and practice of living kidney donation. Concise and well-structured chapters discuss the ethics of living kidney donation, medical evaluation of kidney donors, donor nephrectomy surgery, and long-term outcomes of transplantation, along with broader medical issues related to cardiology, surgery, and anesthesia. Living Kidney Donation: A Practical Guide aims to give readers the essential information required for undertaking living kidney donation and is relevant to nephrologists, transplant surgeons, and healthcare professionals working in renal transplantation.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Living donor activity
    3. Ethics of living kidney donation
    4. Regulatory governance of living kidney donation
    5. Novel use of living kidney donors
    6. Barriers to living kidney donation
    7. Medical evaluation of potential living kidney donors
    8. Surgical assessment of potential living kidney donors
    9. High-risk living kidney donors
    10. Contra-indications to living kidney donation
    11. Donor nephrectomy surgery
    12. Peri- and post-operative care of living kidney donors
    13. Post-donation haemodynamic consequences
    14. Long-term outcomes
    15. Strategies to increase living kidney donation
    16. Summary and concluding chapter.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Krista L. Lentine, Beatrice P. Concepcion, Edgar V. Lerma, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a complete guide to the evaluation, care, and follow-up of living kidney donors. Living donor kidney transplantation is established as the best treatment option for kidney failure. However, despite the tremendous benefits of living donation to recipients and society, the outcomes and optimal care of donors themselves have received relatively less attention. Fortunately, things are changing including recent landmark developments in living donor risk assessment, policy and guidance. This volume offers authoritative, evidence-based guidance on the full range of clinical scenarios encountered in the evaluation and care of living kidney donors. The approach to key elements of risk assessment, ethical considerations and informed consent is accompanied by recommendations for patient-centered care before, during, and after donation. Advocacy initiatives and policies to remove disincentives to donation and advance a defensible system of practice are also discussed. General and transplant nephrologists, as well as related allied health professionals, can look to this book as a comprehensive resource addressing contemporary clinical topics in the practice of living kidney donation.

    Contents:
    Rationale and Landscape of Living Kidney Donation in Contemporary Practice
    Informed Consent & Framework of Living Donor Care
    Evaluation of Renal Function, Albuminuria and Hematuria in Living Donor Candidates
    Evaluation of Renal Anatomy, Structure and Nephrolithiasis in Living Donor Candidates
    Evaluation of Hypertension in Living Donor Candidates
    Evaluation of Metabolic and Cardiovascular Risks in Living Donor Candidates
    Infection and Cancer Screening in Living Donor Candidates
    Evaluation of Genetic Kidney Disease in Living Donor Candidates
    Perioperative Evaluation and Management of Living Donor Candidates
    Compatibility, Kidney Paired Donation, and Incompatible Living Donor Transplants
    Psychosocial Evaluation, Care and Quality of Life in Living Kidney Donation
    Risk Assessment Tools and Innovations in Living Kidney Donation
    Living Donor Nephrectomy: Approaches, Outcomes and Innovations
    Follow-up Care after Living Kidney Donation
    Ethical and Policy Considerations in Living Donor Evaluation and Care
    Living Donor Transplant Program Growth, Innovation and Sustainability.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gary Heads.
    Summary: Written by a practitioner with over 25 years of experience, Living Mindfully shows how mindfulness can be integrated with coaching in order to enhance motivation and achieve an authentic life. Combines mindfulness techniques designed to explore an individual's relationships to thoughts, values and emotions with coaching strategies that build self-confidence and motivation Details the Living Mindfully program and the practical coaching intervention, Training Individuals in Mindfulness and Excellence (TIME), with tips, exercises, further resources and client testimonials Discusses important aspects of mindfulness, including awareness, staying present, acceptance, authenticity, and dealing with negative beliefs and emotions Outlines the requirements for setting up and maintaining a mindfulness program for mindfulness teachers, coaches, counselors, policymakers, and government departments.

    Contents:
    Mindfulness
    Living mindfully: a five-week programme
    The art of orientation
    The inquiry process
    Moving out of automatic pilot and being more aware of our bodies
    Being present in mindfulness of the breath and the body in movement
    Staying present and dealing with difficult thoughts and emotions
    Accepting and letting be
    Bringing it together, looking after yourself, and moving forward
    Integrating mindfulness and coaching
    The TIME programme: development and rationale
    Authenticity and its impact upon confidence and self-esteem
    Acceptance: working with negative beliefs and emotions
    Communication: releasing our words to the universe
    Planning the way forward: an unfolding journey
    In conclusion.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Veljko Dubljević, Frances Bottenberg, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses current issues in the neuroscience and ethics of dementia care, including philosophical as well as ethical legal, and social issues (ELSIs), issues in clinical, institutional, and private care-giving, and international perspectives on dementia and care innovations. As such, it is a must-read for anyone interested in a well-researched, thought-provoking overview of current issues in dementia diagnosis, care, and social and legal policy. All contributions reflect the latest neuroscientific research on dementia, either broadly construed or in terms of the etiologies and symptoms of particular forms of dementia. Given its interdisciplinary and international scope, its depth of research, and its qualitative emphasis, the book represents a valuable addition to the available literature on neuroethics, gerontology, and neuroscientific memory research.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Dominique Amy, editor.
    Summary: "This book focuses on the lobar anatomy of the breast and on the sick lobe concept - a novel theory of breast cancer development that is gaining ever wider acceptance - and explores their significance for innovative surgical treatment. Special attention is paid to the role of ductal echography, a technique capable of clearly depicting the structures of cancer in relation to the structures of the sick lobe. Having established a sound theoretical and practical basis through detailed coverage and correlation of anatomy, pathology, and imaging appearances, the book goes on to describe a revolutionary surgical approach particularly suitable for the treatment of multifocal and multicentric breast carcinomas. Such tumors account for more than a third of all cases of breast carcinoma and are often treated by mastectomy. The proposed new breast-conserving technique yields excellent cosmetic results and entails a very low risk of recurrence. The book will appeal to a wide readership, including radiologists, surgeons, oncologists, pathologists, as well as residents"--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    E.V. Radhakrishnan, Bruce F. Phillips, Gopalakrishnan Achamveetil, editors.
    Summary: "This book is an important addition to the knowledge of lobster research. The book complements other books published on lobster research and management as it focuses on Indian lobster fisheries and aquaculture developments where there have been nearly 350 research papers and reports and 19 PhD awards. The book has 15 chapters written by international experts covering many aspects of the biology of a number of spiny and slipper lobster species occurring in India and world oceans with maps illustrating global distribution of spiny lobster families, genera and species. An updated taxonomy and checklist of marine lobsters, the status and management of lobster fisheries in India and Indian Ocean Rim countries and a review of aquaculture research in India and other major countries have also been presented. The book is timely as the 2nd International Indian Ocean Expedition (IIOE) is currently underway (2015-2020), 50 years after the original IIOE (1959-1965), with some of the original lobster research on the biology and distribution of phyllosoma larvae being undertaken on the plankton samples collected during the first IIOE. Many of the chapters are contributed by the authors from Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute (CMFRI), which has been collecting fishery and biological data on lobsters since 1950 when lobster fishing began on a subsistence scale, followed by some industrial fishing for lobsters in different parts of India. Unfortunately, the development of some of these lobster fisheries was followed by overfishing due to lack of enforcement of regulations. The book provides a valuable addition to our knowledge of the biology, fisheries and aquaculture of spiny and slipper lobsters."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction, anatomy and life history
    An updated checklist of World marine lobsters
    Lobster fauna of India
    Molecular phylogeny and taxonomic implications in spiny lobsters
    Ecology and distribution of palinurid lobsters
    Food, feeding behaviour, growth, reproduction and neuroendocrine control of moulting and reproduction
    Lobster fisheries and Management : Part A. Spiny and slipper lobster fisheries in India. B. Lobster fisheries of Indian Ocean Rim Countries
    Review of on the current global status and future challenges for management of lobster fisheries
    Reproductive biology of spiny and slipper lobsters
    Breeding, hatchery production and mariculture. A. Spiny lobsters. B. Slipper lobsters
    Culture of Scyllarid lobster larvae fed jellyfish as food
    Lobster aquaculture development in Vietnam and Indonesia
    Pathogens and health management in lobster aquaculture
    Postharvest processing, value addition and marketing of lobsters
    Perspectives and future directions for lobster research.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rui Fernandes.
    Contents:
    Flap classification
    Bilobed flap
    Rhomboid flap
    Crescentic flap
    Septal flap
    Nasolabial flap
    V to Y advancement flap
    Keystone flap
    Paramedian forehead flap
    The temporoparietal fascia flap
    Temporalis muscle flap
    Cervicofacial advancement flap
    Submental island flap
    Pectoralis major myocutaneous flap
    Latissimus dorsi myocutaneous flap
    Sternocleidomastoid flap
    Trapezius flap
    The supraclavicular artery island flap
    The internal mammary perforator flap
    Ear reconstruction
    Lip reconstruction
    Nasal reconstruction
    Scalp reconstruction.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Jacques A. Baart, Henk S. Brand, editors.
    Summary: This book, richly illustrated in full colour, is a comprehensive guide to the use of local anaesthesia in dentistry that will meet the needs of both students and dental practitioners. It provides the reader with ample background information on the origin of pain and the pharmacology of anaesthetics, and describes the anatomy of the trigeminal nerve in detail. Subsequent chapters cover key are as such as general practical aspects, local anaesthesia in the upper and the lower jaw, the use of local anaesthetics in children, local and systematic complications, and the prevention of side effects. Patients at particular risk of adverse effects are identified and attention drawn to significant legal aspects. This second edition has been completely revised, with more attention to safety, environment, and sterility. Additional injection techniques have been included, and a new chapter is devoted to microprocessor-assisted administration of anaesthetics. Throughout, care has been taken to ensure that the information is clearly presented and the text is easy to read.

    Contents:
    Pain and Impulse Conduction
    Anatomy of the Trigeminal Nerve
    Pharmacology of Local Anesthetics
    General Practical Aspects
    Local Anesthesia in the Upper Jaw
    Local Anesthesia in the Lower Jaw
    Additional Anesthetic Techniques
    Microprocessor-Controlled Local Anesthesia
    Local Anesthesia in Children
    Local Complications
    Systemic Complications
    Patients at Risk
    Legal Aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Velupillai Ilankovan, Madan Ethunandan, Tian Ee Seah.
    Contents:
    Local anaesthesia
    Aesthetic & reconstructive units
    Decision making process / defect assessment
    Individual flaps
    Reconstruction of specific sites.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Willm Uwe Kampen, Manfred Fischer, editor.
    Summary: This book presents a systematic survey of different local treatments in inflammatory joint diseases and their potential side effects and complications. Both surgical therapies and pharmaceutical strategies involving local or systemic application of anti-inflammatory and immunomodulating drugs are addressed. Special emphasis is placed on nuclear medicine therapy by intra-articular instillation of beta radiation emitters, known as radiosynoviorthesis or radiation synovectomy. Possible complications, in particular radionecrosis, infection, and thromboembolism, are described and available treatment strategies are examined in detail. In addition, radiation safety considerations are critically reviewed and relevant clinical questions are discussed. While radiosynoviorthesis is an effective and safe treatment if a proper indication is secured and if the application is performed by an experienced nuclear medicine physician, local complications can never be excluded with certainty. This book will support physicians who are engaged in the care and treatment of patients with inflammatory joint disease, approximately 30,000 of whom undergo radiosynoviorthesis in Europe each year. .

    Contents:
    Preface
    Histopathology of synovitis
    Non-radioactive treatment of synovitis (risk-benefit)
    Introduction to radiosynoviorthesis (RSO)
    Dosimetry and radiation burden
    Local complications and possible treatment strategies
    Risk of malignoma induction
    Baker ́s cysts a relevant contraindication - Analysis of periodic update reports
    Summary.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Afsaneh Alavi, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Summary: Focusing on local wound care specifically for the dermatologist, this concise text provides a go-to source for practitioners looking for a quick solution for many of the most common wounds as well as an update on what's new in the field. From the most basic principles of local wound care to a look at what upcoming therapies like stem cells and lasers can do, this text is comprehensive and informed. Providing quality local wound care requires an ample knowledge of available products, their cost effectiveness, and the principles for the optimal interventions; Local Wound Care for Dermatologists includes these three guiding points in each chapter that focuses on a specific therapy. Expertly written text is accompanied by multiple tables of drug-specific names, current price points, and comparable products. Chapters include many color images, thereby providing insight to a given wound and the various therapies available to treat it. While the basics are reviewed in the opening chapters, later chapters feature updates in therapies including discussions on what's new in skin substitutes, negative pressure wound therapy, oxygen therapy, and an update in cell based therapy. Written with the dermatologist in mind, Local Wound Care for Dermatologists is an indispensable reference for students, residents, and practicing doctors alike. General practitioners and plastic surgeons will also find this title a useful refresher.

    Contents:
    1. The Basic Principles in Local Wound Care
    2. Skin pH, Epidermal Barrier Function, Cleansers, and Skin Health
    3. Chronic Wounds and Infections
    4. Wound Dressings
    5. The Use of Antiseptic and Antibacterial Agents on Wounds and the Skin
    6. Topical Anti-inflammatory Agents in Wound Care
    7. Wound Dressing Allergic Contact Dermatitis: Epidemiology and Management
    8. Vascular Studies for Nonvascular Surgeons
    9. Compression Therapy
    10. Management of Diabetic Foot Ulcers: Offloading and Debridement
    11. Negative Pressure Wound Therapy
    12. Oxygen Therapy in Wound Healing
    13. The Role of Ablative Fractional Lasers in Wound Healing
    14. Stem Cell Therapy in Wound Care
    15. Cellular- and Acellular-Based Therapies: Skin Substitutes and Matrices
    16. Local Peristomal Cutaneous Manifestations and Their Management
    17. Comprehensive Wound Care for Malignant Wounds
    18. Wound Healing in Hidradenitis Suppurativa
    19. Wound Healing in Pyoderma Gangrenosum
    20. Scar Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Paul W. Brazis, Joseph C. Masdeu, José Biller.
    Contents:
    General principles of neurologic localization
    Peripheral nerves
    Cervical, brachial, and lumbosacral plexi
    Spinal nerve and root
    Spinal cord
    Cranial nerve I (the olfactory nerve)
    Visual pathways
    The localization of lesions affecting the ocular motor system
    Cranial nerve V (the trigeminal nerve)
    Cranial nerve VII (the facial nerve)
    Cranial nerve VIII (the vestibulocochlear nerve)
    Cranial nerves IX and X (the glossopharyngeal and vagus nerves)
    Cranial nerve XI (the spinal accessory nerve)
    Cranial nerve XII (the hypoglossal nerve)
    Brainstem
    The cerebellum
    The localization of lesions affecting the hypothalamus and pituitary gland
    The anatomic localization of lesions in the thalamus
    Basal ganglia
    The localization of lesions affecting the cerebral hemispheres
    Localization of lesions in the autonomic nervous system
    Vascular syndromes of the forebrain, brainstem, and cerebellum
    The localization of lesions causing coma.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Paul W. Brazis, Joseph C. Masdeu, José Biller.
    Contents:
    General principles of neurologic localization
    Peripheral nerves
    Cervical, brachial, and lumbosacral plexuses
    Spinal nerve and root
    Spinal cord
    Cranial nerve I (the olfactory nerve)
    Visual pathways
    The localization of lesions affecting the ocular motor system
    Cranial nerve V (the trigeminal nerve)
    Cranial nerve VII (the facial nerve)
    Cranial nerve VIII (the vestibulocochlear nerve)
    Cranial nerves IX and X (the glossopharyngeal and vagus nerves)
    Cranial nerve XI (the spinal accessory nerve)
    Cranial nerve XII (the hypoglossal nerve)
    Brainstem
    The cerebellum
    The localization of lesions affecting the hypothalamus and pituitary gland
    The anatomic localization of lesions in the thalamus
    Basal ganglia
    The localization of lesions affecting the cerebral hemispheres
    Localization of lesions in the autonomic nervous system
    Vascular syndromes of the forebrain, brainstem, and cerebellum
    The localization of lesions causing coma.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Fabio Augusto Barbieri, Rodrigo Vitório, editors.
    Summary: This book is an attempt to advance the discussion and improve our understanding about the effects of aging and movement disorders on motor control during walking and postural tasks. Despite these activities are performed daily, there is a high requirement of motor and neural systems in order to perform both tasks efficiently. Both walking and posture require a complex interaction of musculoskeletal and neural systems. However, the mechanisms used to control these tasks, as well as how they are planned and coordinated, are still a question of discussion among health professionals and researchers. In addition, this discussion is more interesting when the effects of aging are included in the context of locomotion and the postural control. The number of older individuals is 841 million in 2015, which is four times higher than the 202 million that lived in 1950. Aging causes many motor, sensorial and neural deficits, which impair locomotion and postural control in the elderly. The severity of this framework is worsened when the aging goes along with a movement disorder, such as Parkinson disease, Chorea, Dystonia, Huntington disease, etc. Therefore, the aim of this book is to highlight the influence of different aspects on planning, controlling and performing locomotion and posture tasks. In attempting to improve current knowledge in this field, invited authors present and discuss how environmental, sensorial, motor, cognitive and individual aspects influence the planning and performance of locomotor and postural activities. The major thrust of the book is to address the mechanisms involved in controlling and planning motor action in neurological healthy individuals, as well as in those who suffer from movement disorders or face the effects of aging, indicating the aspects that impair locomotion and postural control. In addition, new technologies, tools and interventions designed to manage the effects of aging and movement disorders are presented in the book.

    Contents:
    Part I. Background concepts to motor control in aging and movement disorders
    Part II. Walking
    Part III. Posture
    Part IV. Technology and rehabilitation applied to locomotion and posture.3
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Franklin C.L. Wong, editor.
    Summary: This book reviews locoregional radionuclide cancer therapies (LRCT). Proving an increasingly viable alternative to radiotherapy, radionuclide therapy includes a diversity of choices of well characterized biochemical and physiologic target molecules. The delivery and retention of radionuclides may be monitored by advanced imaging for exact tissue localization and for real-time dosimetry to enable personalized precision medicine. Radiopharmaceuticals in human cancer therapies are typically delivered in systemic routes but can also be designed for locoregional routes to harness pharmacokinetic advantages of higher payload and lower systemic toxicities. This book explores the latest advancements and clinical considerations of the locoregional approach. Throughout the chapters, the clinical and scientific bases of cancer treatment and the locoregional use of radionculides are explored. Mathematical models of radiation dosimetry of locoregional radionculdies on tissues are studied using common models for multiple commercially available radionuclides. Rodent and canine tumor models of LRCT are compared for selected radionuclides and radiopharmaceuticals. The practical aspects of radiopharmaceuticals production, marketing, transport, as well as radiation protection are reviewed. Finally, the combination of LRCT with immunotherapy and other cancer therapies and prospective future use of LRCT are discussed. This is a guide for practicing nuclear physicians, interventional radiologists, radiation oncologists, radiation scientists, veterinarians and oncologists to expand their knowledge base and to prepare for designing locoregional radionuclide cancer therapies in animals and in humans.

    Contents:
    Human Cancer- Epidemiology, Hallmarks, and Defense Strategies
    Cancer Treatment Modalities Systemic and Loco regional Approaches: Challenges and Opportunities of multidisciplinary approaches
    Cancer Radiotherapy: General Considerations and Human Radiobiology
    Radionuclide Cancer Therapy- Unsealed Alpha, Beta and Gamma Emitters
    Locoregional Therapy - Cancer Interventions with and without Radionuclides
    Radiation Dosimetry Considerations of Locoregional Radionuclide Cancer Therapy
    Voxel-based Targeted Radionuclide Therapy Dosimetry
    Locoregional Unsealed Radionuclide Cancer Therapy - Experimental Findings
    Animal Cancer Therapy Models - Ready Translation to Humans
    An Overview of Regulations of Radiopharmaceuticals
    Locoregional Radionuclide Cancer Therapy (LRCT) Using Sealed & Unsealed Radionuclides.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eric Van Cutsem, Thomas J. Vogl, Vranco Orsi, Alberto Sobrero, editors.
    Contents:
    Basics of Regional Tumor therapies: Locoregional Tumor Therapies, Evidence and Future
    Pharmacokinetic of Locoregional Tumor Therapies
    Embolization Materials, Catheter, IA-port systems Indications for locoregional tumor therapies ? Liver: HCC
    Liver Metastases of CRC- Liver Metastases of Neuroendocrine Tumors and CCC
    Liver metastases of other indications: Pancreas Carcinoma
    Melanoma
    Breast Carcinoma. Indications for locoregional tumortherapies ? Lung: Basics
    Primary Lung Tumors
    Lung metastases Thermoablation: Liver
    Lung. Head and Neck.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Eric Van Cutsem, Thomas J. Vogl, Franco Orsi, Alberto Sobrero, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Dilip V. Jeste, M.D., Tanya T. Nguyen, Ph.D., Nancy J. Donovan, M.D.
    Summary: "Informed by research during the past half-century, the World Health Organization and other national health and health care bodies have increasingly emphasized the impact of social determinants of health on major health outcomes, including quality of life and longevity. One risk factor that has become increasingly prominent is loneliness-a subjective feeling of distress due to perceived social isolation. Loneliness has been shown to have major adverse mental and physical health effects throughout the life span. Loneliness: Science and Practice is, in part, a response to the National Academies of Science, Engineering and Medicine report released in early 2020 that called for screening for loneliness and social isolation in all health care practices and a need to develop best practices for addressing social isolation and loneliness in all medical subspecialty settings. As the COVID-19 pandemic and physical-distancing measures emerged in 2020, the need for the dissemination of knowledge of loneliness became even more pressing. This book reviews the important and growing literature on loneliness, focusing on evidence-based findings. It addresses both the science and the everyday practice of mental health care that involves the psychobiology of loneliness, its appropriate clinical assessment, and strategies to prevent and manage its adverse consequences"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Loneliness, other aspects of social connection, and their measurement / Nancy J. Donovan, Julianne Holt-Lunstad
    Loneliness across the life span / Maike Luhmann, Louise Hawkley, Susanne Bücker, Tilmann von Soest, Jürgen Margraf
    Loneliness in people living with mental health disorders / Miya Gentry, Barton W. Palmer
    Loneliness in marginalized communities / Lize Tibiriçá, Dylan J. Jester, Barton W. Palmer, Dilip V. Jeste
    Neurobiology of loneliness / Jeffrey A. Lam, Ellen E. Lee
    Systemic neuroendocrine and inflammatory mechanisms in loneliness / Kelly E. Rentscher, Steve W. Cole, Judith E. Carroll
    Interventions for loneliness in younger people / Pamela Qualter, Alice Eccles, Manuela Barreto
    Interventions for loneliness in older adults / Kimberly A. Van Orden, Yeates Conwell
    Community-based interventions for loneliness / Phaedra Bell, Brian Lawlor.
  • Digital/Print
    Erwei Song, editor.
    Contents:
    Non-coding RNAs: New Players in Cancers
    The Working Modules of Long Non-coding RNAs in Cancer Cells
    Methods to Study Long Non-coding RNA Biology in Cancer
    Relationship between Non-coding RNA Dysregulation and Epigenetic Mechanisms in Cancer
    Non-coding RNAs in Growth and Death of Cancer Cells
    Non-coding RNAs in Cancer Cell Plasticity
    Non-coding RNAs in Regulation of Cancer Metabolic Reprogramming
    Non-coding RNAs in Tumor Angiogenesis
    Non-coding RNAs in Cancer Immunity
    Non-coding RNAs in Therapeutic Resistance of Cancer
    Non-coding RNAs Regulating Cancer Signaling Network
    Non-coding RNAs Regulating NFkB Signaling
    Non-coding RNAs Regulating p53 and c-Myc Signaling
    Viral Non-coding RNAs in Cancer Biology
    Non-coding RNAs in Cancer Diagnosis
    Therapeutic Potentials of Non-coding RNAs: Targeted Delivery of NcRNAs in Cancer Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Antonin Morillon ; RNA set coordinated by Marie-Christine Maurel.
    Summary: The dark side of the genome represents vast domains of the genome that are not encoding for proteins - the basic bricks of cellular structure and metabolism. Up to 98% of the human genome is non-coding and produces so-called long non-coding RNA. Some of these non-coding RNA play fundamental roles in cellular identity, cell development and cancer progression. They are now widely studied in many organisms to understand their function. This book reviews this expanding field of research and present the broad functional diversities of those molecules and their putative fundamental and therapeutic roles and develops the recent history of non-coding RNA, their very much debated classification and how they raise a formidable interest for developmental and tumorigenesis biology. Using classical examples and an extensive bibliography, the book illustrates the most studied and attractive examples of these long non-coding RNA, how they interface with epigenetics, genome integrity and expression and what are the current models of their regulatory mechanisms. This book offers a large review about the long non-coding RNAIt presents the broad functional diversities of those moleculesIt presents pioneer works from the fieldProvides a comprehensive review of the field Presents fundamental and therapeutic interests

    Contents:
    Foreword: The modern RNA world
    Preface
    1. Non-coding RNA, its history and discovery timeline
    2. Definition and families of long non-coding RNA
    3. Biological functions of long non-coding RNA
    4. Non-coding RNA in development
    5. Long non-coding RNA and cancer
    Concluding perspectives
    Bibliography
    Glossary
    List of acronyms
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    M.R.S. Rao, editor.
    Summary: This contributed volume offers a comprehensive and detailed overview of the various aspects of long non-coding RNAs and discusses their emerging significance. Written by leading experts in the field, it motivates young researchers around the globe, and offers graduate and postgraduate students fascinating insights into genes and their regulation in eukaryotes and higher organisms.

    Contents:
    1. History, discovery, and classification of IncRNAs
    2. Long noncoding RNA: genome organization and mechanism of action
    3. From heterochromatin to long noncoding RNAs in Drosophila: expanding the arena of gene function and regulation
    4. Long noncoding RNAs in the Yeast S. cerevisiae
    5. Long noncoding RNAs in plants
    6. Long noncoding RNAs in mammalian development and diseases
    7. Long noncoding RNAs in cancer and therapeutic potential
    8. Long noncoding RNAs in pluripotency of stem cells and cell fate specification
    9. Understanding the role of IncRNAs in nervous system development
    10. Technological developments in IncRNA biology.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Kevin V. Morris, editor.
    Contents:
    Understanding the Complex Circuitry of lncRNAs at the X-inactivation Center and its Implications in Disease Conditions
    Long Non-coding RNA ANRIL and Polycomb in Human Cancers and Cardiovascular Disease
    Form and function of exosome associated long non-coding RNAs in cancer
    Long Non-coding RNAs in Lung Cancer
    Pseudogene-expressed RNAs: Emerging roles in gene regulation and disease
    Functional long non-coding RNAs in vascular smooth muscle cells
    Long Non-coding RNAs as Targets and Regulators of Nuclear Hormone Receptors
    Non-coding transcriptional landscape in human aging
    LncRNAs in stress response
    Expression Specificity of Disease-Associated lncRNAs: towards Personalized Medicine. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Susan Carpenter, editor.
    Summary: This book brings together what is currently known in terms of basic research in the field of long noncoding RNAs (lncRNAs) and builds on this to delve more deeply in the specific roles that lncRNAs are playing during inflammation. The book provides readers with basic knowledge on lncRNAs: from understanding the complexity of the transcriptome, conservation, structure and the tools used to investigate these aspects, to how we use this information to study lncRNAs in a specific biological context. The volume covers the emerging roles of lncRNAs in the initial stages of inflammation as well as their roles in specific inflammatory diseases including arthritis, lupus, diabetes and cardiovascular disease. The book also shows the emerging interest in using lncRNAs as a therapeutic target and how this could impact our ability to diagnose and treat inflammatory diseases in the future.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Overview
    Chapter 1: Introduction and overview
    Section 2: Basics of long noncoding RNA Classifications and functions
    Chapter 2: The Complexity of the Mammalian Transcriptome
    Chapter 3: Towards molecular mechanism in long non-coding RNAs: linking structure and function
    Section 3: Long noncoding RNA and inflammation
    Chapter 4: Long noncoding RNAs in Rheumatology
    Chapter 5: LncRNA and Cardiovascular Disease
    Chapter 6: A role for lncRNAs in regulating inflammatory and autoimmune responses underlying type 1 diabetes
    Section 4: Long noncoding RNAs as Therapeutic targets
    Chapter 7: LncRNA Biomarkers of Inflammation and Cancer
    Chapter 8: Functional Implications of Intergenic GWAS SNPs in Immune Related lncRNAs
    Chapter 9: Long noncoding RNAs as Therapeutic Targets
    Section 5: Challenges and Future Directions
    Chapter 10: Challenges and future directions for LncRNAs and inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Hitoshi Sakio, editor.
    Summary: This open access book presents and analyzes the results of more than 30 years of long-term ecological research in riparian forest ecosystems with the aim of casting light on changes in the dynamics of riparian forests over time. The research, focusing on the Ooyamazawa riparian forest, one of the remaining old-growth forests in Japan, has yielded a number of interesting outcomes. First, it shows that large-scale disturbances afford various trees opportunities for regeneration and are thus the driving force for the coexistence of canopy trees in riparian forests. Second, it identifies changes in reproductive patterns, highlighting that seed production has in fact quantitatively increased over the past two decades. Third, it describes the decline in forest floor vegetation caused by deer grazing and reveals how this decline has affected bird and insect populations. The book illustrates the interconnectedness of phenomena within an ecosystem and the resultant potential for cascade effects and also stresses the need for long-term ecological studies of climate change impacts on forests. It will be of interest to both professionals and academics in the field of forest science.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction
    Chapter 1. The Ooyamazawa Riparian Forest: Introduction and Overview
    Part II. Life History and Regeneration Processes of Riparian Woody Species.-Chapter 2. Fraxinus platypoda
    Chapter 3. Pterocarya rhoifolia
    Chapter 4. Cercidiphyllum japonicum
    Chapter 5. Acer Tree Species
    Part III. Diversity and Coexistence in Riparian Forests
    Chapter 6. Diversity of Herbaceous Plants in the Ooyamazawa Riparian Forest
    Chapter 7. Coexistence of Tree Canopy Species
    Part IV. Ecosystem Changes in Riparian Forests
    Chapter 8. Changes in Forest Floor Vegetation
    Chapter 9. Temporal Changes in Browsing Damage by Sika Deer in a Natural Riparian Forest in Central Japan
    Chapter 10. Characteristics and Temporal Trends of a Ground Beetle (Coleoptera: Carabidae) Community in Ooyamazawa Riparian Forest
    Chapter 11. Avifauna at Ooyamazawa: Decline of Birds that Forage in Bushy Understories
    Part V. Conclusion
    Chapter 12. General Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Birgit Völlm, Peter Braun, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of forensic psychiatry, focusing on the provision of care in Europe as well as the legal and ethical challenges posed by long-term stays in forensic settings. Forensic psychiatric services provide care and treatment for mentally disordered offenders (MDOs) in secure in-patient facilities as well as in the community. These services are high-cost/low-volume services; they pose significant restrictions on patients and hence raise considerable ethical challenges. There is no agreed-upon standard for length of stay (LoS) in secure settings and patients detainment periods vary considerably across countries and even within the same jurisdiction. Thus far, little research has been conducted to identify factors associated with length of stay; consequently, it remains unclear how services should be configured to meet the needs of this patient group. This volume fills some of those gaps. Furthermore, it presents new research on factors associated with length of stay, both patient-related and organisational. Various approaches to the provision of care for long-term patients in different countries are explored, including a few best practise examples in this specific area of psychiatry. The book also addresses the perspective of those working in forensic care by reviewing quality-of-life research and interviews with patients. The authors of this volume come from a range of professional backgrounds, ensuring a certain breadth and depth in the topic discussion, and even includes patients themselves as (co-)authors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kristina Malmgren, Sallie Baxendale, J. Helen Cross, editors.
    Contents:
    Why a Volume on Long-Term Outcomes of Epilepsy Surgery?
    Methodological Demands on Observational Studies of Outcomes After Epilepsy Surgery
    Long-Term Seizure and Antiepileptic Drug Outcomes After Epilepsy Surgery in Adults
    Long-Term Seizure and Antiepileptic Drug Outcomes After Epilepsy Surgery in Children
    Long-Term Cognitive Outcomes After Epilepsy Surgery in Adults
    Long-term Cognitive Outcomes After Epilepsy Surgery in Children
    Long-Term Psychiatric Outcomes After Epilepsy Surgery in Adults
    Long-Term Psychiatric and Behaviour Outcomes in Children Following Epilepsy Surgery
    Mortality After Epilepsy Surgery
    Long-Term Educational and Vocational Outcomes of Adults After Epilepsy Surgery
    Educational and Employment Outcomes Following Epilepsy Surgery in Childhood
    Quality of Life Outcomes in Adults Following Epilepsy Surgery
    Quality of Life and Psychosocial Outcomes in Children Following Epilepsy Surgery
    Subjective Experiences of Epilepsy Surgery in Adults
    Subjective Experiences of Children and Parents After Epilepsy Surgery
    Informed Consent for Epilepsy Surgery
    Managing Expectations of Epilepsy Surgery
    Health Economic Analyses of Epilepsy Surgery
    Long-Term Outcomes of Epilepsy Surgery: Knowledge Gaps and Future Directions. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Glen O. Gabbard, Clinical Professor of Psychiatry, Baylor College of Medicine; Training and Supervising Analyst, Center for Psychoanalytic Studies, Houston, Texas.
    Contents:
    Key concepts
    Assessment, indications, and formulation
    The nuts and bolts of psychotherapy : getting started
    Therapeutic interventions : what does the therapist say and do?
    Goals and therapeutic action
    Working with resistance
    Use of dreams and fantasies in dynamic psychotherapy
    Identifying and working with countertransference
    Working through and termination
    Use of supervision
    Evaluating core competencies in long-term psychodynamic psychotherapy.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC489.P72 G315 2017
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Gil Atzmon, PhD editor.
    Summary: The release of the complete version of the human genome sequence in 2003 has paved the way for defining gene function and genetic background for phenotypic variation in humans and allowed us to study the aging process in a new light. This new volume results from that research and focuses on the genetic and epigenetic process of aging. While the interpretation of the genome data is still in its initial stages, this new volume looks at the evolving understanding of molecular mechanisms involved in cellular processes, gene function associated with complex traits, epigenetic components involve in gene control and the creation of hypothesis-free genome-wide approaches. Longevity Genes: A Blueprint for Aging explores the genetic and genomic elements that can maintain a long life such as DNA damage mechanisms, epigenetics and the way we can use this knowledge to generate customized treatments. It touches on some of the multidisciplinary approaches as well as genomic-wide association technology used to analyze complex traits. This book describes the hunt for genes affecting complex traits using a high throughput technology, with adequate consideration for the selection of an appropriate population, applications of statistical genetics and computational biology, and most importantly, considering phenotype-genotype association studies. Longevity Genes provides coverage of not only established aspects of genetics and aging, but also new approaches and perceptions in this important area of research.

    Contents:
    Evolutionary Genetic Bases of Longevity and Senescence
    Candidate Genes That Affect Aging Through Protein Homeostasis
    Autophagy and Aging
    A Genetic View of the Mitochondrial Role in Aging: Killing Us Softly
    GWAS and Meta-analysis in Aging/Longevity
    Exome and Whole Genome Sequencing in Aging and Longevity
    Models to Explore Genetics of Human Aging
    Systems Biology of Aging
    Epigenetics of Aging.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Tor Shwayder [and 3 more].
    Summary: This book is an unique but practical case-driven guide to a variety of pediatric dermatology diseases observed over long periods. It features a broad range of cases covering initial presentation during infancy and the subsequent developments of through childhood, adolescence and adulthood. Disease cases include papulosquamous disorder, hereditary cornification, exanthematous diseases and viral infections of the skin.

    Contents:
    Cutaneous disorders of newborn
    Eczematous eruptions of childhood
    Papulosquamous disorders
    Hereditary disorders of cornification
    Hereditary disorders of the dermis
    Disorders of the hair and nails
    Disorders of sebaceous and sweat glands
    Cutaneous tumors and tumor syndromes
    Histiocytoses and malignant skin disease
    Disorders of pigmentation
    Vascular disorders of infancy and childhood
    Bullous disorders of childhood
    Bacterial, mycobacterial, protozoal, and viral infections of the skin
    Exanthematous diseases of childhood
    Skin disorders caused by fungi
    Photosensitivity and photoreactions
    Hypersensitivity syndromes
    Vasculitic disorders
    Collagen vascular disorders
    Endocrine disorders and the skin
    Inborn error of metabolism
    Skin signs of systemic diseases
    Abuse and factitial disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    James G. Marks, Jr., Jeffrey J. Miller.
    Contents:
    Unit 1: principles of dermatology. Introduction
    Structure and function of the skin
    Principles of diagnosis
    Dermatologic therapy and procedures
    Unit 2: growths. Epidermal growths
    Pigmented growths
    Dermal and subcutaneous growths
    Unit 3: rashes with epidermal involvement. Eczematous rashes
    Scaling papules, plaques, and patches
    Vesicles and bullae
    Inflammatory papules
    Pustules
    White spots
    Unit 4: dermal rashes. Generalized erythema
    Localized erythema
    Specialized erythema
    Purpura
    Dermal induration
    Unit 5: Ulcers. Ulcers
    Unit 6: Hair and nails. Hair disorders
    Nail disorders
    Unit 7: Mucous membrane disorders. Mucous membrane disorders
    Unit 8: Diagnosis by symptom. Skin signs of systemic disease
    Self-assessment.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Rakesh Srivastava, Wojciech Maksymowicz, Wlodek Lopaczynski.
    Summary: This book is all about the definition and finding ways to prioritize and accelerate translation research in biomedical sciences and rapidly turning new knowledge into first-in-human studies. It represents an effort to bring together scientists active in various areas of translational research to share science and, hopefully, generate new ideas and potential collaborations. The book provides a comprehensive overview of translational work that includes significant discoveries and pioneering contributions, e.g., in immunology, gene therapy, stem cells and population sciences. It may be used as an advanced textbook by graduate students and even ambitious undergraduates in biomedical sciences. It is also suitable for non-experts, i.e. medical doctors, who wish to have an overview of some of the fundamental models in translational research. Managing the translational enterprise remains a work in progress. The world is changing rapidly, and the scientific world needs to seek new ways to ensure that discoveries get translated for patients efficiently and as quickly as possible. In addition, everyone expects the investment in biomedical research should pay dividends through effective therapeutic solutions. This unique project provides a broad collaborative approach of the international scientific team to present its view and opinion how to cross barriers to incentives for translational research in medical sciences. Contributing to the book is an international team of prominent co-authors. The book consists of unique and widely treated topics, and includes new hypotheses, data and analyses.

    Contents:
    I. Barriers to incentives for translational research
    II. Integrating emerging science into clinical practice
    III. Organization, prioritization, review and funding for the translational research
    IV. Translational sciences in cancer research
    V. Translational science in infectious diseases
    VI. Translational research in endocrinology and nutrition
    VII. Translation research and neuroscience
    VIII. Stem cells and translational research
    IX. The role of translational research in public health and behavioral sciences
    X. Translational epidemiology, biostatistics and informatics
    XI. Translational research outcomes and resources.
    Digital Access World Scientific 2014
  • Print
    Bryan Washington.
    Summary: "In the city of Houston - a sprawling, diverse microcosm of America - the son of a black mother and a Latino father is coming of age. He's working at his family's restaurant, weathering his brother's blows, resenting his older sister's absence. And discovering he likes boys. Around him, others live and thrive and die in Houston's myriad neighborhoods: a young woman whose affair detonates across an apartment complex, a ragtag baseball team, a group of young hustlers, hurricane survivors, a local drug dealer who takes a Guatemalan teen under his wing, a reluctant chupacabra. Bryan Washington's brilliant, viscerally drawn world vibrates with energy, wit, and the infinite longing of people searching for home. With soulful insight into what makes a community, a family, and a life, Lot explores trust and love in all its unsparing and unsteady forms."--Inside dust jacket.

    Contents:
    Lockwood
    Alief
    610 North, 610 West
    Shepherd
    Wayside
    Bayou
    Lot
    South Congress
    Navigation
    Peggy Park
    Fannin
    Waugh
    Elgin.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3623.A86737 A6 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Sinclair Wynchank.
    Contents:
    Beginnings
    Christ's Hospital and Hal's early schooldays
    Moving up the School
    Science at Housey
    A Cambridge undergraduate
    Nuclear Physics and Professor Rutherford
    Hal, a postgraduate member of Trinity College
    Social life and marriage
    Travel
    The Mount Vernon Hospital
    At the RRU and Hal's forced resignation
    Hal, Director of his own Laboratory
    The Stroke
    Hal's passing. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Stuart L. Weinstein, John M. (Jack) Flynn, Haemish A. Crawford.
    Contents:
    Volume 1:
    Embryology and development of the musculoskeletal system
    Genetic aspects of orthopaedic conditions
    Imaging in pediatric orthopaedics
    The pediatric orthopaedic examination
    Pain management
    Metabolic and endocrine abnormalities
    The skeletal dysplasias
    Syndromes of orthopaedic importance
    Localized disorders of skin and soft tissue
    Diseases of the hematopoietic system
    Juvenile idiopathic arthritis
    Musculoskeletal infection
    Bone and soft tissue tumors
    Cerebral palsy
    Other neurouscular disorders
    Idiopathic scoliosis
    Early-onset spine deformities
    Adolescent kyphosis
    Spondylolysis and spondylolisthesis
    The cervical spine
    Volume 2:
    The upper limb
    Developmental hip dysplasia and dislocation
    Legg-Calvé-Perthes disease and other conditions of the hip
    Slipped captical femoral epiphysis
    The adolescent hip
    The lower extremity
    Limb-length discrepancy
    The foot
    The child with a limb deficiency
    Sports medicine in the growing child
    The principles of pediatric fracture and trauma care
    Upper extremity fractures
    Pediatric thoracolumbar spine and lower extremity fractures.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Flynn, John M.; Lovell, Wood W.; Weinstein, Stuart L.; Winter, Robert B.
    Summary: "Now in its updated Seventh Edition, Lovell and Winter's Pediatric Orthopaedics remains a must-have for physicians and residents treating infants, children, and adolescents with orthopaedic problems. This classic, comprehensive reference covers the basic science, clinical manifestations, and management of orthopaedic problems in children. Now in full color, the foremost orthopaedists examine normal musculoskeletal development and the causes, diagnosis, and treatment of the entire range of abnormalities, with emphasis on evidence-based decision making in treatment selection. The clinical chapters include pearls and pitfalls and a description of the author's preferred approach. The book will now cover surgical techniques of management with step-by-step illustrations from the Atlas of Pediatric Orthopaedic Surgery."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    V. 1: Embryology and development of the neuromuscular apparatus
    Genetic aspects of orthopaedic conditions
    Imaging in pediatric orthopaedics
    The pediatric orthopaedic examination
    Evaluation of the medical literature
    Metabolic and endocrine abnormalities
    The skeletal dysplasias
    Syndromes of orthopaedic importance
    Localized disorders of skin and soft tissue
    Diseases of the hematopoietic system
    Juvenile idiopathic arthritis
    Musculoskeletal infection
    Bone and soft-tissue tumors
    Cerebral palsy
    Myelomeningocele
    Other neuromuscular disorders
    Idiopathic scoliosis
    Congenital scoliosis
    Kyphosis
    Spondylolysis and spondylolistesis
    The cervical spine
    V. 2: The upper limb
    Developmental hip dysplasia
    Legg-Calvâe-Perthes syndrome
    Slipped capital femoral epiphysis
    Other conditions of the hip
    The lower extremity
    Limb-length discrepancy
    The foot
    The child with a limb deficiency
    Sports medicine in the growing child
    The principles of pediatric fracture and trauma care
    Upper extremity fractures in children
    Thoracolumbar spine and lower extremity fractures.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Print
    Mat Johnson.
    Summary: "Warren Duffy has returned to America for all the worst reasons: his marriage to a beautiful Welsh woman has come apart; his comic shop in Cardiff has failed; and his Irish-American father has died, bequeathing to Warren his last possession, a roofless, half-renovated mansion in the heart of black Philadelphia. On his first night in his new home, Warren spies two figures in the grass outside; when he screws up the nerve to confront them, they disappear. The next day he encounters ghosts of a different kind: in the face of the teenage girl he meets at a comics convention he sees the mingled features of his white father and his black mother, both now dead. The girl is his daughter and she thinks she's white. Warren sets off to remake his life with a reluctant daughter he never knew and a haunted house and history he knows too well. In their search for a new life they struggle with an unwanted house and its ghosts, fall in with a utopian mixed-race cult, and inspire a riot on Loving Day, the unsung holiday that celebrates interracial love"--Publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3560.O38167 L68 2016
    1
  • Digital
    editors, N.D. Embleton, J. Katz, E.E. Ziegler.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Manabu Fukumoto, editor.
    Summary: This open access book summarizes the latest scientific findings regarding the biological effects of the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant (FNPP) accident in 2011. Various cases of changes in animals and organisms have been reported since the FNPP accident. However, it is often unknown whether they are actually due to radiation, since the dose or dose-rate are not necessarily associated with the changes observed. This book brings together the works of radiation biologists and ecologists to provide reliable radioecology data and gives insight into future radioprotection. The book examines the environmental pollution and radiation exposure, and contains valuable data from abandoned livestock in the ex-evacuation zone and from wild animals including invertebrates and vertebrates, aqueous and terrestrial animals, and plants that are subjected to long-term exposure in the area still affected by radiation. It also analyzes dose evaluation, and offers new perspectives gained from the accident, as well as an overview for future studies to promote radioprotection of humans and the ecosystem. Since the biological impact of radiation is influenced by various factors, it is difficult to scientifically define the effects of low-dose/low-dose-rate radiation. However, the detailed research data presented can be combined with the latest scientific and technological advances, such as artificial intelligence, to provide new insights in the future. This book is a unique and valuable resource for researchers, professionals and anyone interested in the impact of exposure to radiation or contamination with radioactive materials.

    Contents:
    Part 1. The Environmental Pollution Caused by the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant (FNPP) Accident
    1. Estimation of Dose Rate for the Large Japanese Field Mice (Apodemus speciosus) Distributed in the "Difficult-to-Return Zones" in Fukushima Prefecture
    2. Impacts of the Fukushima Nuclear Accident on Fishery Products and Fishing Industry
    3. Incorporation and Accumulation of Strontium-90 in the Hard Tissue of Animals and Their Relationship with Strontium-90 Pollution in the Environment
    Part 2. Radiation Exposure and Its Effects on Wild Organisms after the FNPP Accident
    4. Radioactive Cesium Contamination of Arthropods and Earthworms after the FNPP accident
    5. Delayed Recovery from Declines in the Population Densities and Species Richness of Intertidal Invertebrates near the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant
    6. Mutations observed in mitochondrial DNA of salmon collected in Mano River, Fukushima Prefecture, Japan
    7. Influence of the FNPP Accident on Coniferous Trees: A Review
    Part 3. Radiation Exposure and Its Effects on Livestock after the FNPP Accident
    8. Analysis of Ovaries and Fertilities in Domestic Animals affected by the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    9. Transgenerational Effects on Calf Spermatogenesis and Metabolome Associated with Paternal Exposure to the FNPP Accident
    10. The Effect of Radiation on the Immune System in Pigs Affected by the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    11. Assessment of DNA Damage Induction in Farm Animals after the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    Part 4. Dose Evaluation in Association with the FNPP Accident
    12. Preliminary Study on Electron Spin Resonance Dosimetry Using Affected Cattle's Teeth due to the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    13. Estimation of External and Internal Exposure in Japanese Macaques after the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    Part 5. New Perspectives Raised after the FNPP Accident
    14. Properties of Radioactive Cs-bearing Particles Released by the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident and Trace Element Analysis
    15. Cellular Effects of Insoluble Particles Containing Radioactive Cesium
    16. Preparation and Genome Analysis of Immortalized Cells Derived from Wild Macaques Affected by the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    17. Effects of Radioactive Cesium-containing Water on Mice
    Prt 6. Overview of the FNPP accident
    18. Comparison of Radioactivity Release and Contamination from the Fukushima and Chernobyl Nuclear Power Plant Accidents
    19. The Pale Grass Blue Butterfly as an Indicator for the Biological Effect of the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    20. What We Learned and are Learning from the Affected Animal Dose Assessment Project. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mario J. Pastorino, Paula Marchelli, editors.
    Summary: Global climate change requires the development of programs that consider the active restoration of degraded forests and the use of native trees in afforestation to preserve the natural environment. International commitments like the UN REDD program, the Montréal Process and the Convention on Biological Diversity call for the breeding of species rarely contemplated by large industrial companies. Low-intensity breeding is the most rational strategy for those species: simple but robust, and not dependent on continuously increasing funding, and therefore effective even with a relatively small budget. It commonly focuses on high genetic diversity rather than improving economic traits and adaptability rather than productivity. Controlled crosses with full pedigrees typical of high-intensity breeding are replaced by open pollination. This book presents state-of-the-art breeding strategies from the last two decades for several forest tree species of prime importance in the natural forests of Argentina. They are distributed in the three main forestry ecoregions of the country: the subtropical dry forest (Chaco), the subtropical rain forests (Yungas and Alto Paraná rainforests) and the temperate forests of Patagonia. The book also discusses the genetic patterns of the selected species defined using genetic markers together with the analysis of the variation in quantitative traits. Further, it examines the crucial features of their reproductive biology, such as the mating system and gene flow and describes the current breeding programs. Lastly, it presents the latest developments in genetic resources and their emerging applications, concluding with some reflections and perspectives related to the conditioning imposed by climate change.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1
    Native forests claim for breeding in Argentina: general concepts and their state
    Section I
    Temperate Subantarctic Forests Chapter 2
    Temperate Subantarctic Forests: a huge natural laboratory
    Chapter 3
    Raulí (Nothofagus alpina = N. nervosa): the best quality hardwood in Patagonia
    Chapter 4
    Roble pellín (Nothofagus obliqua): a southern beech with a restricted distribution area in Argentina but a wide environmental range
    Chapter 5
    Nothofagus Mixed Forest: a breeding program for an interspecific hybridization system
    Chapter 6
    Patterns of genetic variation of lenga (Nothofagus pumilio) and ñire (Nothofagus antarctica): the most widely distributed and cold tolerant southern beeches in Patagonia
    Chapter 7
    Patagonian Cypres (Austrocedrus chilensis): the cedarwood of the emblematic architecture of North Patagonia
    Chapter 8
    Other species pf high ecological value
    Section II
    Subtropical Dry Forests
    Chapter 9
    Subtropical dry forests: the main forest ecoregion of Argentina
    Chapter 10
    Genetic variation patterns of algarrobos (Prosopis sp.) from "Gran Chaco Americano" (P. alba, P. nigra, P. hassleri, P. chilensis and P. flexuosa)
    Chapter 11
    Genetic breeding of Prosopis species from "Gran Chaco Americano" Chapter 12
    Species without current breeding relevance but high economic value
    Section III
    Subtropical Rainforests
    Chapter 13
    Subtropical rainforests: the Yungas and the Paranaense Rainforest
    Chapter 14
    Patterns of neutral genetic variation for three high-value cedar species from the Subtropical Rainforests of Argentina
    Chapter 15
    Breeding strategy for the Cedrela genus in Argentina
    Chapter 16
    Pino Paraná (Araucaria angustifolia): the most planted native forest tree species in Argentina
    Chapter 17
    Peteribí (Cordia trichotoma), Lapacho (Handroanthus impetiginosus) and Cebil (Anadenanthera colubrina var. cebil): three valuable species with incipient breeding programs
    Section IV
    Other species, new tools and final considerations
    Chapter 18
    Applications of High-Throughput Sequencing technologies on native forest tree species of Argentina and implications for low intensity breeding programs
    Chapter 19
    Questions, perspectives and final considerations under the global climate change conditioning.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Yukihiro Takahashi.
    Summary: This book demonstrates the significance of minimally invasive extracorporeal circulation and reduced time as two of the most important factors for pediatric cardiac surgery and early postoperative recovery. The content is divided into three major thematic sections: low invasiveness; pitfalls and countermeasures before, during and after operations; and suggestions on time saving and team building. Abundant figures aid in comprehension, while videos of the surgery offer practical insights for readers at all levels. Advances in extracorporeal circulation devices and management have led to new clinical problems such as decreased perfusion pressure, high pressures in oxygenators, and changes in acid-base equilibrium. The book explains these problems both clinically and experimentally, and describes countermeasures. Low Invasive Pediatric Cardiac Surgery provides valuable evidence and practical suggestions for all surgeons, perfusionists, scrub-nurses, and anesthesiologists who are engaged in pediatric cardiac surgery. It will also appeal to pediatric cardiologists and medical device manufacturers. The book is intended to share the authors experience and actual data with readers who have clinical experience, and to help prepare beginners. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Author
    Part I: Extracorporeal Circulation and Low Invasiveness
    1: Experience of Minimally Invasive Extracorporeal Circulation
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Implications of Invasion and Minimally Invasiveness in Cardiac Surgery
    1.3 Extracorporeal Circulation Method for Minimally Invasive
    1.4 History of Minimally Invasive Measures at Sakakibara Heart Institute
    1.4.1 Establishment and Clinical Effect of Ultrafiltration Method
    1.4.1.1 ECUM Effect in Infant VSD (1990) 1.4.1.2 ECUM Effect in Complete Atrioventricular Septal Defect (AVSD) (1992-1993)
    1.4.2 Problems with Ultrafiltration
    1.4.2.1 Protein Leakage (1991-1992)
    1.4.2.2 Arrhythmia (1991-1993)
    1.4.3 Advances in Ultrafiltration Methods
    1.4.3.1 Measurement of Inflammatory Reactive Substances (1991-1993)
    ECUM Only After the Start of Rewarming
    Ultrafiltration During Aortic Cross-Clamp + During Rewarming
    1.4.3.2 Measurement of Inflammatory Reactive Substances (1994-1995)
    1.4.3.3 New Heart-Lung Machine and Inflammatory Reactive Substances (1997-1998) 1.5 Summary of Minimally Invasive
    References
    2: Development of Cardiopulmonary Bypass System and Devices Aiming for Minimally Invasive
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Development History
    2.2.1 Low-Volume Oxygenator 1
    2.2.2 Component Type Heart-Lung Machine
    2.2.3 Low-Volume Oxygenator 2
    2.2.4 Low-Volume Oxygenator 3
    2.2.5 Isolated Pump-Controller Heart-Lung Machine 1
    2.2.6 Low-Volume Oxygenator 4
    2.2.7 Isolated Pump-Controller Heart-Lung Machine 2
    2.2.8 Isolated Pump-Controller Heart-Lung Machine 3
    2.2.9 The New Sakakibara Heart Institute 2.2.10 Transition of Priming Volume Reduction, Vacuum-Assisted Venous Drainage (VAVD)
    2.2.11 Isolated Pump-Controller Heart-Lung Machine 4
    2.2.12 Change in Priming Volume New Device
    2.2.13 Current Priming Volume
    2.3 Summary of Extracorporeal Circulation Devices
    References
    3: Advances in Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery and Homologous Blood Transfusion
    3.3 Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery for Acyanotic Congenital Heart Disease with Pulmonary Hypertension
    3.3.1 1983-1992
    3.3.2 1993
    3.3.3 1994 3.3.4 Possibility of Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery for VSD Infant Weighing 4 kg (1995)
    3.3.5 Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery in VSD Infants Weighing 3-4 kg (1997)
    3.3.6 Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery for Complete AVSD: Comparison with VSD
    3.3.7 Number of Blood Transfusions Used in Blood Priming Cases
    3.4 Management and Measures for Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery in Low-Weight Infant
    3.4.1 Determination of Indication for Bloodless Open-Heart Surgery
    3.4.1.1 Indication Decision by Clinical Evaluation
    3.4.1.2 Indication Decision by Hemodilution
    3.4.2 Surgery
    3.4.3 Anesthesia Management
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Christine Dickinson, Ana Hernandez Trillo, Michael Crossland.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Brendon J. Coventry, editor.
    Summary: Written by internationally acclaimed specialists, "Lower Abdominal and Perineal Surgery" provides pertinent and concise procedure descriptions spanning benign and malignant problems and minimally invasive procedures. Complications are reviewed when appropriate for the organ system and problem, creating a book that is both comprehensive and accessible. Stages of operative approaches with relevant technical considerations are outlined in an easily understandable manner. Forming part of the series, Surgery: Complications, Risks and Consequences, this volume Lower Abdominal and Perineal Surgery provides a valuable resource for all general surgeons and residents in training.

    Contents:
    Colorectal Surgery
    Anal Surgery
    Pilonidal Sinus Surgery
    Penile, Scrotal, Testicular Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Mats Brittberg, Konrad Slynarski.
    Summary: This book describes and discusses the available joint preservation techniques for maintaining the stability homeostasis of the lower extremity joints - specifically the hip, knee, and ankle - following injury. Readers will find detailed coverage of anatomy, pathology, techniques for repair, restoration, and regeneration, and rehabilitation strategies. Joint preservation is an emerging field in Orthopaedics that represents a response to the limitations of joint replacement technology. Using the techniques now available, surgeons can try to prevent or delay the onset of osteoarthritis or other degenerative conditions affecting the joints, particularly in young patients. Furthermore, modern tissue engineering offers the potential for whole-joint resurfacing, thereby achieving complete restoration. Optimal implementation of these techniques depends upon further refinement of methods and continuing improvements in knowledge of biomechanics, biology, and anatomy. Against this background, the present book is an ideal guide to the latest treatment modalities that will appeal to all who wish to learn more about indications, goals, procedures, and expected outcomes.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Hip
    1: Comprehensive Hip Preservation: Correction of Adult Hip Dysplasia and Repair of High-Grade Cartilage Injury
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Diagnostic Imaging in Adult Hip Dysplasia
    1.3 Correction of Hip Dysplasia and Open Treatment of High-Grade Cartilage Injury
    1.3.1 Periacetabular Osteotomy: Surgical Technique
    1.3.2 Surgical Dislocation of the Hip: Surgical Technique
    1.4 Cartilage Repair in the Setting of Alignment Correction
    1.4.1 Marrow Stimulation in the Hip 1.4.2 Autologous Chondrocyte Implantation in the Hip
    1.4.3 Mesenchymal Stem Cell/Signaling Cell Treatment of Hip Chondral Defects
    1.4.4 Osteochondral Transfer and Transplantation in the Hip
    1.5 Summary
    References
    2: Anatomy of the Hip Joint Preservation Point of View
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Blood Supply
    2.3 Nerves
    2.4 Hip Muscles
    2.5 Hip Flexors
    2.6 Hip Extensors
    2.7 Hip Abductors
    2.8 Hip Adductors
    2.9 External Rotators
    2.10 Internal Rotators
    2.11 Remarks
    References 3: Anatomy, Surgical Management, and Postoperative Outcomes of Acetabular Labral Tears
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 The Anatomy of the Labrum
    3.2.1 Innervation
    3.2.2 The Vascular Supply
    3.3 The Aetiology of Hip Labrum Disorders
    3.3.1 Types of Labral Lesions
    3.4 The Role of the Acetabular Labrum in Hip Disorders
    3.4.1 The Function of the Labrum
    3.4.2 Changes in Load Distribution
    3.4.3 The Radiographic Characteristics of Labral Tears
    3.4.4 Labral Tears and OA
    3.4.5 Labral Tears and Hip Dysplasia
    3.5 Patient Evaluation
    3.5.1 Clinical Examination 3.5.2 Diagnostic Imaging
    3.6 Surgical Treatment
    3.6.1 Indications for Surgery
    3.6.2 Surgical Technique for Labral Reconstruction
    3.6.3 Postoperative Management (Debridement, Repair, Reconstruction)
    3.6.3.1 Outcomes and Prognosis
    3.6.3.2 Return to Sports
    References
    Part II: Knee
    4: Bone Marrow Stimulation Techniques for Cartilage Repair
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 The Different Basic Techniques for Bone Marrow Stimulation
    4.2.1 Subchondral Drilling
    4.2.2 Abrasion Arthroplasty
    4.2.3 Microfracture
    4.2.4 Mobilization (According to Steadman [3]) 4.2.4.1 Femoral Condyle and Tibia Plateau
    4.2.4.2 Patella
    4.3 Matrix-Associated Bone Marrow Stimulation Techniques (MA-BMS)
    4.3.1 Carbon Rods and Pads
    4.3.2 Trans Arthroscopic Implant
    4.3.3 Implant of Carbon Fiber Plate
    4.4 AMIC (Autologous Matrix-Induced Chondrogenesis)
    4.4.1 Osteochondral Matrix Plugs
    4.4.2 Coral Exoskeleton
    4.4.3 Blood Clot Augmentation
    4.4.4 UV Light Stabilized Gel for Cartilage Repair
    4.4.5 Large Cartilage Bone Damage Treated with Bone Marrow Stimulation
    4.5 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joon Pio Hong, Geoffrey G. Hallock.
    Summary: "Adequate evaluation of lower limb wounds for salvage requires an itemized assessment of vascular, osseous, soft tissue, and functional deficits. Lower Extremity Reconstruction: A Practical Guide by renowned reconstructive surgeons and perforator flap masters J.P. Hong and Geoffrey G. Hallock presents an orthoplastic approach to this growing and challenging area of microsurgery. Throughout the well-illustrated text and videos, an impressive cadre of international surgeons share pearls and insights, including esoteric knowledge and step-by-step demonstration of techniques with pertinent case examples. This unique guide presents a practical, visual, and stepwise approach to learning and mastering a full array of flap and microsurgery approaches for traumatic, dysvascular, metabolic, and oncologic lower limb defects. Organized into 26 topic-specific chapters, the book covers a full spectrum of lower extremity topics-from wound prep, timing, closure alternatives, and therapy-to soft-tissue tumors and a new concept in drop foot treatment. Numerous videos demonstrate how surgeons can leverage workhorse options to prevent chronic non-healing wounds or amputations and achieve the goal of limb salvage"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Our Introduction to Lower Extremity Reconstruction / Joon Pio Hong and Geoffrey G. Hallock
    Assessment of the Normal and Impaired Lower Extremity / Rachel M. Clancy and Ronald M. Zuker
    Indications for Vascular Intervention in Lower Extremity Reconstruction / David L. Colen and Lawrence B. Colen
    Orthopaedic Evaluation of the Lower Extremity and the Concept of the Orthoplastic Approach / Shaun D. Mendenhall, Nicole A. Zelenski, Oded Ben-Amotz, Stephen J. Kovach, and L. Scott Levin
    Surgical Approach to Pediatric Bone and Soft-Tissue Tumors of the Lower Extremity / Rachel M. Clancy, Karen W. Wong, and Ronald M. Zuker
    Spare-Part Surgery / Marco Innocenti, Eric Santamaria, and Young Chul Suh
    Using the Flap and Angiosome Concepts to Optimize Functional Lower Leg and Foot Amputations / Christopher Attinger
    Vascular Anatomy of the Lower Extremity : A Practical Guide to Vascular Territories, Perforators, and Selection of Recipient Vessels / Alison Wong and Steven F. Morris
    Importance of Vascularity and Selecting the Recipient Vessels in Lower Extremity Reconstruction / Joon Pio Hong, Changsik John Park, and Hyunsuk Peter Suh
    General Wound Preparation and Timing / Casey T. Kraft, Ibrahim Khansa, and Jeffrey E. Janis
    The Pertinence of the Reconstructive Ladder and the Reconstructive Elevator / Patrick L. Reavey and Lawrence J. Gottlieb
    Nonflap Wound Closure Alternatives : Skin Graft, Skin Substitute, Skin Stretch, and Negative-Pressure Wound Therapy / Hyunsuk Peter Suh
    The Process for Flap Selection by Region of the Lower Extremity / Geoffrey G. Hallock
    The Basic Practical Lower Limb Muscle Local Flaps / Geoffrey G. Hallock
    Basic Local Perforator Flaps of the Lower Extremity / Geoffrey G. Hallock, Mouchammed Agko, Hung-Chi Chen, S. Raja Sabapathy, Hari Venkatramani, and Madhu Periasamy
    Common Versatile Free Flaps for the Lower Extremity / Geoffrey G. Hallock, Waleed Gibreel, Karim Bakri, and Samir Mardini
    Supermicrosurgery Approach to the Lower Limb / Joon Pio Hong
    Diabetic Foot Reconstruction / Joon Pio Hong
    Rationale for Lower Limb Sensate Flaps / Joon Pio Hong
    A New Concept in Drop Foot Treatment: Ninković's Technique-the Neuromusculotendinous Gastrocnemius Transfer / Milomir Ninković, Marina Ninković, and Alexander de Heinrich
    Modern Concepts of Prosthetic Rehabilitation in Amputation of the Lower Extremity / Stefan Salminger, Clemens Gstoettner, Agnes Sturma, and Oskar C. Aszmann
    Procurement of Thin Flaps as Indicated in the Lower Extremity / Joon Pio Hong
    Bone Flaps and Bone Transport for Lower Limb Reconstruction / Matthew Iorio, Stephen Andrew Sems, and Steven L. Moran
    Surgical Treatment for Lower Extremity Lymphedema / Isao Koshima, Hirofumi Imai, Shuhei Yoshida, Shogo Nagamatsu, Kazunori Yokota, Mitsunobu Harima, Shuji Yamashita, and Haruki Mizuta
    Lower Limb Vascularized Composite Allotransplantation / Pedro C. Cavadas
    Perioperative Care and Rehabilitation Specific to the Lower Limb / Manas Nigam, Michael V. Defazio, and Karen K. Evans.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    editors: Michael Parker and Werner Hohenberger.
    Summary: This atlas, containing a wealth of clear operative images, is designed to enable trainee surgeons to visualise the surgical field for procedures specific to laparoscopic colorectal surgery, thereby facilitating understanding and learning of surgical techniques and avoidance of intra- and postoperative complications. Step-by-step guidance is provided for a wide range of procedures employed in patients with benign and malignant tumours, inflammatory bowel disease, diverticular disease, rectal prolapse and other conditions. Examples include right colectomy techniques, sigmoid colectomy, left hemicolectomy, total colectomy, panproctocolectomy, total mesorectal excision, Hartmann's procedure and its reversal and rectopexy. Throughout, meticulous attention is paid to surgical anatomy. Whenever considered necessary, additional line drawings are included to aid comprehension of particular steps in the surgery. Readers seeking to improve their comprehension of surgical anatomy and how to perform these operative procedures will find the atlas to be an unparalleled source of information and assistance. A complementary book from the same authors focuses on open colorectal surgery.

    Contents:
    1 Anatomy of the Small Intestine
    2 Anatomy of the Large Intestine
    3 Lap appendectomy
    4 Lap formation of ileostomy and colostomy
    5 Oncological Right Colectomy by Laparoscopic Medial-To-Lateral Approach With Total Mesocolic Excision
    6 Laparoscopic Extended Right Colectomy
    7 The Initial Retrocolic Endoscopic Tunnel Approach to a Laparoscopic-Assisted Radical Right Colectomy: A (Modified) Lateral-Medial Technique for the Complete Mesocolic Excision of the Right Colon
    8 Lap right hemicolectomy for Crohn's Disease
    9 Lap Sigmoid Colectomy for Diverticular Disease
    10 Lap left hemicolectomy for cancer
    11 Lap total colectomy for IBD (New technique
    12 Lap panproctocolectomy + ileoanal pouch for UC
    13 Robotic Total Mesorectal Excision
    14 Laparoscopic low anterior resection and TME
    15 Trans-anal Total Meso-rectal Excision
    16 Lap Hartmann's
    17 Lap reversal of Hartmann's
    18 Laparoscopic Ventral Rectopexy for Rectal Prolapse
    19 Laparoscopic Posterior Rectopexy for Rectal Prolapse
    20 Laparoscopic surgery for endometriosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Werner Hohenberger, Michael Parker, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This atlas, containing a wealth of clear operative images, is designed to enable trainee surgeons to visualize the surgical field for procedures specific to open colorectal surgery, thereby facilitating understanding and learning of surgical techniques and avoidance of intra- and postoperative complications. Step-by-step guidance is provided for a wide range of procedures to the colon, rectum, pelvic floor, anus, and anal canal, in each case paying meticulous attention to surgical anatomy. The full range of potential indications for open surgery is considered, including benign and malignant tumors, inflammatory bowel disease, appendicitis, diverticulitis, hemorrhoids, anal fistulas, and rectal prolapse, among others. Whenever considered necessary, additional line drawings are included to aid comprehension of particular steps in the surgery. Readers seeking to improve their comprehension of surgical anatomy and how to perform these operative procedures will find the atlas to be an unparalleled source of information and assistance. A complementary book from the same authors focuses on laparoscopic colorectal surgery.

    Contents:
    I COLON 1 Surgical anatomy and embryology
    2 Appendectomy
    3 Diverticulitis
    4 Crohn's Disease
    5. Ulcerative Colitis
    6 Benign Tumor
    7 Ileocecal, sigmoid volvulus
    8 Surgery for cancer of the right colon
    9 Surgery for cancer of the transverse colon and flectures
    10 Surgery for cancer of the left colon
    11 Multivisceral resections
    II RECTUM 12 Surgical anatomy and embryology
    13 Benign tumors perianal excision including TEM
    14 Rectal cancer, anterior/low, anterior resection with TME/PME
    15 Lateral lymph node dissection
    16 Abdominoperanal intersphincteric resection
    17 Multivisceral resection
    18 Intersphincteric, conventional and extralevator rectal excision
    Gluteal muscle flap
    19 Resection of pelvic bones
    20 Flaps for reconstruction, VRAM flap
    III. PELVIC FLOOR, ANUS, AND ANAL CANAL 21 Anatomy and embryology
    22 Haemorrhoids
    23 Anal fistulas
    24 Entero- and rectocele, rectal prolapse
    25 Sphincter substitute
    26 Sacral nerve stimulation
    27 Incontinence, sphincter repair
    28 Perianal procedures (TEM, TAMIS).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sihe Qin, Jiancheng Zang, Shaofeng Jiao, Qi Pan, editors.
    Summary: The diagnosis and treatment described in this book is based on the combination of Ilizarov technique, Paleys principle and Qinsihe Natural Reconstruction theory. It covers all kinds of lower limb deformities, ranging from congenital deformities to acquired deformities, the sequelae of Poliomyelitis, Cerebral Palsy, Spina Bifida Sequelae, Traumatic Sequelae, Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, Osteogenesis Imperfecta and Congenital Pseudarthrosis Tibia, etc. There are also lots of clinical tips and tricks such as how to reduce radiation exposure during orthopaedic surgeries, how to correct multiple limb deformities in one stage, how to balance the dynamic muscle in complex foot and ankle deformities, and how to successfully accomplish the surgery of difficult lower limb reconstruction without allogeneic blood transfusion, etc. It is a valuable reference for orthopaedic surgeons and advanced trainees worldwide who interested in deformity correction and limb reconstruction.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    First, the Origin of the Qin Sihe Orthopedic Surgery
    Second, Dr. Qin Carried Out Excessive Surgery in the Cold Hei Long Jiang Province
    Third, Qin Sihe Entered Beijing to Set Up a Physical Disability Correction Center
    Fourth, Qin Sihe Took the Lead in Studying and Introduced the Ilizarov Method from Russia to China
    Fifth, Qin Sihe Has Created a Convenient and Efficient "Individualized Diagnosis and Technical Route"
    Sixth, the Establishment of Case Database for Orthopedic Surgery
    Seventh, Qin Sihe Became Acquainted with Western Orthopedics Circles Eighth, the Important Time Nodes
    Ninth, Dr. Qin Sihe's Gift to the World Orthopedics Academia
    Informative Abstract
    Disclosure
    Acknowledgment
    Contents
    1: Introduction
    1.1 Limb Deformity and Dysfunction
    1.1.1 General Situation of People with Limb Dysfunction in China
    1.1.2 Current Situation of Orthopedic Surgery in China
    1.1.3 The Origin, Formation, and Development of Qinsihe Orthopedic
    1.2 Basic Surgical Technique
    1.2.1 Soft Tissue Release
    1.2.2 Bony Osteotomy
    1.2.3 Tendon Transfer 1.2.3.1 Relationship Between Immobilization and Exercise After Tendon Transposition
    1.2.3.2 The Following Factors Must Be Considered in Tendon Transfer
    1.2.4 Arthrodesis
    1.2.5 Lengthening and Equalization for Lower Limb
    1.2.6 Qinsihe Plaster Method for Lower Limb Deformity
    1.3 The Art of Minimally Invasive Surgery
    1.3.1 Surgical Skill
    1.3.2 Art of Surgery
    1.3.3 Relation of Surgical Speed and Quality
    1.3.4 Which Factors Make the Surgery Faster and Better?
    1.3.4.1 Strategic Element: Master the Wisdom of Winning 1.3.4.2 Tactical Elements: Surgeon's Martial Arts
    1.3.4.3 The Magical Use of Conventional Orthopedic Instruments, Rarely Use X-Ray Examination During Surgery
    1.3.5 Clinical Application of Qinsihe Mini-invasive Surgery
    1.3.5.1 Main Application
    1.3.5.2 Special Surgical Instruments
    1.3.5.3 Suggestions for Subcuticular Releasing of Tendon and Membrane
    1.3.5.4 Indications and Clinical Application of Mini-invasive Technique
    1.3.6 Rational Application of Tourniquet
    1.4 Preoperative Examination
    1.4.1 Lower Extremity Deformity Checklists and Records 1.4.2 Preoperative Examination
    1.4.3 Physical Examination
    1.4.4 Lower Limb Deformity Surgical Treatment Evaluation Procedure
    1.5 Surgical Indications and Expected Outcomes
    1.5.1 Surgical Indications
    1.5.2 Purpose and Outcome of Lower Limb Orthopedic Surgery
    1.5.3 The Patients Should Undergo Surgery as Soon as Possible
    1.5.4 Surgical Goal Designing
    1.6 Advantages of Surgical Treatment of Lower Extremity Deformity
    1.7 Surgical Decision Making
    1.7.1 Principle of Lower Limb Surgery
    1.7.2 How to Make a Correct Surgical Plan
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gian Nicola Bisciotti, Piero Volpi, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Tendonitis, tendinosis, or tendinopathy?
    2. Healing processes of the tendon
    3. Adductor tendinopathy
    4. Rectus femoris tendinopathy
    5. Iliopsoas tendinopathy
    6. Quadriceps tendinopathy
    7. Iliotibial band syndrome (ITBS)
    8. Hamstring syndrome
    9. Pes anserine tendinopathy
    10. Achilles tendinopathy
    11. Patellar tendinopathy
    12. Hindfoot tendinopathies
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Morgia, Giorgio Ivan Russo.
    Summary: "Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms and Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia: From Research to Bedside offers full acknowledgment of the basic research of lower urinary tract symptoms (LUTS) and benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH), also connecting the clinical and practice management of the disease. It provides a full comprehension of LUTS and BPH from several aspects, allowing for a schematic interpretation of the disease and subsequent medical management. Going beyond the guidelines in the field, this title enhances the knowledge of BPH onset, allowing for the advancement of research, beneficial clinical implication and treatment. Perfect for researchers, urologists, pathologists and endocrinologists, this must-have reference provides what is needed to understand LUTS and BPH in one easy to reference place.Provides a clear understanding of the pathological mechanisms that are present in lower urinary tract symptoms (LUTS) and benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH)Incorporates research with the clinical aspects of LUTS and BPH, including surgical techniquesPresents an overview of LUTS and BPH in one easy to reference place."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Marcus Drake, Andrea Cocci, Ricardo Pereira e Silva, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth insight into the symptoms and symptom complexes affecting the lower urinary tract and the underlying causative conditions. The emphasis throughout is practical and clinical, with coverage of all levels of the patient pathway. In addition to the extensive guidance on diagnostic assessment and interpretation, the management of voiding and storage lower urinary tract symptoms, including incontinence, is fully described and potential complications and neurological conditions are discussed. Information is also included on relevant basic science and epidemiology. Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms in Adults: A Clinical Approach will be an ideal source of expert knowledge for practitioners in functional urology, urogynecology, and neuro-urology gerontology. .

    Contents:
    The Urinary Tract: Form and Function
    The Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms
    Conditions and Syndromes
    LUTS assessment
    Treatment of Voiding LUTS
    Treatment of Storage LUTS
    Influences and Complications
    Neurological Diseases and LUTS.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ehren Myers.
    Summary: Perfect for quick reference and NCLEX-PN prep. -- From publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Procedures
    Assess
    Life span
    Med surg & emergency
    Meds/IV/fluids
    Labs/ECG
    Diseases & patient ed
    Tools/index.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
  • Print
    David B. Agus ; with Kristin Loberg.
    Contents:
    Destiny of the species : welcome to the lucky years
    The century of biology : the cure is already inside you
    This isn't science fiction : the power of technology to extend your life
    The future you : how your small data in the context of big data will save you
    The dawn of precision medicine : how to manage its power and perils
    Take the two-week challenge : how to measure and interpret your own data
    The danger of misinformation : how to know whom and what to trust
    A body in motion tends to stay lucky : the one supplement you're not getting enough of
    Wonder drugs that work : sleep, sex, touching, and tools to tame inflammation
    The butterfly effect : get ready to flap your wings.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA776.5 .A39 2016
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Sunil V. Manjila, Thomas Mroz, Michael P. Steinmetz.
    Summary: "Authored by experienced surgeons and key innovators in the fast-moving field of LIF surgery, Lumbar Interbody Fusions provides an in-depth, focused approach to recent advances in surgical techniques and technology. Covering both minimally invasive and open procedures, this comprehensive reference provides step-by-step details for proven techniques, including extreme lateral, oblique lateral, and direct lateral approaches; intertransverse approaches; axial approaches; and endoscopic approaches"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Lumbar interbody fusions: a primer. General indications and contraindications
    Complications and avoidance in lumbar interbody fusions
    Section 2: Anatomy and intraoperative imaging for lumbar interbody fusion. Relevant surgical anatomy of the dorsal lumbar spine
    Relevant surgical anatomy of the lateral and anterior lumbar spine
    Intraoperative image-guided navigation for lumbar interbody fusion
    Section 3: Techniques, pearls, and complication avoidance in lumbar interbody fusions. Mini-open anterior lumbar interbody fusion (ALIF)
    Posterior lumbar interbody fusion (PLIF)
    Transforaminal lumbar interbody fusion (TLIF)
    Minimally invasive transforaminal lumbar interbody fusion (MITLIF)
    Minimally invasive midline lumbar fusion (MIDLIF)
    Lateral transpsoas approach to interbody fusion
    Pre-psoas (oblique) lateral interbody fusion
    Pre-psoas (oblique) lateral interbody fusion at L5-S1
    Interlaminar lumbar instrumented fusions (ILIF)
    Endoscopic lumbar interbody fusion
    Section 4: Adjunct instrumentation in lumbar interbody fusion. Interbody implant options in interbody fusion
    Biologic options in interbody fusion
    Integrated screw/plate interbody fusion devices
    Spinous process plates for lumbar fixation
    Instrumentation for stability after lumbar interbody fusion
    Section 5: Special considerations. Revision interbody fusion
    Interbody fusion strategies in thoracic and sacral overlap diseases
    Evidence-based report on interbody fusions of the lumbar spine
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Eeva S.M. Tuppurainen, Shawn Babiuk, Eyal Klement.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive but concise overview on the economically important emerging cattle pox virus derived Lumpy Skin Disease, including the characteristics of causative agent, description of clinical signs in cattle, pathology and histopathology, immunity, geographical distribution, epidemiology and transmission pathways, control and eradication of the disease. In addition the recent developments in vaccination, mathematical modeling and risk assessment are discussed. Lumpy Skin Disease currently spreads aggressively across the Middle and Near East. The first incursion to the European Union territory occurred in Greece in autumn 2015. The book targets clinicians and field veterinarians in Lumpy Skin Disease affected regions, veterinary authorities as well as advanced students in veterinary medicine and virology.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents;
    1: Introduction to Lumpy Skin Disease;
    2: General Description of Lumpy Skin Disease; References;
    3: Economic Impact of Lumpy Skin Disease; 3.1 Direct Impact of Clinical Disease; 3.2 Indirect Economic Impact of LSD; References;
    4: Geographic Distribution of Lumpy Skin Disease; References;
    5: Current Legislation and Trade Recommendations; References; Part I: Lumpy Skin Disease Virus;
    6: Taxonomy; References;
    7: Morphology; References;
    8: Genome; References;
    9: Replication in a Host; References;
    10: Propagation of the Virus In Vitro; References.
    11: Persistence and Stability of the VirusReferences;
    12: Immunity; References;
    13: Epidemiology and Transmission; 13.1 Transmission Modes of LSDV; 13.2 Potential Vectors of Lumpy Skin Disease Virus; 13.3 Direct Transmission of Lumpy Skin Disease; 13.4 Transmission Via Subclinically Infected Cattle; 13.5 Spread of Lumpy Skin Disease; 13.6 Seasonality; 13.7 Geographical Risk Factors; 13.8 Risk Factors in the Herd Level; 13.9 Risk Factors in the Animal Level; 13.10 Further Suggested Studies; References; Part II: Early Detection of Lumpy Skin Disease, Diagnostic Tools and Treatment.
    14: Clinical SignsReferences;
    15: Sample Collection and Transport; References;
    16: Diagnostic Tools; References;
    17: Treatment of Lumpy Skin Disease; Part III: Control and Eradication;
    18: Vaccines Against LSD and Vaccination Strategies; 18.1 Vaccination Strategies; References;
    19: Slaughter of Infected and In-Contact Animals; References;
    20: Animal Movement Control and Quarantine; References;
    21: Vector Surveillance and Control; 21.1 Vector Surveillance; 21.2 Vector Control; References;
    22: Decontamination and Disinfection; References;
    23: Active and Passive Surveillance; References.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Lenfant, Claude.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Lung biology in health and disease to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    edited by Jack A. Roth, Waun Ki Hong, Ritsuko Komaki ; associate editors: Anne S. Tsao, Joe Y. Chang, Shanda H. Blackmon.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Lynn Tanoue, Frank Detterbeck.
    Summary: Get a quick, expert overview of the many key facets of lung cancer evaluation and management with this concise, practical resource by Drs. Lynn T. Tanoue and Frank Detterbeck. This easy-to-read reference presents a summary of today's best evidence-based approaches to diagnosis and management in this critical area.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Anne C. Chiang, Roy S. Herbst, editors.
    Summary: Lung cancer has seen a paradigm shift in disease treatment over the past few years, with major changes in the therapeutic drugs now available as well as in the overall management approach. For targeted and immunotherapeutic approaches, understanding the biology of acquired resistance is a key strategy that has yielded productive advances in the subsequent treatment. Future advances also include incorporating biomarker data obtained from solid and liquid biopsies, as well as combination of immunotherapy with radiotherapy and in special populations such patients with CNS involvement.

    Contents:
    Tumor Microenvironment: Immune Effector and Suppressor Imbalance
    Biomarkers: is tumor mutational burden the new prognostic grail?
    Liquid biopsies: new technology and evidence
    Osimertinib in EGFR-Mutant Non-Small Cell Lung Carcinoma: Clinical Activity and Mechanisms of Resistance
    What can we learn from acquired resistance?
    Management of Brain Metastases
    Spectrum and Management of Immune Related Adverse Events Due to Immune Checkpoint Inhibitors
    Therapeutic Advances in Small Cell Lung Cancer Management
    Small Cell Lung Cancer: Biology Advances
    Immunotherapy and Radiotherapy: New Strategies
    Ultimate Precision: Targeting Cancer but not Normal Self-Replication
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Goetz Kloecker, Susanne M. Arnold, Mostafa M. Fraig, Cesar A. Perez.
    Summary: "Covers the new standards of care and helps you to remain current on lung cancer for practice, board review, and re-certification in a very easy-to-read, concise and quick to digest format. The fast-changing paradigms of care are presented in print, e-book and the on line access will be updated annually"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    History of Lung Cancer / Goetz Kloecker
    Epidemiology of Lung Cancer / Goetz Kloecker
    Etiology of Lung Cancer / Goetz Kloecker
    Tobacco and Lung Cancer / Goetz Kloecker, Brian Dong, Rohit Kumar
    Economics of Lung Cancer / Jorge Rios, Shruti Bhandari
    Pathobiology of Non-Small Cell Lung Carcinoma / Mostafa Fraig
    Pathobiology of Small Cell Carcinoma and Other Neuroendocrine Tumors of the Lung / Mostafa Fraig
    The Stem Cell Hypothesis of Lung Cancer / Christine Fillmore Brainson
    Prevention of Lung Cancer / Susanne Arnold
    Early Detection of Lung Cancer / Shruti Bhandari, Dhan Pham
    Diagnostics of Lung Cancer / Shruti Bhandari, Dhan Pham, Chandler Park, Samuel Reynolds, Bilal Athar Jalil, Umair Gauhar, Emily Jonczak, Raja Mudad
    Staging of Lung Cancer / Susanne Arnold
    Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer Treatment : Early Stage / Matthew Fox, Victor van Berkel, Neil Dunlap, Phuong Ngo, Luis E. Raez, Rohit Kumar, Jose Pinto-Llerena, Ignacio Gil-Bazo, Jonathan Rice, Katy Alyse Marino, Mike May
    Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer Treatment : Locally Advanced / Matthew Fox, Neal Dunlap, Michael May, Rohit Kumar, Luis Raez, Andrea Anampa-Guzmán, Ignacio Gil-Bazo, Cesar A. Perez
    Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer Treatment : Metastatic / Andrew Tumen, Katy Alyse Marino, Victor van Berkel, Neal Dunlap, Steven Mandish, Phuong Ngo, Moises Harari Turquie, Jose Pinto Llerena, Gil Bazo, Edgardo S. Santos, Cesar Perez, Jennifer Cudris
    Small Cell Lung Cancer Treatment : Early Stage / William. M Whited, Kate Alyse Marino, Matthew Fox, Victor van Berkel, Phuong Ngo, Neal Dunlap, Mehran Yusuf, Alden Klarer
    Small Cell Lung Cancer Treatment : Locally Advanced / Phuong Ngo, Neal Dunlap, Mehran Yusuf, Diana Saravia, Cesar Perez
    Small Cell Lung Cancer Treatment : Metastatic / Phuong Ngo, Neal Dunlap, Mehran Yusuf, Muhammad Husnain, Cesar Perez
    Supportive and Palliative Care in Lung Cancer / Shruti Bhandari, Jonathan S. Alexander
    Interventional Radiology in the Diagnosis and Treatment of Lung Cancer / Douglas M. Coldwell, Omar Zuberi
    Immunotoxicity / Amitoj Gill, Rahul Gosain
    Pulmonary Carcinoid / Hamza Hashmi
    Malignant Pleural Mesothelioma / Hamza Hashmi
    Thymoma / Hamza Hashmi.
    Digital Access AccessHemOnc 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Karen L. Reckamp, editor.
    Contents:
    Lung cancer screening
    Diagnosis and molecular classification of lung cancer
    Lung cancer staging and prognosis
    Surgical treatment of lung cancer
    Treatment: radiation therapy
    Chemotherapy for advanced non-small cell lung cancer
    Multimodality therapy for NSCLC
    Targeted therapies for lung cancer
    Resistance to therapy
    Immunotherapy in lung cancer
    Palliative care in lung cancer
    Management of lung cancer in the elderly
    Multidisciplinary care
    Small cell lung cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC280.L8 L864 2016
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: Lung cancer and autoimmune diseases are complex entities in that they involve gene disturbance, gene polymorphism, and impaired gene repair mechanisms. The volume focuses on altered gene expression in tumor processes and in chronic autoimmune disorders. The chapters discuss the biological rationale for novel disease protein markers, present relevant clinical results, and give some diagnostic and therapeutic tips.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Aamir Ahmad, Shirish Gadgeel, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Lung Cancer Statistics
    2. Epidemiology of Lung Cancer
    3. Lung Cancer In Never Smokers
    4. Immune Therapy
    5. Anti-angiogenesis in personalized therapy of lung cancer
    6. Target therapy in Lung Cancer
    7. Mechanisms of Resistance to EGFR Tyrosine Kinase Inhibitors and Therapeutic Approaches: an update
    8. KRAS-Mutant Lung Cancers in the Era of Targeted Therapy
    9. Anaplastic Lymphoma Kinase (ALK) Signaling in Lung Cancer
    10. Chemotherapy Resistance in Lung Cancer
    11. Current state of metal-based drugs for the efficient therapy of lung cancers and lung metastases.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Aamir Ahmad, Shirish M. Gadgeel, editors.
    Contents:
    Lung cancer genomics in the era of accelerated targeted drug development / Priyanga Wijesinghe and Aliccia Bollig-Fischer
    Emerging biomarkers in personalized therapy of lung cancer / Philip T. Cagle, Kirtee Raparia, and Bryce P. Portier
    Epithelial mesenchymal transition in aggressive lung cancers / Vivek Mittal
    The role of cancer stem cells in recurrent and drug-resistant lung cancer / Raagini Suresh, Shadan Ali, Aamir Ahmad, Philip A. Philip
    The microenvironment of lung cancer and therapeutic implications / Vivek Mittal, Tina El Rayes, Navneet Narula, Timothy E. McGraw, Nasser K. Altorki, and Mary Helen Barcellos-Hoff
    Epigenetics in personalized management of lung cancer / Aamir Ahmad
    Next-generation sequencing and applications to the diagnosis and treatment of lung cancer / Kristina M. Kruglyak, Erick Lin, and Frank S. Ong
    Nanomedicine for treatment of lung cancer / Sajid Hussain
    Personalized therapy of small cell lung cancer / Bryan J. Schneider and Gregory P. Kalemkerian
    Personalized radiation therapy (PRT) for lung cancer / Jian-Yue Jin and Feng-Ming (Spring) Kong
    Personalized therapy of non-small cell lung cancers (NSCLC) / Shirish M. Gadgeel.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Adrian Cristian.
    Summary: "Edited by cancer rehabilitation specialist Dr. Adrian Cristian, Lung Cancer Rehabilitation provides clinicians with a concise and accessible resource covering the holistic rehabilitation of lung cancer patients. Beginning with the epidemiology, genetics, and pathophysiology of lung cancer, it then covers clinical assessment and treatment options before providing comprehensive coverage of rehabilitation. Offering practical information, best practices and the latest advances and research, this book is a valuable reference for physical medicine and rehabilitation physicians and residents, as well as occupational therapists and physical therapists"-- publisher's description.

    Contents:
    An Overview of the Epidemiology, Types of Lung Cancer, Staging, and Rehabilitation Continuum of Care
    Systemic Therapy and Radiation Therapy in Lung Cancer
    The Assessment of the Person With Lung Cancer and Implications for the Rehabilitation Clinician
    Assessment, Treatment, and Rehabilitation of Bone and Spinal Metastasis in Lung Cancer
    Lung Cancer in the Palliative Care Setting: Successes, Challenges, and Opportunities for Collaboration
    Psychosocial Distress and Anxiety in Lung Cancer
    Lung Cancer SurvivorshipExercise and Lung Cancer
    Lung Cancer Book—Prehabilitation Chapter
    Cancer-Related Fatigue in Lung Cancer
    Sarcopenia and Frailty in Lung Cancer
    Nutritional Considerations in Lung Cancer Rehabilitation
    Pain Management in Lung Cancer Rehabilitation
    Cognitive Impairment in Lung Cancer and Brain Metastases
    Neuropathy in Lung Cancer
    Complications and Rehabilitation Challenges of Lung Cancer Surgeries
    Musculoskeletal and Neurological Complications of Check Point Inhibitors
    Functional Outcomes in Lung Cancer Rehabilitation
    Telemedicine in Lung Cancer Rehabilitation.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Mark S. Parker, MD, FACR, Professor, Diagnostic Radiology and Internal Medicine, Director, Thoracic Imaging Division, Director, Thoracic Imaging Fellowship Program, Director, Lung Cancer Screening Program, VCU Health, Richmond, Virginia, Robert C. Groves, MD, Associate Program Director, Radiology Residency Program, Assistant Professor of Radiology, Cardiothoracic Division, Department of Radiology, VCU Health, Richmond, Virginia, Joanna E. Kusmirek, MD, Assistant Professor of Radiology, Cardiothoracic Division, Department of Radiology, VCU Health, Richmond, Virginia, Leila Rezai Gharai, MD, Assistant Professor of Radiology, Cardiothoracic Division, Department of Radiology, VCU Health, Richmond, Virginia, Samira Shojaee, MD, Assistant Professor of Internal Medicine, Fellowship Director, Interventional Pulmonology, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, VCU Health, Richmond, Virginia.
    Contents:
    1. Lung Cancer Epidemiology.
    2. Risk Factors for Lung Cancer.
    3. Evolution of Lung Cancer Screening.
    4. Lung Cancer Screening Pros and Cons.
    5. Variable Imaging Presentations of Lung Cancer.
    6. Lung Cancer-Screening Results Reporting.
    7. Detection and Management of Unexpected Incidental Pulmonary and Nonpulmonary Findings.
    8. Elements of a Successful Lung Cancer-Screening Program.
    9. Future of Lung Cancer Screening.
    10. Test Cases: Applying Lung CT Screening Reporting and Data System (Lung-RADS).
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Janelle V. Baptiste, Richard M. Schwartzstein, Carey C. Thomson, editors.
    Summary: Lung cancer is the second most diagnosed cancer and remains the leading cause of cancer-related deaths in the United States. The high mortality is largely the consequence of late diagnosis; lung cancer is typically asymptomatic in early stages when a surgical cure is most likely. As a result, there has been great interest in and research on early detection of lung cancer through screening. There is evidence for reduced disease-specific mortality through screening for lung cancer. However, creating an integrated, systematic approach to lung cancer screening remains a challenge for providers. A successful lung cancer screening program weighs the benefits and harms of screening, clearly defines the target population and the screening process, and does not exclude eligible patient populations based on race, ethnicity, or socioeconomic status, In addition it should promote shared decision-making and address risk reduction. Lung Cancer Screening: Practical Aspects for Primary Care provides a comprehensive and pragmatic guide to screening for lung cancer in real world clinical practice. The first two chapters summarize the epidemiology, risk factors and disparities in lung cancer, and provide the evidence base for screening for lung cancer. The disparities in lung cancer among different groups within the US population are well known. This text highlights how health disparities in lung cancer affect screening and have led to modification of lung cancer screening guidelines. Subsequent chapters provide a guide to implementing a successful lung cancer screening program and address the barriers that arise during implementation. The book concludes withreal-world solutions to overcoming barriers in lung cancer screening. This pocket guide is an essential read and bookshelf reference for providers who do not have the specialized knowledge of screening for lung cancer. It also appeals to pulmonologists, fellows in Pulmonary Medicine, chest radiologists, and advanced practice providers with an interest in setting up lung cancer screening in any clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Lung Cancer and Risk Factors
    Health Disparities in Lung Cancer Screening
    Best Practices in Lung Cancer Screening
    Implementing Lung Cancer Screening in Clinical Practice
    Innovations in Integrating Smoking Cessation and the Shared Decision-Making Discussion into Lung Cancer Screening
    Lung Cancer Screening Results and Tracking.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Takahisa Gono, Hitoshi Tokuda, Fumikazu Sakai, Tamiko Takemura, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text expounds the pathophysiology, diagnosis, and treatment of lung disease associated with rheumatoid arthritis (RA), an autoimmune disease that primarily affects joints. Recent advances in therapy for RA provide the benefit of achieving a better outcome in patients with arthritis, and a large number of reports on RA are now available. Moreover, the American College of Rheumatology and the European League Against Rheumatism have proposed guidelines and recommendations for management of RA patients. Therefore, clinicians around the world can adequately understand how to manage patients who have joint symptoms in RA. At the same time, however, the management of RA patients who have lung problems has not been disseminated sufficiently, although lung disease is a common complication in approximately 30-40 % of patients with RA. Unfortunately, there has been a lack of tangible evidence regarding the pathophysiology, diagnosis, and management of lung disease associated with RA. Each expert author in this book elucidates the current status of knowledge about lung disease in RA and the management of RA patients with lung diseases. Thus this valuable collection benefits not only rheumatologists but also respirologists, radiologists, pathologists, general practitioners, and medical staff such as nurses who are involved in the management of RA.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction
    1. Overview: Clinical significance of lung disease associated with Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Part II. Airway disease in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    2. Comprehensive understanding of airway disease in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    3. Pathology of airway disease in rheumatoid arthritis
    4. Imaging of Airway diseases of rheumatoid arthritis
    5. Therapeutic strategy for airway disease in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Part III. Interstitial lung disease in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    6. Comprehensive understanding of interstitial lung disease in rheumatoid arthritis
    7. Pathology of interstitial lung disease in patients with rheumatoid arthritis
    8. Radiological characteristics of interstitial lung diseases in patients with connective tissue disease: focus on rheumatoid arthritis
    9. Therapeutic strategies for interstitial lung diseases in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Part IV. Diagnosis and treatment of acute lung disease in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    10. Bacterial and Fungal Infections in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    11. Mycobacterium infections in Rheumatoid Arthritis (tuberculosis and nontuberculous mycobacteriosis)
    12. Organizing Pneumonia in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    13. Acute pulmonary infiltrates in patients with rheumatoid arthritis: Differential diagnosis and management.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Aryeh Fischer, Joyce S. Lee, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Venkataramana K. Sidhaye, Michael Koval.
    Contents:
    Junctional interplay in lung epithelial barrier function / Michael Koval
    Ion transport and lung fluid balance / Charles Downs
    Glucose transport and homeostasis in lung epithelia / Deborah L. Baines and Emma H. Baker
    Pulmonary surfacant trafficking and homeostasis / Joseph L. Alcorn
    Integrin regulation of the lung epithelium / Erin Plosa and Roy Zent
    Epithelial regeneration and lung stem cells / Shama Ahmad and Aftab Ahmad
    The function of epithelial cells in pulmonary fibrosis / Shijing Jia and Kevin K. Kim
    The role of epithelial cell quality control in health and disease of the distal lung / Michael F. Beers, Shin-ichi Nureki and Surafel Mulugeta
    The respiratory epithelium in COPD / Chad H. Hochberg and Venkataramana Sidhaye
    Acute respiratory distress syndrome / Rachel L. Zemans
    Epithelial barrier dysfunction in asthma / Janelle Veazey, Tim Smyth and Steve N. Georas
    Cystic fibrosis / Samuel A. Molina and William R. Hunt.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Sumita B. Khatri, Emily J. Pennington, editors.
    Summary: This book is ideal for the practicing clinician looking to better understand how our environment impacts the lung. A compilation of reviews explores how clinicians can be aware and better determine environmental effects on lung health, and provides guidelines for medical providers to diagnose, counsel and mitigate risk. Various lung diseases are affected by the external environment. Asthma is common, however other airways diseases, such as interstitial lung disease, malignancies, and even adverse effects from reactions treatments for other medical conditions can affect the health of the lungs. While there are books and chapters written on occupational lung disease and environmental causes of asthma, the intent of this body of work is to address the exposome and the effects on a broader group of lung disease. In addition to information on traditional exposure sources, such as air pollution and occupational exposures, this resource explores newer areas of interest, including lung disease from recreational inhalants and the role of climate change on lung health.

    Contents:
    Air Matters: The Effect of Ozone and Traffic Related Air Pollution on the Airways
    Environmental Factors on Lung Health in Cystic Fibrosis and non-Cystic Fibrosis Bronchiectasis
    Molds and Respiratory Disease
    Occupational Exposome and Lung Health
    Environmental and Pollution Related Risks for Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis
    Lung Cancer in Never Smokers
    Acute and Chronic Lung Disease from Recreational Inhalants
    Pulmonary Hypertension and Air Pollution
    Climate Change and the Lung Exposome.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Fabiola Atzeni, José A. Gómez-Puerta, Jacobo Sellares.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Print
    Yong-Xiao Wang, editor.
    Summary: Respiratory diseases are leading causes of death and disability globally, with about 65 million people suffering from COPD, and 334 million from asthma, the most common chronic disease. Each year, tens of millions of people develop and can die from respiratory infections such as pneumonia and TB. Systemic inflammation may induce and exacerbate local inflammatory diseases in the lungs, and local inflammation can in turn cause systemic inflammation. There is increasing evidence of the coexistence of systemic and local inflammation in patients suffering from asthma, COPD, and other lung diseases, and the co-morbidity of two or more local inflammatory diseases often occurs. For example, rheumatoid arthritis frequently occurs together with, and promotes the development of, pulmonary hypertension. This co-morbidity significantly impacts quality of life, and can result in death for those affected. Current treatment options for lung diseases are neither always effective, nor often condition-specific; there is a desperate need for novel therapeutics in the field. Additionally, the molecular and physiological significance of most major lung diseases are not well understood, which further impedes development of new treatments, especially in the case of coexistent lung diseases with other inflammatory diseases. Great progress has been made in recent years in many areas of the field, particularly in understanding the molecular geneses, regulatory mechanisms, signalling pathways, and cellular processes within lung diseases, as well as basic and clinical technology, drug discovery, diagnoses, treatment options, and predictive prognoses. This is the first text to aggregate these developments. In two comprehensive volumes, experts from all over the world present state-of-the-art advances in the study of lung inflammation in health and disease. Contributing authors cover well-known as well as emerging topics in basic, translational, and clinical research, with the aim of providing researchers, clinicians, professionals, fellows, and students with new perspectives and concepts. The editor hopes this book will also help to direct future research in lung disease and other inflammatory diseases, and result in the development of novel therapeutics.

    Contents:
    1. Potential role of mast cells in regulating corticosteroid insensitivity in severe asthma
    2. Galectin-3 Promotes ROS, Inflammation and Vascular Fibrosis in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    3. Anti-Inflammatory Effects of Statins in Lung Vascular Pathology: From Basic Science to Clinical Trials
    4. Evolving Schema for Employing Network Biology Approaches to Understand Pulmonary Hypertension
    5. Pulmonary Inflammation and KRAS Mutation in Lung Cancer
    6. microRNA Targets for Asthma Therapy
    7. Roles of genetic predisposition in the sex-bias of pulmonary pathophysiology, as a function of estrogens
    8. Hypercapnic respiratory failure-driven skeletal muscle dysfunction: It is time for animal mod-els-based mechanistic research
    9. Role of airway smooth muscle in inflammation related to asthma and COPD
    10. Systemic Sclerosis and Pulmonary Disease
    11. Innate Lymphoid Cells in airway inflammation
    12. Sjogren's Syndrome and pulmonary disease
    13. Redox Regulation, Oxidative Stress and Inflammation in Group 3 Pulmonary Hypertension
    14. Sex-Steroid Signaling in Lung Diseases and Inflammation
    15. Cytokines, Chemokines and Inflammation in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    16. Interactive roles of CaMKII/Ryanodine Receptor Signaling and Inflammation in Lung Diseases
    17. Reciprocal Correlations of Inflammatory and Calcium Signaling in Asthma Pathogenesis
    18. Crosstalk between Lung and Extrapulmonary Organs in Infection and Inflammation
    19. Inflammation in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    20. Lysophospholids in Lung Inflammatory Diseases.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Ahmed El-Hashash.
    Summary: This book reviews stem cell behavior in the lung as it relates to regenerative medicine and stem cell therapeutics. Topics ranging from basic developmental mechanisms of various types of lung stem cells through the identification and properties of stem cell behavior and their potential applications in lung repair and regeneration, are discussed by an expert in the field. These discoveries are placed within the structural context of tissue and developmental biology in sections dealing with recent advances in understanding of developmental lung stem cell biology and behavior and their potential applications. Lung Stem Cell Behavior is essential reading for researchers in stem cell biology and regenerative medicine, patient advocates, undergraduate students, graduate students, and clinicians interested in cellular therapy and tissue engineering therapies.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; About the Author; List of Figures; Introduction;
    Chapter 1: Brief Overview of the Human Respiratory System Structure and Development; 1.1 Brief Overview of the Structure of Human Respiratory System; 1.2 Brief Overview of the Development of Human Respiratory System;
    Chapter 2: Diversity of Lung Stem and Progenitor Cell Types; 2.1 Alveolar Epithelial Stem and Progenitor Cells; 2.1.1 Localization and Characterization; 2.1.2 The Repair and Regeneration Capacities and Mechanisms. 2.2 Tracheal and Bronchial Epithelial Stem and Progenitor Cells2.2.1 Localization and Characterization; 2.2.2 The Repair and Regeneration Capacities and Mechanisms; 2.3 Lung Mesenchymal Stem and Progenitor Cells; 2.3.1 Lung Vascular Endothelial Stem and Progenitor Cells; 2.3.2 Lung Smooth Muscle Stem and Progenitor Cells; 2.3.3 The Repair and Regeneration Capacities;
    Chapter 3: Signals and Molecular Mechanisms Controlling Lung Stem/Progenitor Cell Development and Behavior; 3.1 Signals and Genes Regulating General Lung Cell Growth and Development. 3.2 Signals and Genes Regulating Lung Stem/Progenitor Cell Behavior: The Self-Renewing and Differentiation3.2.1 Role of Transcription Factors; 3.2.2 Role of Growth Factors; 3.2.3 Role of Micro-RNAs (miRNAs); 3.2.4 Role of Other Factors and Signal Molecules; 3.2.5 Role of the Epigenetic Factors; 3.3 Regulatory Signal Mechanisms of Stem and Progenitor Cells During Lung Repair and Regeneration;
    Chapter 4: Signals and Molecular Mechanisms Regulating Stem Cell Behavior in Other Systems (e.g., Hematopoietic Stem Cells); 4.1 Hierarchy and Heterogeneity of Hematopoietic Stem and Progenitor Cells.
    Chapter 5: Mode of Cell Division as a Regulatory Mechanism for Lung Stem Cell Behavior Compared to Other Systems5.1 Asymmetrical Divisions of Stem Cells in Different Systems; 5.1.1 Intestinal Stem and Progenitor Cells of Drosophila; 5.1.2 Hematopoietic Stem and Progenitor Cells; 5.1.3 Muscle Stem and Progenitor Cells; 5.1.4 Epidermal Stem and Progenitor Cells; 5.1.5 Neural Stem and Progenitor Cells; 5.2 Asymmetrical Divisions of the Lung Epithelial Stem and Progenitor Cells; 5.2.1 Numb as a Key Regulator of Asymmetric Cell Division and Cell Fate in the Lung.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ganesh Raghu, Roberto G. Carbone, editors.
    Summary: This book details all aspects of lung transplantation and equips the general pulmonologist/physician with the necessary tools and knowledge to assist patients with the preparation for and care post lung transplantation. Written by global experts, chapters present general principles and history; indications and eligibility for lung transplantation, including screening for COPD, cystic fibrosis, scleroderma, Idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF) and idiopathic pulmonary arterial hypertension; approach to and complications of lung transplantation, such as prognostic markers, radiological approach, and immunology and rejection; and medical and surgical guidelines for lung transplantation. The goal of lung transplantation is to increase survival and to provide a greater quality of life for patients with untreatable end-stage lung disease and this book serves to best prepare clinicians in achieving that goal. Lung Transplantation: Evolving knowledge and New horizons offers valuable insights into this modality and is an authoritative resource for multidisciplinary services that include experts in pulmonary diseases, critical care, cardiology, thoracic surgery, infection diseases, internal medicine, radiology, immunology, nephrology, rehabilitation, psychology /psychiatry, nurses, social workers and nutritionists.

    Contents:
    General principles and considerations for lung transplantation
    The donor lung and the lung transplant recipient
    The lung transplant recipient : medical management
    Lung transplantation : future directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Daniel A. Lichtenstein.
    Contents:
    The tools of the BLUE-protocol: Basic notions: the indispensable
    Which unit
    Which probe
    Specific notions
    The seven principles of L.U.C.I.
    The BLUE-points
    The 10 signatures at a glance
    The pleural line
    The A-profile and the A-line
    The A-profile and lung sliding
    The B-line
    Interstitial syndrome and lung rockets
    The B-profile, the B'-profile
    The A'-profile and pneumothorax
    PLAPS
    PLAPS and pleural effusion
    PLAPS and lung consolidation. The C-profile
    BLUE-DVT. Deep venous thrombosis in the BLUE-protocol
    Simple emergency cardiac sonography
    The BLUE-protocol in clinical use: Basic principle of the BLUE-protocol. The 8 profiles. The data
    Excluded patients of the BLUE-protocol
    Frequently asked questions on the BLUE-protocol
    The BLUE-protocol and pneumonia.- The BLUE-protocol and acute hemodynamic pulmonary edema
    The BLUE-protocol, asthma and COPD
    The BLUE-protocol and pulmonary embolism.- The BLUE-protocol and pneumothorax.- The main products derived from the BLUE-protocol: Pink-protocol (lung ultrasound in ARDS)
    The LUCI-FLR project (decrease of medical irradiation)
    FALLS-protocol (heart, lung, venous ultrasound in management of acute circulatory failure).- SESAME-protocol (ultrasound in cardiac arrest).- Extension of lung ultrasound to specific disciplines, wider settings, various considerations: Lung ultrasound in the neonate.- All specialties involved in lung ultrasound.- Critical ultrasound, lung, heart and DVT apart.- The Extended BLUE-protocol.- Non critical ultrasound.- Various considerations.- How to learn the BLUE-protocol.- Holistic ultrasound, a new definition
    how it can impact critical medicine.- Lung artifacts from A to Z.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Karam B. Singh, Lars G. Kamphuis, Matthew N. Nelson, editors.
    Summary: This book on lupin genomics primarily focuses on the narrow-leafed lupin (NLL), and details the genomic resources that have been developed and how they are currently being used to help advance both fundamental and applied research on NLL in areas ranging from its domestication to plant-microbe interactions and syntenic relationships between NLL and other legume crops. It also reports on genomic efforts being pursued with regard to other lupin crops. Lupins are important ecological 'engineers': they can colonise and thrive in low-nutrient soils due to their ability to fix atmospheric nitrogen in symbiosis with bacteria and efficiently take up phosphorous. Recently, lupins have attracted considerable interest, not only because of their value for sustainable farming as a break crop, but also as a potential 'super food' for fighting major health issues in connection with diabetes and obesity. Narrow-leafed lupin is the main grain legume crop, grown primarily in Australia, and was therefore selected for the development of a reference lupin genome and associated genomic resources. Its genome has recently been sequenced with a focus on the gene-rich space, which has advanced the development of new breeding tools for the improvement of NLL and related lupin crops.

    Contents:
    Introduction to lupins and their importance
    Lupin breeding
    lessons from the past and prospects for the future
    Ecophysiology and genetic resources for genetic/genomic improvement of NLL
    NLL reference genome
    Cytomolecular insight into/Lupinus/ genomes
    NLL transcriptomics
    Molecular marker resources
    Targeted towards Australian breeding program
    Syntenic relationships between NLL and other legume crops
    Exploiting NLL genomic resources to understand NLL domestication
    Genomic applications to dissect plant-microbe interactions
    Genomic applications to dissect flowering time control in NLL
    GBS-based genomic selection in white lupin
    Genomic efforts for L. luteus
    L. mutabilis genome and associated evolutionary analyses
    Genomic efforts to analyse repetitive elements in lupin species.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Raymond Chuen-Chung Chang, Kwok-Fai So, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Chemical and genetic diversity of Wolfberry
    2. Immunoregulation and Lycium Barbarum
    3. The antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, and antiapoptotic effects of Wolfberry in fatty liver disease
    4. Effectts of Lycium barbarum on modulation of blood vessel and hemodynamics
    5. Dermatologic uses and effects of Lycium barbarum
    6. Lycium Barbarum and tumors in the gastrointestinal tract
    7. Prevention of neurodegeneration for Alzheimer's disease by Lycium barbarum
    8. Prosexual effects of Lycium Barbarum
    9. Lycium Barbarum: neuroprotective effects in ischemic stroke
    10. Secondary degeneration after partial optic nerve injury and possible neuroprotective effects of Lycium Barbarum (Wolfberry)
    11. Role of Lycium Barbarum extracts in retinal diseases
    12. Allergenic sensitisation mediated by Wolfberry.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Klaus-Peter Hunfeld, Jeremy Gray, editors.
    Summary: This book is a compact clinical introduction to Lyme borreliosis for physicians of all specialties who care for patients with suspected B. burgdorferi infection, whether in hospital or general practice. The book provides a great deal of practice-oriented information on symptomatology, diagnosis, treatment, and prophylaxis with a special emphasis on the situation in Europe. At the same time, it describes contemporary scientific knowledge in as much detail as is required in order to understand the pathogenetic relationships and their relevance to medical care. The authors are members of an interdisciplinary expert group of epidemiologists, biologists, microbiologists, and clinicians who have been working in the area of tick-borne diseases for many years. The personal experience of each of the authors, accumulated through their daily work with patients in special clinics or by confrontation with complicated questions in basic research, epidemiology, and laboratory diagnostics of Lyme borreliosis, represents an important mainstay of the book. Written from the perspective of clinical management and practical problem-solving, this topical monograph will assist clinicians in meeting diagnostic challenges and providing appropriate medical aid to patients with Lyme borreliosis.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1) Characteristics of Borrelia burgdorferi sensu lato
    Chapter 2) Tick Ecology and Eco-epidemiology of Borrelia burgdorferi sensu lato
    Chapter 3) Pathogenesis and Immune Defense
    Chapter 4) The History, Epidemiology, Clinical Manifestations and Treatment of Lyme Borreliosis
    Chapter 5) Special Aspects of Lyme Borreliosis in the United States
    Chapter 6) Laboratory Diagnosis of Lyme Borreliosis
    Chapter 7) Prophylactic Measures Including Future Perspectives
    Chapter 8) Public Health Aspects of Lyme Borreliosis - The German Experience
    Chapter 9) Other Ixodes-Borne Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Pio Zeppa, Immacolata Cozzolino.
    Contents:
    Fine-needle cytology : technical procedures and ancillary techniques
    Lymph nodal structure and cytological patterns
    Lymphadenitis and lymphadenopathy
    Non-Hodgkin lymphoma
    Hodgkin lymphoma
    Paediatric lymphadenopathies
    Immunodeficiency-associated lymphoproliferative disorders
    Extranodal and deeply located lymphoproliferative processes
    Metastases
    Lymph node haematopoietic and histiocytic proliferatons and other lymphoid organs.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Shoji Natsugoe, editor.
    Summary: This book provides the most comprehensive and up-to-date knowledge of lymph node micrometastasis (LMM) and sentinel node navigation surgery (SNNS) in gastrointestinal cancers. Lymph node metastasis is a critically important prognostic factor in gastrointestinal tract cancers such as tumors of the esophagus, stomach, and colorectum. An understanding of the basic aspects of lymphatics and lymph nodes, including anatomy, histology, physiology, immunology, and molecular biology, is fundamental for physicians who are involved in cancer treatment. Furthermore, owing to the development of molecular and biological methodology, the precise recognition of LMM and its clinical significance have been clarified recently. At the same time, SNNS has actually been anticipated in treatment of breast tumors, and it is now being introduced in gastrointestinal tract cancer. For the application of SNNS, the detection of lymph node metastasis including LMM is extremely significant, because the presence of LMM determines the direction for surgery and chemo and/or radiation therapy. With these considerations in mind, the expert contributors to this book review basic and clinical approaches for LMM and SNNS including methodology for gastrointestinal cancers. Thus this volume benefits not only surgeons who treat gastrointestinal cancers but also clinical oncologists and medical scientists such as physiologists and pathologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Michel R. Nasr, Anamarija M. Perry, Pamela Skrabek.
    Summary: Lymph node pathology is a complex and rapidly evolving field that requires integration of morphologic findings with a number of ancillary studies, as well as clinical information, to diagnose neoplastic and non-neoplastic hematopoietic disorders. Lymphomas are currently classified according to the 2016 revision of the World Health Organization (WHO) Classification, which emphasizes, and for some diagnoses mandates, the integration of clinical information in diagnostic decision making. Successful collaboration and teamwork between pathology and clinical specialties, especially hematology/oncology, are paramount for excellent patient care. In addition to diagnosis, pathology plays a significant role in lymphoma prognostication and contributes to patient management and follow-up. Lymph Node Pathology for Clinicians provides a concise overview of different entities in lymph node pathology with the primary audience being clinicians. This text is intended as a quick reference for a clinician to become familiar with pathologic aspects of lymphomas and the thought process of a pathologist. Particular consideration is given to relevant diagnostic and prognostic ancillary studies. Organized with an interdisciplinary approach for effective management of lymph node disorders, this book aims to educate our clinical colleagues on the most important aspects of lymph node pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Trilok Chandra Goel, Apul Goel.
    Contents:
    Part I: Parasitology Including General Discussion
    History
    Epidemiology
    Etiology
    Lymphatic System
    Pathology of Lymphatic Filariasis
    Clinical Features
    Investigations
    Treatment and Prognosis
    Prevention and Control
    Antifilarial Drugs
    Clinical Manifestations of Filariasis
    Part II: Acute Clinical Manifestations
    Filarial Fever
    Acute Filarial Lymphangitis (AFL)
    Acute Lymphadenitis (ADL)
    Acute Dermatolymphangioadenitis (ADLA)
    Filarial Funiculitis
    Filarial Epididymo-orchitis
    Filarial Cellulitis-abscess
    Part III: Chronic Clinical Manifestations
    Hydrocele of Tunica Vaginalis Testis
    Chronic Lymphedema-elephantiasis
    Chronic Lymphedema-elephantiasis of Lower Extremity
    Chronic Lymphedema-elephantiasis of Scrotum
    Chronic Lymphedema-elephantiasis of Penis
    Chronic Lymphedema-elephantiasis of Upper Extremity
    Filarial Manifestations of Female Breast
    Chronic Lymphedema-elephantiasis of Vulva
    Filarial Lymph Varix
    Lymph Scrotum (Superficial Scrotal Lymphangiomatosis)
    Chylous Manifestations (Syndromes) of Lymphatic Filariasis (Filarial Chylous Disease)
    Chyluria
    Chylous Ascites: Chyloperitoneum
    Chylocele
    Chylothorax
    Chylous Diarrhea
    Chylous Arthritis (Filarial Arthropathy)
    Chylo-lymphatic Cyst
    Eosinophilia in Lymphatic Filariasis
    Filarial Hematuria
    Very Rare Manifestations
    Brugia Timori Filariasis
    Summary.-References
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Brij Kishore Tyagi, editor.
    Summary: Lymphatic Filariasis (LF) is a group of human and animal infectious diseases caused by nematode parasites of the order Filariidae. Often neglected, it is one of the oldest and the most debilitating tropical diseases (NTDs), transmitted from human to human by mosquitoes bites, particularly the brown black mosquito known as Culex quinquifasciatus. LF is a major public health problem in many parts of the tropics, especially India, which accounts for as much as 40% of total global cases. As a leading cause of permanent and long-term disability worldwide, the parasite infection imposes a severe physical and socioeconomic burden. The World Health Organization (WHO) estimates that 1.4 billion people live in high-risk areas - 120 million of which are already infected with LF, including 22 million children below the age of 15 and about 76 million who suffer from damaged lymphatic and renal systems. India has made great strides toward eliminating the disease, and these advances are of global significance. They include early diagnosis mechanisms, vaccine product development, detection of parasites in the vector, and studies on parasite evolution trends in nature as warning signals. Reports on the successes and failures are needed to enable measures to be taken to avoid disaster and ensure a smooth transition from endemicity in India to the elimination of lymphatic filariasis by 2020. This book, which gathers highly original contributions on various subjects related to lymphatic filariasis, discusses the latest scientific research that will help the nation to achieve this milestone. It also serves as a guide to many other countries struggling against this highly debilitating and incapacitating disease.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgement; Contents; About the Editor;
    1: Epidemiology of Lymphatic Filariasis; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Filariasis Control Globally and in India; 1.3 Geographical Distribution; 1.4 Transmission Cycle; 1.5 Reservoir of Infection; 1.6 The Vectors; 1.7 Host Factors; 1.8 Environmental Factors; 1.9 Pathogenesis; 1.10 Clinical Features; 1.11 Infection/Disease Surveillance; 1.12 Current Control Strategy of Lymphatic Filariasis; 1.13 Conclusion; References;
    2: Lymphatic Filariasis Elimination: Update for Mission Possible; 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 National Filaria Control Programme2.3 Organization Set-Up Recommended for NFCP; 2.4 Disease Endemicity; 2.5 Control Measures; 2.6 Genesis of Elimination of Lymphatic Filariasis (ELF); 2.7 National Goal and Strategy for ELF; 2.8 Mass Drug Administration; 2.9 Drug Compliance Assessment; 2.10 Transmission Assessment Survey (TAS); 2.11 Capacity Building; 2.12 Social Mobilization; 2.13 Morbidity Management; 2.14 Future Plan; References;
    3: Next Step Lymphatic Filariasis Eradication: Current Status in the Development of a Vaccine Against Lymphatic Filariasis; 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Development of Immunity Against LF3.2.1 Concept of "Endemic Normal" and Natural Immunity to LF; 3.2.2 The Need for Developing a Vaccine Against LF in the Human; 3.3 Developing a Vaccine Against LF; 3.3.1 Early Attempts to Develop a Vaccine Against LF; 3.3.2 Strategies for Selecting the Vaccine Antigens Against LF; 3.3.3 LF Parasites Modulate Host Immune Responses; 3.3.4 Animal Models and Limitations to Developing a Vaccine Against LF; 3.3.5 Screening Filariasis Genome to Identify Vaccine Candidates; 3.3.6 Improving the Vaccine Efficacy. 3.4 Future Prospects and Hurdles Before an LF Vaccine Becomes Available for the End Game to Control the Infection3.5 Concluding Remarks; References;
    4: Progress in the Treatment and Control of Lymphatic Filariasis; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 B. malayi Targets; 4.3 Wolbachia; 4.4 Wolbachia as Antifilarial Target; 4.5 Moxidectin; 4.6 Conclusion and Prospects; References;
    5: Immunotechnological Advancements in Developing Vaccines for Lymphatic Filariasis; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Filarial Vaccines: Possible or Impossible?; 5.3 Challenges; 5.4 Animal Models for Vaccine Studies. 5.5 Milestones in LF Vaccination Studies5.5.1 Parasites and Crude Antigens; 5.5.2 Recombinant Filarial Vaccine Candidates; 5.6 Identification Methods for LF Vaccine Targets; 5.7 Different Categories of LF Vaccine Candidates; 5.7.1 Host-Parasite Interface: A Niche for Vaccine Candidates; 5.7.2 Metabolic Enzymes: Antioxidants; 5.8 Infective Stage-Specific Antigens; 5.8.1 Abundant Larval Transcripts (ALT): A Prototype L3 Stage Candidate Antigen; 5.8.2 Modern Approaches for LF Vaccine Development; 5.9 Immunomics: Identification of Immunogenic Proteins; 5.10 Peptide Vaccine Approach.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Byung-Boong Lee, Stanley G. Rockson, John Bergan, editors.
    Summary: The second edition of this book serves as a central source of theoretical and practical knowledge to optimize the evaluation and treatment of patients with lymphedema. The book covers all aspects of the disease from anatomical and histological features to diagnosis as well as physical/medical and surgical management of the disease. Updated from the first edition to reflect the substantial progress in diagnostics, medical care and surgical intervention for this patient population, this volume has been reorganized to meet today's practice requirements. It addresses the challenges faced by clinicians in the management of chronic lymphedema enabling them to meet the medical needs of this large patient community. Edited by world leaders in Vascular Medicine and Surgery, this comprehensive volume provides clear, concise background and recommendations in an easy-to-use format. It is a valuable reference tool for clinical practitioners (physicians/nurse practitioners/technicians) who wish to deliver state-of-the-art health care to their patients with lymphatic and venous disorders.

    Contents:
    Section I
    Introduction
    1. General Considerations
    2. Etiology and Classification of Lymphatic Disorders
    3. Hereditary and Familial Lymphedemas.-Section II
    Embryology, Anatomy, & Histology
    4. Embryology of the Lymphatic System and Lymphangiogenesis
    5. Anatomy of the Lymphatic System and Its Structural Disorders in Lymphoedema
    Section III
    Physiology, Pathophysiology and Lymphodynamic
    6. General Overview
    7. Lymphodynamics
    8. Physiology- Lymph Flow
    9. Biomechanics of the Lymphatic Circulation
    10. Pathology & Histochemistry
    11. Lymph Formation and Composition
    Section IV
    Clinical Diagnosis
    12. General Overview
    13. Lymphedema Epidemiology.-14. Clinical Staging
    15. Combined Clinical and Laboratory (Lymphoscintigraphic) Staging
    16. Early Diagnosis in the Latent Phase
    17. Cutaneous Manifestations of Edema
    18. The Diagnosis of Edema and Its Pathogenesis
    19. Differential Diagnosis: Venous Edema
    20. Differential Diagnosis: Lipedema.-Section V
    Laboratory/Imaging Diagnosis
    21. General Guidelines
    22. Radionuclide Lymphoscintigraphy
    23. Duplex ultrasonography
    24. Oil Contrast Lymphangiography
    25. Microscopic Lymphoangiography
    26. Near Infrared Fluorescent Lymphography
    27. MR Lymphangiography
    28. Combined role of the lymphoscintigraphy, Xray Computed Tomography, Magnetic Resonance Imaging, and Positron Emission Tomography in the Management of Lymphedematous Disease
    29. Alternative Assessment & Measurement Tools
    Section VI
    Physical and Medical Management
    30. General Overview
    31. Complete Decongestive Physiotherapy
    32. Decongestive Lymphatic Therapy
    33. Compression Therapy
    34. Intermittent Pneumatic Compression Therapy
    35. Other contemporary Treatment Modalities
    36. Medical Treatment Options
    37. Diagnosis and Managment of Infection in Lymphedema
    38. The Prospect for Genetic and Growth Factor Therapy
    39. Adherence and Quality of Life
    40. Lymphedema within the Healthcare System
    Section VII
    Practical issues in the Physiotherapeutic Approach to Lymphedema
    41. Lower Limb Lymphedema
    42. Upper Limb Lymphedema
    43. Head, Face and Neck Lymphedema
    44. Genital Lymphedema
    Section VIII
    Surgical Treatment
    Reconstructive Surgery
    45. General Overview
    46. Principles of Patient Selection for Surgical Management of Lymphedema
    47. Lymphatic-Venous Derivative and Reconstructive Microsurgery
    48. Lymphatic-Lymphatic Reconstructive Microsurgery
    49. Lymph Node-Venous Microvascular Reconstructive Surgery: Filariasis Lymphedema
    50. Vascularized Lymph Node Transfer for the Treatment of Lymphedema
    51. A Combined Microsurgical Reconstruction Approach for Lymphedema
    52. Current Dilemmas and Controversy in Reconstructive Surgery for Lymphedema
    53. Future Prospects in Lymphatic Reconstructive Surgery
    Section IX
    Surgical treatment: Excisional and Debulking Techniques
    54. General Principles
    55. Contemporary Indications and Controversies in Excisional Surgery
    56. From Lymph to Fat
    Liposuction as a Treatment for Complete Reduction of Lymphedema
    57. Surgical Management of Lipedema
    Section X
    Congenital Vascular Malformation with Lymphatic Involvement
    58. General Overview
    59. Primary lymphedema and Lymphatic Malformation
    60. Molecular Genetics of Lymphatic and Complex Vascular Malformations
    61. Syndromic Lymphedema and Complex Vascular Malformations with Lymphatic Involvement
    62. An Atlas of Neonatal and Infantile Lymphedema
    Section XII
    Management of Chyle Reflux and Effusions.-63. Pathophysiology and Medical Management of Chylous Disorders
    64. Surgical Management of Chylous Reflux and Effusions
    65. Endovascular Catheter-based Management of Chylous Effusions.-Section XII
    Lymphatic Filariasis
    66. Epidemiology
    67. Etiology & Pathophysiology
    68. Clinical Overview- Diagnosis and Management
    Section XIII
    Oncology and Lymphedema
    69. Breast Cancer.-70. Lower Extremity Cancers
    71. Radiation Considerations
    Section
    XIV
    Phlebolymphedema
    72. Diagnosis and Management of Primary Phlebolymphedema
    73. Diagnosis and Management of Secondary Phlebolymphedema
    74. Management of Phlebolymphedema Ulcer.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors: Peter C. Neligan, MB, FRCS(I), FRCSC, FACS, Professor of Surgery, Division of Plastic Surgery, University of Washington, Seattle, Washington, Jaume Masia, MD, PhD, Chief, Plastic Surgery Department, Hospital de la Santa Creu i Sant Pau, Professor of Plastic Surgery, School of Medicine at Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona, Director, Microsurgery and Breast Reconstructive Unit, Clinica Planas, Barcelona, Spain, Neil B. Piller, BS, PhD, FACP, Professor and Director, Lymphoedema Research Unit, Department of Surgery, Flinders University School of Medicine, Bedford Park, Adelaide, South Australia ; illustrated by Cassio Lynn.
    Summary: "Lymphedema: Complete Surgical and Medical Management is one of the first books to cover the state of the field, encompassing both surgical and nonsurgical treatments. It is divided into several areas: anatomy, physiology, and lymphangiogenesis; pathophysiology and clinical presentation; diagnosis; treatment - including surgical and pharmacologic therapy; and research and future directions. Building on this foundation, the text discusses diagnostic modalities, biomarkers, and differential lymph node mapping and clinical staging. It includes the history of lymphedema treatment and an overview of various past and present treatments in India and China, then explores pharmacological options, excisional approaches, liposuction, and venous implantation methods. Detailed presentations of lymphatic grafts and surgical treatments round out the coverage. The book closes with a discussion on animal models, improving patient outcomes, and the potential use of stem cells in lymphedema management. Using a consistent format throughout, the book includes more than 500 illustrations, many in color. A DVD with practical surgical videos is included. With US, European, and Asian-Pacific contributing experts, this book presents a truly global approach"--Publisher's description.
  • Digital
    Arin K. Greene, Sumner A. Slavin, Håkan Brorson, editors.
    Summary: This volume is a clinically-oriented book that can be used for patient care, teaching, or research. It covers the entire field of lymphedema, including both primary and secondary disease, as well as all diagnostic and treatment modalities. The text begins with a foundation for the condition, including its pathophysiology, epidemiology, and morbidity. Next, the classification of lymphedema is covered which is the template for accurate diagnosis. Clinical, radiological, and differential diagnosis of lymphedema is also reviewed. Finally, conservative and operative management is presented, including both physiologic and excisional procedures. Lymphedema: Presentation, Diagnosis, and Treatment provides a comprehensive, easy-to-read reference for any health care provider managing a patient with lymphedema. The text is clinically-focused, evidence-based, and practical. The reader, regardless of his/her level of training or specialty, will be able to adequately treat a patient with lymphedema using this resource. To facilitate its use in clinical settings, the book was designed to be portable. In addition, diagnostic and treatment algorithms are included to further simplify the management of these patients. Patient images are presented throughout the text to illustrate the clinical care of lymphedema. All chapters are written by experts in the field, and contain the most current information on the topic.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Overview of Lymphedema
    The Lymphatic System
    Pathophysiology of Lymphedema
    Genetic Causes of Lymphedema
    Epidemiology and Morbidity of Lymphedema
    Myths Associated with Lymphedema
    The Lymphedema Center and Multidisciplinary Management
    Section 2: Classification of Lymphedema
    Primary Lymphedema
    Secondary Lymphedema
    Obesity-Induced Lymphedema
    Section 3: Diagnosis of Lymphedema
    History and Physical Examination
    Volume Measurements and Follow-Up
    Bioelectrical Impedance Spectroscopy for the Assessment of Lymphedema: Principles and Practice
    Assessing Free and Bound Water in Skin at 300 MHz Using Tissue Dielectric Constant Measurements with the MoistureMeterD
    Conventional Imaging Modalities for the Diagnosis of Lymphedema
    Lymphoscintigraphy and Other Imaging Methods
    Differential Diagnosis of Lymphedema
    Section 4: Non-Operative Management of Lymphedema
    Activities of Daily Living
    Controlled Compression Therapy and Compression Garments
    Complex Decongestive Therapy
    Pneumatic Compression
    Section 5: Operative Management of Lymphedema
    Uncommon Procedures for Lymphedema
    Lymphatic Vessel Transplantation
    Lymphatic-Venous Anastomosis
    Lymph Node Transfer to Proximal Extremity
    Lymph Node Transfer to Distal Extremity
    Charles Procedure
    Staged Skin and Subcutaneous Excision
    Suction-Assisted Lipectomy
    Treatment of Lymphocele
    Genital Lymphedema.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    senior author, Stanley S. Raphael ; authors, Charles F. A. Culling ... [et al.].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RB37 .L9 1976
    2
  • Digital
    Naohiro Tomita, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive review of Lynch Syndrome (LS), addressing both the basic and clinical aspects of this condition. Due to the recent advances in our understanding of the genetic mechanism of LS, and to new screening methods, including universal screening and/or multi-gene panel analysis, the standard treatment strategy for patients and family members of LS have been steadily improving. In this book, experts describe the diseases manifestations, discuss state-of-the-art diagnosis and management options, and offer a cutting-edge overview of the genetic and epigenetic basis of the syndrome. Providing essential insights into this new phase in the management of LS, this book is a valuable resource not only for colorectal surgeons, but also for general gastrointestinal clinicians, gynecologists, oncologists and all basic researchers with an interest in LS.

    Contents:
    1 Molecular mechanism of Lynch syndrome
    2 Clinical features of Lynch syndrome
    3 Pathology of Lynch syndrome-associated tumors
    4 Immunohistochemistry for mismatch repair proteins
    5 Genetic analysis for Lynch syndrome
    6 Lynch syndrome-associated gynecological malignancies
    7 Lynch syndrome-associated urological malignancies
    8 Screening for Lynch syndrome
    9 Surveillance Colonoscopy for Lynch Syndrome Patients
    10 Surgical approach for colorectal cancer in patients with Lynch syndrome
    11 Immunotherapy for Lynch syndrome patients
    12 Chemoprevention for Lynch syndrome-associated malignancies
    13 International collaboration for Lynch syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Frances Platt, Nick Platt.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
all 391 "L" titles

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.